Home

GuardPLC Controller Systems, User Manual

1. 1 0 Data Read Write Description Cnt 0x GrayCode Read Write Gray code mode of counter 1 or 2 0 Pulse 1 Gray Cnt Ox Halt Read Write currently not used Cnt 0x Reset Read Write Reset for counter 1 or 2 0 Resetting of counter 1 No resetting of counter Cnt 0x State Read Error mask of counter 1 or 2 0x01 Error in counter unit 0x02 Error while comparing the counts 0x04 Error while comparing the time stamps 0x08 Error resetting counter Cnt 0x Time Overflow Read Overflow indicator of time stamp of counter 1 or 2 true 24 bits overflow since last cycle false No 24 bits overflow since last cycle Cnt 0x Time Stamp Read Time stamp for Cnt Ox Value cyclic 24 bit 24 bits time resolution 1us Cnt 0x Value Overflow Read Overflow indicator of counter 1 or 2 true 24 bits overflow since last cycle only when Automatic Counter Advance Sense false false No 24 bits overflow since last cycle DO State Read Error mask for all counter outputs 0x0001 Error of the DO section of the module 0x0002 Within the multiple error occurrence time safety switch 1 faulty 0x0004 Within the multiple error occurrence time safety switch 2 faulty 0x0008 Within the multiple error occurrence time test sample tests faulty 0x0010 Within the multiple error occurrence time readback channels faulty 0x0020 Within the multiple error occurrence time active switch off faulty 0x0100 Within the safety
2. 10 Mbit 10 Mbit Hub Hub Programming Terminal Twisted Pair Cable max 100 m Iv Buffer Amp f Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Fiber Optic Cable adan daad E 10 Mbit Switch www gege The None Profile The None profile is different from the profiles described previously To set the parameters choose either Fast or Medium from the HH because it has no pre defined parameters You must set all the parameters manually Network Token Group dialog box and click Apply This presets the parameters according to the profile To enable manual changes and activate the entry fields choose None value ranges and their impact on the availability of the network is and click Apply again The former parameter settings will be overridden and can then be changed Because the profiles Fast and Medium cover nearly all conceivable network topologies None is recommended for evaluation purposes only An extensive knowledge of the functions of the parameters their required for proper manual parameterization The None profile should not be used in regular applications 167 Chapter 16 Peer to peer Communication Overview Peer to Peer Network Profiles 168 Due to the variety of parameters manual network configuration is very complex and requires extensive knowledge of
3. 255 mm 10 in Including Flanges gt 236 mm 9 3 in Width Eyelet to Eyelet A 66 66 oo joo oo oo 66 66 66 15 9 mm 0 63 in oo oo oo OO OO Allen Bradley Se 8 Eyelet o o e SauaraPLC 2000 bes 8 8 C E E E ri Flanges 177 8 mm 8 a 7 0 in 285 mm o 8 11 2 in T o lo 11 2 in 38 i E oo E oes amp p B l 8 o f Depth l fi 218 mm KR ae 8 6 in ojojo T S Includes Termination Plug S S9 Y Pup WEN 35 Chapter 2 36 Installation GuardPLC 2000 Controller 1 0 and Power Supply Mount the GuardPLC 2000 chassis prior to installing the controller I O and power supply Disconnect the power supply 1755 PB720 from the 24V DC supply voltage before you insert any UU modules 1 Before you insert the device you must detach the grounding grill To do this remove the grounding grill screws 2 Remove the lower panel of the chassis and disconnect the fans 3 Power Supply Insert the power supply into the leftmost slot of the chassis Controller Insert the controller into the slot directly to the right of the power supply module slot 0 I O Module Insert the module into any unused slot from 1 6 see the figure below Keep the module in line with the guides so the module runs smoothly in the track Begin pushing the device into the chassis a If ther
4. Topic JPage Modbus RTU Slave Protocol 275 Connect the Controller to a Modbus Device 276 Configure the Modbus Serial Port 276 Connect Signals 277 Profibus DP Slave Protocol 279 Connect the Controller to a Profibus DP Device 279 Configure the Profibus DP Serial Port 280 Connect Signals 280 Configure the Profibus Master 282 Modbus is available only on GuardPLC 1600 or 1800 controllers You can connect a Modbus master to the controller s COMMI port This Modbus connection is two way non safety related communication between the controller slave and the master device You cannot program the controller by using this port The controller is a Modbus RTU slave device and responds only to reads and writes from the master To use the Modbus function signals that you wish to send out receive into the COMM1 port must be connected to placeholders in the Modbus protocol Connect Signals dialog box 275 Chapter 22 Communicate with Modbus and Profibus Devices Connect the Controller to a Modbus Device Connection Signal Function 1 et mos 2 RP 5V decoupled with diodes 3 RxD TxD A Receive Transmit data A 4 CNTR A Control Signal A 5 DGND Data reference potential 6 VP DV positive pole of supply voltage l 8 RxD TxD B Receive Transmit data B 9 CNTR B Control Signal B IMPORTANT The Modbus port is RS 485 You must use an electrical l interface device to connect the
5. SLC 5 05 Controller F MSG Rung 2 0 N10 0 General MultiHop This Controller r Control Bits Message Transmitting ST e Message Enabled EN 0 r Error Error Code Hex 0 Control ee nm EI Communication Command PLC5 Read Ignore if timed out TO o g a ate isi is Data Table Address To be retried NA 0 Awaiting Execution Ew e Size in Elements 4 Awaiting Execution Ew D ge Channet bh Continuous Run C0 0 ntinuous Run CO n Gage trot ER S jana Devica Message done DN o M done DN a i Fee Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST fo Data Table Address BLK_121 6 W Local Remote MuliHop Yes Message Enabled EN 0 Waiting for Queue Space o m Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors Parameter Communication Command PLC 5 Controller Settings Choose PLC 5 Typed Read or PLC 5 Typed Write SLC 5 05 Controller Settings Choose either PLC5 Read or PLC5 Write Data Table Address Enter the source file address for a write or the destination file address for a read Enter the source file address for a write or the destination file address for a read Size in Elements The number of items to read or write 1 1000 The actual number of bytes transmitted is based on the data type of the file specif
6. Wil Module Properties ENBT_1 ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 3 Controller Demo Config 1 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler General Connection Module Info 73 Power Up Handler 2 E Tasks fa MainTask Requested Packet Interval RPI hoo me 1 0 3200 0 ms 2 MainProgram Inhibit Module Program Tags E MainRoutine Maier Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode E Unscheduled Programs Module Fault 1 Motion Groups E Ungrouped Axes Trends 3 Data Types 9 User Defined RH Cg Strings Oh Predefined Gj Module Defined 2 3 1 0 Configuration amp B 1 1756 ENBT A ENBT_1 ETHERNET MODULE GPLC_Exch KE Running Cancel Help Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 225 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 226 Monitor Connection Status To monitor the status of your connections follow these steps 1 Go online with the GuardPLC controller by using RSLogix Guard PLUS software 2 Switch to the EIP tab of the Control Panel and click the Connection Status tab Tal RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Control Panel Resource QE Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help FA GPLC1600 44 Configu EMO ep PADT Resource Communication TestMode Extra Help S gt mg o Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distributed O HH State Environment Data os IP Settings ModbusMs License F P
7. Topic Page Configure the GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 215 Open a Class 1 Connection from a Logix Controller to the GuardPLC 219 Controller Open a Class 3 Connection from a Logix Controller 228 Use a GuardPLC Controller as an Unconnected Adapter 235 Use Unconnected PCCC Messaging from a PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 Controller 235 Use Unconnected CIP Messaging from a PanelView Standard Terminal 243 Make sure the GuardPLC controller resource has the EtherNet IP protocol added under the Protocols folder in the RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management project tree If it does not see page 203 for instructions on adding EtherNet IP protocol Configure the Adapter Input Assembly Input assemblies contain data that is produced by the GuardPLC controller and consumed by a scanner 1 You can use the default input assembly IN 120 or create a new input assembly by right clicking EtherNet IP in the project tree and choosing New gt Input Assembly Modify the input assembly properties if desired by right clicking the input assembly and choosing Properties Jz JRSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help Eg SDProject Configuration Resource Protocols Ethernet 1Pa nix B 44 Configuration botze i BX E0000 Resource Wes ds cca i R Distributed 1 0 Name IN 3 20 Assembly ID fi 20 Run ldle header ip 120 IN 120 0211 OUT 121 Ok Cancel Apply Help PBT unal
8. i3 File Edit View Network Device Connection Help ki 5 hot ail Edits Enabled Current Current Entries Used D of 32 Data Input File Usage 0 00 Data Output File Usage 0 00 Resource U lax 4 gt Nttode Memory Usage Address Slot Parameters Entry N Device Name Connection Namt Insert Connection Ctrl I Auto Insert b Auto Address L TIP If the controller is in the RUN mode a warning message appears instructing you to put the scanner into the STOP VALID CONFIGURATION mode before you attempt to add connections gt Control Panel Resource PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help 95 Or mg o Resource State Safety Parameters Staistics P2P State A CPU State STOP VALID CONFIGURATION COM State STOP VALID CONFIGURATION Faulty 1 0 Modules Remaining Force Time s 256 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Chapter 20 6 Configure the Connection Properties for the I O module using the Connection tab on the Connection Properties dialog box Connection Properties Connection Electronic Keying Details Configuration Setting Target Information To Address MEAE Device Name 1734 IB4 C 4pt DC Input To Slot 01 Fonnen Direct Input Only X Communication Parameters Name Value Requested Packet Interval ms 110 m Addressing Parameters Input Size 25 el Words Input Address
9. 0x01 Error in digital output module he controller or module 0x02 Output switched off due to overload 0x04 Error when reading back the activation of the digital outputs 0x08 Error when reading back the status of the digital outputs Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 1 0 Data L Switching Outputs DO1 Error Code System Signal Variables Appendix B Digital Output Parameters for 1753 IB8X0B8 Modules In addition to the output parameters in the table on page 318 the GuardPLC 1753 IB8XOB8 module features these digital output parameters Read Description Write L Switching Outputs DO2 Error Code Read Error mask for all digital outputs 0x0001 Error in digital output range 0x0002 MEZ test of safety shutdown failed 0x0004 MEZ test auxiliary supply failed 0x0008 FTZ test of test pattern failed 0x0010 MEZ test of test pattern of the output switch failed 0x0020 MEZ test of test pattern of the output switch disconnection test of outputs failed 0x0040 MEZ test active disconnection via watchdog failed 0x0200 All outputs switched off total current exceeded 0x0400 FTZ test 1 Temperature threshold exceeded 0x0800 FTZ test 2 Temperature threshold exceeded 0x1000 FTZ test Monitoring of auxiliary supply 1 Undervoltage DO1 xx Error Code DO2po Error Code Read Error mask of all digital output channels 0x01 Err
10. Faulty 10 Module re mod COM IF le IPAddess 1832 188 0 D SwemRak T 4 9 User name Password Access type Read write bd After a controller has been dropped in the Multi Control Panel the Login dialog box opens Type the correct Username and Password to connect the controller to the programming terminal You must have Read Write or Administrator rights Access type to download a routine into the controller 4 Add as many controllers to the Multi Control Panel as you need 5 Sort the list of controllers in the Multi Control Panel by clicking on the column headlines Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Chapter 14 The Multi Control Panel displays this controller information ENS dd PADT Resource Online Table Help CPU State CPU Configuration CRC Ava Cycle Rem Force Time Faulty 1 0 Modu Action Robot Jeng D ama 7 VALID CONFIG EIER E bo pn All operations successfully terminated This fied Dislas Name the controller name System Rack the controller ID CPU State the status of the controller CPU such as Run Stop Stop Valid Configuration Stop Invalid Configuration and so forth CPU Configuration the checksum cyclic redundancy check of the CPU configuration CRC displayed in hexadecimal Avg Cycle Time the average CPU cycle time in milliseconds This figure depends on the comp
11. 60000 Resource i istributed 1 0 fif 123 OUT 123 GF Typelnstance Bin GuardPLC 1800 a Programming Terminal i MCP Configuration 11 20 2007 10 40 D E Info 4 Resource Offline By default the software creates one input assembly 120 and one output assembly 121 Input and output are referenced to the scanner Thus an input assembly is used to send data from the GuardPLC controller to the PanelView Plus terminal An output assembly is used to send data from the PanelView Plus terminal out to the GuardPLC controller For simplicity use separate assemblies for each of the four types of data transfer as shown above e Reading integers from the GuardPLC controller e Reading BOOLs from the GuardPLC controller e Writing integers to the GuardPLC controller e Writing integers to the GuardPLC controller 2 To add an assembly right click Ethernet IP choose New and then either input or output assembly 208 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Chapter 18 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Read Integers from the Controller and Display Them on the PanelView Plus Terminal This example uses input assembly 120 and shows how two integers can be read by the PanelView Plus terminal Two INT tags fromGuard INT1 and fromGuard INT2 were used in the controller as shown The names tag01 and tag02 in the input assembly window co
12. Click Next and type the desired packet rate for this connection in milliseconds Click Finish Listen Only Connections Listen only connections are similar to input only connections but all subsequent input only connections are dependent upon the first input only connection which is the owner connection When an owner connection is closed all subsequent listen only connections are also closed Module Properties ENBT_2 ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 Type ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Parent ENBT_2 Ci tion P ti Name GPLC_Listen_Only_Connection EE Assembly Description Instance Size Input 2 E em Dutput 138 Comm Format Input Data SINT e COQUE zz H 3 m onfiguration 8 bi Address Host Name EN PAddress 192 168 1 180 C Host Name Cancel Nest gt Finish Help 5 223 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter To establish a listen only connection follow these steps 1 2 6 224 Choose Input Data SINT in the Comm Format field Type the input assembly instance number in the Input Assembly Instance field Type the size of the input assembly in bytes in the Input Size field TTITTXETGRE Te entry must exactly match the size of the input assembly or the GuardPLC adapter controller will return an error The size of the input assembly is determined during the signal connection process Type 199 for the fi
13. Destination Function Code Start Address Number of End Sign Variables TIP is always 1 the third signal is always 2 and so forth ASCII Protocol the master device ASCII Master Request Start Sign 1 char 210 Component Description Start Sign identifies the start of a message character Destination unique slave address GuardPLC controller 01 99 Source unique master address requester 01 99 Function Code read data R character Start Address data start address for characters to read offset 00000 65535 Number of Variables number of variables to read and send back to master 000 999 End Sign identifies the end of a message amp character Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Communicate with ASCII Devices Chapter 21 For example this string requests the first two variables from the slave Destination Function Code Start Address Number of Variables 15 01 R 002 00000 Start Sign End Sign ASCII Slave Controller Response If the controller receives a request from an ASCII master it responds in this format each character is one byte Start Sign Destination Function Start Number of Number of End Sign Code Address Variables Characters 1 char 2 char 2 char 1 char 5 char 3 char 4 char maximum 1 char 10000 char Component Description Start Sign identifies the start of a message character Destination uni
14. RecipePlus Editor 1 System 4 Action Groups Policies dr Networks and Devices LI Users and Groups 9 Connections Application communicators J 3 On the Communications tab verify that RSLinx Enterprise software can browse and locate the GuardPLC controller FactoryTalk View Studio Machine Edition DER File View Application Tools Window Help easan s skle Explorer GuardPLC_CPR9test R RSLinx Enterprise USMAYWEWALTZ3 89 1789 417 Backplane H ag EtherNet Ethernet m 192 168 0 99 1753 L32BBBx 8A 1753 L32BBBx 8A GPLC 1800 Mode Online Not Browsing Application Communications j Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Chapter 18 4 To add a shortcut for the GuardPLC controller to your application double click Communication Setup under the RSLinx Enterprise Server Ki FactoryTalk View Studio Machine Edition File View Application Tools Window Help jw SO we E e Explorer GuardPLC_CPR3test 2 Local USMAYWEWALTZ3 flm GuardPLC CPRStest El RSLinx Enterprise el Communication Setup i BR Gsm 5 H System Sy HMI Tags e 5 On the Design Local tab select the GuardPLC controller 6 On the Device Shortcuts pane click Add and type a name for the shortcut When you choose a name for the shortcut note that because there is no tag browsing for GuardPLC controllers you will h
15. e applications that require the shortest feasible Worst case Reaction Time TIP Because Token Passing is switched off in the Fast profile it is possible to generate a token group with only one controller No second controller is needed to exchange the token The single controller can communicate with other token groups containing more controllers 1 A token group consists of at least two controllers which share the same token Each controller must be a member of exactly one token group A token group can work stand alone or can exchange data with other token groups 161 Chapter 16 Peer to peer Communication Overview The minimum network requirements are outlined this table Minimum Ethernet Network Requirements for Profile Requirement Definition Fast 100 Mbps technology 100 Base TX Switched Fast Ethernet full duplex recommended LAN switches or integrated switches GuardPLC 1600 1800 controller required Cleanroom No loss of data due to traffic overload harsh environmental conditions or network defects The network can be shared with other applications if sufficient Tr bandwidth is provided 162 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Peer to peer Communication Overview Example of HH Network Profile Topology Token Group 1 GuardPLC 2000 Controllers GuardPLC 1200 Controller 100 Mbps LAN Switch Buffer Amp Progr
16. D1 Di Di 194 1 2 3 4L 184 5 6 7 8l LS 9 1011 12L LS 13 14 1516 L LS 17 181920 L 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 13 14 15 16 1718 13 202223 5232728230 s m mM asm 3 9 9 4 uo GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT 3 3 Hi 1 FEET D T 2222 28 20 2 28 29 30 an BER E E O Dry Contact Light Curtain Safety Input Light Curtain 24V DC Power Supply COM Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wiring Examples Appendix C GuardPLC 1800 Controller Light Curtain Safety Input Light Curtain Safety Input n 24VDC Power S COM Supply EN CC zug c uwbbuwssau NUS UT S TI 2 15 14 1 16 17 18 19 20 A 223A 5 6 7 B A 0 ST 3 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 ooooo 00000000 00000000 00000000 DILS 12345678L DIIS41234567 8L DI LS 1 234567 8L 24VDC Power Supply COM Dry Contact Pulse Tested Safety Input 1753 L34BBBP Ce 24 DC Inputs o o 24V DC COMM3 COMM2 COMMI o R N G UQ d PLC 8 DC Outputs o 1800 8 Analog Inputs ERROR 2 High Speed Counters O PROG Al Al Al Al HSC OFRE ott werner BML BBL TOL BBL MeL ARAL O Fault O osL 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 OBL GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT DIS Ha 4 wire Device Using External Power Power Supply COM 4 wire Device Using Transmit
17. OK Cancel Apply Help i E E E 2 E E E 2 mmm ij 192 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Chapter 17 4 For all controllers in your project re adjust the Watchdog Times to their individual optimum values After these modifications you must re compile the TIP project with the Code Generator and download the routines in the controllers again 5 Start the project and let it run for a while 6 If you encounter controller errors due to a Watchdog Time that is too short increase the Watchdog Time Otherwise continue with the network optimization Check HH Status In the Control Panel click the HH Status tab Control Panel RobotA 8 Ol x PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help s ZE mgB gt Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics l P2P State Distributed 1 0 HH State Environment Data l os IPSe fast ava min max Bus Cycle Time ms 0 o o 0 LinkID State RspT last ms RspT ava ms Bsp min ms RspT max ms Link Mode Token Group ID CESC 9 5 fms e 4 The HH Status displays the following information Parameter Explanation Bus Cycle Time Time in milliseconds for a Token cycle The value is 0 if Token Passing is off any Cleanroom profile Resource Name of the controller Linkld Controller network ID
18. Type BYTE Reserved_IN_1 Reserved_IN_2 Reserved_IN_3 Reserved_IN_4 TAG 000 TAG_O10 TAG_020 TAG_030 TAG_040 SCANNER_IN_5 SCANNER_IN_6 14 SCANNER IN 7 15 SCANNER IN 8 16 SCANNER IN 8 17 SCANKIFR NIIT 1 3 After the signals are assigned in the desired order click New Offsets and RSLogix Guard PLUS software fills in the offsets based on the type of signals you created You must make sure that the Scanner assembly is big enough to establish the scanner connections For example when you establish a connection from a GuardPLC controller to the 1794 OB16 FLEX I O module up to 3 words of status may come from the FLEX I O module One word of output data is sent to the digital output module This means that the input assembly should be at least 6 bytes in size and the output assembly should be at least 2 bytes 250 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Chapter 20 Also make sure that the data to be written or read does not cross data type boundaries or try to use only a portion of the signal In the example above you must assign 1 WORD or 1 INT signal or 2 BYTE signals to the output assembly and 6 BYTES or 3 WORDS or 3 INT signals to the input tab If any I O module uses an odd number of bytes then you must use only BYTE data type signals For example the 1734 I
19. D t 1 GuardPLC 2000 terree Hiis RS 232 ASCII serial port only the bottom serial port is active HHHH tere dire Lr CERS tle CCA Su i The serial port requires a 9 pin D shell connector Pin Function eS none send data receive data none ground none RTS CTS none oO CO NN Dm oy A w N Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 267 Chapter 21 Communicate with ASCII Devices Configure the ASCII Serial Port 268 For this field Slave Address You must either create a new project or open an existing project before you can configure ASCII communication Once the software opens a project it automatically displays the Hardware Management window from which you configure the ASCII port 1 Right click Protocols and choose New gt ASCII Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help S Fg examplet Copy P Profibus dp Slave Paste H Modbus Slave Delete Bons B Programming Terminal Properties E FS HH Network
20. GuardPLC controllers and distributed I O modules are described in Connections the following sections GuardPLC 1200 Controller The GuardPLC 1200 controller has an ASCII serial port for non safety related communication and an Ethernet port for safety related communication Connect the ASCII port to any RS 232 device that has the capability to send ASCH command strings to the controller The controller replies with a data variable string See Chapter 21 for more information on ASCII communication Use this illustration to connect the ASCII and Ethernet ports Allen Bradley D Port for LAO fe ASCII amp o p E dE say Serial Port Ql a Use 1761 CBL PM02 Jee y Series C Cable C c 3 lt lt Eheme Dongle Ethernet Port On Bottom of Controller X Pin Fmcion 8 6 1 24V DC ground GND request to send RTS received data RxD received line signal detector DCD clear to send CTS transmitted data TxD ground GND not applicable oj co N On oy A wy N 38 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Installation Chapter 2 GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 Controllers Connections for safety and non safety related communication are described in the following sections Connections for Safety Related Communication The controller has four
21. Help Inputs Info GFT ypelnstance B im GuardPLC 1800 Programming Terminal MCP Configuration Type Retain Constant Description WiValue BOOL dummy2 BOOL fromGuard_BOOL1 BOOL fromGuard_BOOL2 s fromGuard_INT1 fromGuard_INT2 toGuard POOL toGuard_BOOL2 8 teGuard INT toGuard INT2 Zu nto R 11 20 2007 10 40 01 047 Info Resource Offline 11 20 2007 10 57 56 744 Info Configuration 60000 Resource Protacols Etheret IP 124 IN 124 deleted The numeric input objects write the two integers to the GuardPLC controller Tags N121 0 and N121 1 were used to match the output assembly used in the GuardPLC controller The GuardPLC controller does not use the N it is required for FactoryTalk View software INT1 write N121 0 INT2 write N121 1 212 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Numeric Input Enable Properties Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Chapter 18 N121 0 corresponds to the first INT tag in the GuardPLC assembly 121 N121 1 corresponds to the second INT tag in the GuardPLC assembly 121 General Label Numeric Timing Common Connections Tag Expression Tag Exp _ gt GuardPLC1800 N121 07 Optional Exp gt Enter gt Enter Handshake Cancel Numeric Input Enable Properties General Label Numeric Timing Common Connections E Eeenen p Tao Ee gt De Option
22. March 2010 Chapter 18 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Introduction Topic Page EtherNet IP Communication Overview 199 Add EtherNet IP Protocol to the Resource 203 View the Controller IP Settings 204 Configuring Communication Between the Controller and a 205 PanelView PLUS Terminal EtherNet IP Communication EtherNet Industrial Protocol EtherNet IP is an open networking Overview standard communication protocol GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers can connect to other EtherNet IP devices such as other controllers HMIs or distributed I O blocks To use the EtherNet IP network the GuardPLC 1600 or GuardPLC 1800 must meet these requirements Operating System Version CPU 6 28 COM 10 36 A GuardPLC controller can be configured as an EtherNet IP scanner originator and or adapter target Signals are exchanged between the scanner and the adapter in packets within the user defined time Requested Packet Interval GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter To configure a GuardPLC controller as an adapter configure the input and output assemblies in the GuardPLC controller by using RSLogix Guard PLUS software and then connect signals to the I O assemblies RSLogix Guard PLUS software is used to create EtherNet IP assemblies for the GuardPLC controller An adapter input assembly IN_120 and output assembly OUT_121 are created automatically when EtherNet IP protocol is added to the controller You ca
23. ReceiveTMO or AckTMO AckTMOMax whichever is smaller e ProdRate ResponseTime 4 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 173 Chapter 16 174 Peer to peer Communication Overview Peer to Peer Profile IV Slow amp Noisy This profile provides low data throughput for applications where only low data update rates are required It is primarily for data exchange via poor quality telephone lines or distorted radio links Slow amp Noisy Characteristics Minimum Ethernet network requirements Data transfer via telephone satellite link radio Slow and so forth Low loss of data due to distortions on the Noisy communication path or network defects Time for 2 1 repetitions Characteristics of the communication path Moderate to long delays ResponseTime ReceiveTMO 2 otherwise ERROR Variables Responselime manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor ReceiveTMO manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor Suitable HH network profile Medium or Fast Peer to Peer parameter presets e QueueLen 4 e Communication Time Slice large enough to process and send all data defined for transmission in one CPU cycle e ResendTMO if ReceiveTMO gt 2 x WDZ then ResendTMO ResponseTime 2 1 Resend possible if ReceiveTMO 2 x WDZ then ERROR e AckTMO ReceiveTMO or AckTMO AckTMOMax whichever is smaller e ProdRate ResponseTime 4 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P M
24. This field Displays Resource The name of the controller System ID The network ID of the controller State The status of the communication RspT last avg The Measured ResponseTime for a message from PES PES PES based on the network hardware CPU cycle min max time and Peer to Peer profile This parameter will be optimized later MsgNr The Counter 32 bit resolution for all messages sent to a controller AckMsgNr The number of the received message that the controller has to acknowledge DataSeq The Counter 16 bit resolution for sent messages which contain process data Opens The number of successful connects to a controller A figure higher than 1 indicates that a controller dropped out and has been reconnected Resends The Counter 32 bit resolution for messages that have been resent due to an elapsed ResendTMO BadMsgs The Counter 32 bit resolution for received messages that are corrupted or are not expected at that instant A corrupt message for example is a message with a wrong sender or with a faulty CRC An unexpected message for example is an Open command when the controllers are already connected EarlyMsgs The Counter 32 bit resolution for received messages that are not in the correct sequence If a message drops out and is lost at the addressee there is a gap in the received messages and the next message comes early Receive Tmo Receive Timeout as entered by the u
25. a Open the Control Panel by choosing Control Panel from the Online menu b Click the EIP tab c Click the Connections Status tab 1 Control Panel Resource PADT Resource Communication TestMode Extra Help of gt mala Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distributed 1 0 HH State Environment Data os IP Settings ModbusMs License HSP Protocol EIP ProtocolStatus Connections Status Reve Core esse State neat Oupa Sen Revi Sauer PRP RPL wem wenn Laser Tan 1 1001008319 Originator Established 3 190 2385 2385 0 10 10 3 10 9 2 100 100 9319 Orgmator Established 43 33 1193 11891 d 20 20 20 20 20 20 For more information on the Control Panel see Chapter 14 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 259 Chapter 20 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Open a Connection to a Logix Controller amp Controller Demo_Config Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler Power Up Handler Tasks 5 e MainTask 5 a MainProgram Program Tags E MainRoutine E Unscheduled Programs 2 Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes 73 Trends 3 Data Types Cj User Defined oe Strings Of Predefined Of Module Defined 3 1 0 Configuration g 2 1756 ENBT A ENBT1 g 1 1756 ENBT A ENBTO H 3 1756 ENBT A ENBT2 H 4 1756 ENBT A ENBT3 The GuardPLC controller can establish a connection to a ControlLogix or CompactLog
26. e the Run Idle header is unchecked for input assemblies e output assemblies have 4 extra bytes in the beginning to hold the Run Idle header These can be 1 DWORD or 2 WORD or 4 byte signals Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Open a Class 1 Connection from a Logix Controller to the GuardPLC Controller Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 The following example demonstrates making a connection to a Logix controller specifically a ControlLogix controller with a 1756 ENBT or 1756 ENET module to a GuardPLC controller You can also open connections to CompactLogix controllers In a Class 1 connection data is cyclically exchanged based on a time interval RPD Configure the Logix Controller in RSLogix 5000 Software 1 In RSLogix 5000 software create a new project for the Logix controller 2 Add the Ethernet adapter module to the I O Configuration a Right click I O Configuration and choose New Module b In the Select Module Type dialog box click the 1756 ENBT or 1756 ENET module type o Click OK d In the Module Properties dialog box type the IP address and the slot number of the 1756 ENBT module Module Properties Local 1756 ENBT A 1 1 Type Vendor Parent Name Description Slot Revision 1755 ENBT 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley Local ENBT 1 Address Host Name Ze P
27. normal fans OK 2 fan error Only available for a GuardPLC 2000 controller BYTE NON SAFE Cycle Time milliseconds Read Duration of the last cycle UDINT SAFE Date Time Seconds seconds Read Time passed since 1970 An automatic switchover from summer to winter time is Date Time milliseconds not supported Milliseconds UDINT NON SAFE Emergency Stop 1 true Write True triggers Emergency Off Emergency Stop 2 false BOOL Emergency Stop 3 SAFE Emergency Stop 4 Use these signals to force all inputs and outputs to the zero OFF state from within the user program Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 305 Appendix B System Variable Force Time System Signal Variables Unit Value milliseconds Read Write Read Description Remaining running time during forcing 0 if Force is inactive DINT NON SAFE Power Supply 0 255 Read GuardPLC 1200 and GuardPLC 2000 Controllers 0 normal error of input power supply 24 VDC 2 error of battery 4 module error of power supply 5 V 8 module error of power supply 3 3 V 16 5 V undervoltage 32 5 V overvoltage 64 3 3 V undervoltage 128 3 3 V overvoltage 255 status does not exist BYTE NON SAFE GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 Controllers 0 normal 1 24 VDC undervoltage 4 5V undervoltage 8 3 3 V undervoltage 16 3 3 V overvoltage BYTE NON SAFE System Tick High System Tick Low millisecond
28. 0x0020 No I O processing due to exceeded fault rate 0x0040 80 No 1 0 processing because configured module is not plugged in AO Error Code Read Error mask for all analog inputs 0x0001 Module error 0x0002 MEZ test safety switch 1 failed 0x0004 MEZ test safety switch 2 failed 0x0008 FTZ test of test pattern failed 0x0010 FTZ test error checking coefficients 0x0400 FIZ test 1 Temperature threshold exceeded 0x0800 FTZ test 2 Temperature threshold exceeded 0x2000 MEZ test status of safety switches 0x4000 MEZ test active disconnection by watchdog failed Ale Error Code Read Error code of analog input channels 0x01 Error in the analog output unit 0x80 AO xx Value not in the specified range AO xx Value Write Output value of AO channels Current characteristic 0 2000 0 mA 20 mA Current characteristic 2000 0 0 mA Values are tested for plausibility before standardization Current characteristic e Values lt 0 standardization with 0 e Values lt sampling point LOW standardization with sampling point LOW e Values gt sampling point HIGH standardization with sampling point HIGH IMPORTANT Outputs must not be used as safety related outputs AO xx Used Write Configures the channel for operation 0 Channel is not in operation 1 Channel is operating 1 xx affected output channel of the controller or module Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 325 AppendixB System Signal Variables Counter Module Variable
29. 1755 IF8 Analog Input Moche 299 1755 OF8 Analog Output Module 300 1755 HSC High Speed Counter Module 302 Guard LG 2000 Power Supply c v ese ik ead da LOOMS UG 303 Appendix B Introduction fs Sq op Nr rte beste 9 dy dde a gag Me Pap d e A 305 Programming Controller Data 44 2 ct ERE 305 DO VIDI Ies s ducet er tefta uae Yu NK eo qut df aucti es 307 Digital I O Module Variables CAB DIO for GuardPLC 1200 and 2000 Controllers 307 Analog Input Module Variables CAB AD for GuardPLC 2000 Controller cu roa rPX PS NC 309 Analog Output Module Variables CAB AO for GuardPLG 2000 Controller 222225 4 Vas cero xs 311 High Speed Counter Variables For GuardPLC 1200 and 2000 Controllers fis e gen dene er eth n aee 312 Module Variables for GuardPLC 1600 and 1800 Controllers and Distributed Lo 315 Digital Input Module Variables for GuardPLC 1600 Controllers and Distributed Lo 316 Digital Output Module Variables for GuardPLC 1600 1800 Controllers 1753 IB20XOB8 Modules and 1753 OB16 Modules 318 Digital Output Parameters for 1753 IBBXOB8 Modules ak gelo t dro aer ea b i petiit 319 Digital Output Parameters for 1753 IB16XOB8 Modules e we atts oe By Gn SAG d aab Seis odes Mit Re reg 320 Digital Relay Output Parameters for 1753 OW8 Module S qa kD a tos Gre BGs DAES aes ON hes 322 Analog Input Signals for 1753 IF8XOF4 Modules 323 Analog Output Signals for 1753 IF8BXOF4 Modules 325 Counter Mod
30. 3 94 in above and below the device and at least 20 mm 0 79 in horizontally between devices e the wire duct can run in the 100 mm 3 94 in of free space above and below the controller if it is no deeper than 40 mm 1 58 in If the depth is greater than 40 mm 1 58 in the devices must be placed on stand offs that match the depth of the duct If stand offs are not used you must provide a gap of at least 80 mm 3 15 in between the device and the duct e select a location where air flows freely or use an additional fan e do not mount the controller or 1 0 module over a heating device e do not block the ventilation slots on the side of the device 33 Chapter 2 34 Installation GuardPLC 1600 and GaurdPLC 1800 controllers and I O cannot be panel mounted Mount these controllers and distributed I O to a DIN rail by following the steps below 1 Hook the top slot over the DIN rail 1 Top Slot 2 Insert a flathead screwdriver into DIN K i P ail the gap between the housing and the latch and pull the latch downward 3 Hold the latch down as you push the housing back onto the DIN rail Release the latch to lock the device onto the rail TIP To remove the device from the DIN rail insert a flathead screwdriver into the gap between the housing and the latch and pull the latch downward as you lift the device off of the rail GuardPLC 2000 Chassis The GuardPLC 2000 chassis provides two flan
31. 307 AppendixB System Signal Variables 1 0 Data Read Write Description DO State Read Error mask for all digital outputs 0x0000 No errors detected 0x0001 Error of the DO section of the module 0x0002 Within the multiple error occurrence time safety switch 1 faulty 0x0004 Within the multiple error occurrence time safety switch 2 faulty 0x0008 Within the multiple error occurrence time test sample tests faulty 0x0010 Within the multiple error occurrence time readback channels faulty 0x0020 Within the multiple error occurrence time active switch off faulty 0x0100 Within the safety time CS signals faulty 0x0200 All outputs switched off total current too high 0x0400 Within the safety time temperature limit 1 exceeded 0x0800 Within the safety temperature limit 2 exceeded 0x01000 Within the safety time auxiliary voltage monitoring undervoltage 0x02000 Within the multiple error occurrence time status of the safety switches DO 0x State 2 Read Error mask for digital output channels 0x00 No error detected outputs driven as expected 0x01 Error in digital output module outputs not driven 0x02 Output switched off due to overcurrent outputs not driven 0x04 Error during readback of the digital output outputs not driven DO 0x Value Write Output value of digital output channels 0 Output de energized 1 Output activated DI State Write E
32. 6 Once you have set these properties click the OK button to apply the changes RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software displays these changes in blue under the I O module entry 7 Click Save in RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software to download the configuration to the GuardPLC controller 261 Chapter 20 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner j Up to this point only the configuration has been downloaded to the ave the Connection p p C onfiguration in the GuardPLC controller The offline project currently contains only the assigned signal connections GuardPLC Controller Once the connection configuration is saved with the RSLogix Guard PLUS project you can switch to other projects reprogram the GuardPLC controller and be sure that when the configuration is loaded back to the GuardPLC controller it will use this RSNetWorx configuration to reestablish connections Follow these steps to upload the online configuration to your offline project 1 Open the Control Panel in RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management by choosing Control Panel from the Online menu 2 Click the EIP tab 3 Press the FS Upload button to upload the connection configuration and add it to the project configuration An RSNetWorx Configuration sub branch will be added to the project tree under the EtherNet IP Scanner branch Eg GPLC1600 Default Test Project PADT Resource Communication TestMode Extra Help 44 Configuration S Z ER Sp D BK 5000
33. 7A Response to overload Pulse Test Sources Number of pulse test sources shut down of the concerned output with cyclic reconnecting 2 not electrically isolated 2 not electrically isolated Not applicable Output voltage range L minus 4V Not applicable Output current 60 mA Not applicable Current load min none Not applicable Switching time 100 us Response to overload Environmental Conditi Temperature operating 4x2 19 2V short circuit current 60 mA Q 24V ons 0 60 C 32 140 F 2x 2 19 2V short circuit current 60 mA 24V Not applicable Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Mechanical Dimensio ns Width 15mm in including housing 205 mm in including housing 207 mm 8 16 in including housing Screws screws screws Height 114 mm 4 49 in including latch Depth 66 mm 2 60 in including 88 mm in including grounding 66 mm 2 60 in including grounding bolt bolt grounding bolt Weight 1 0 kg 2 2 Ib 1 3 kg 2 9 Ib 1 0 kg 2 2 Ib Certifications when product is marked c UL us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity C Tick Australian Radiocommunication Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Certified by TUV Publ
34. External shunt 500 Q for current input Overvoltage protection 30V 15V DC Resolution 12 bit Input impedance 1 MO DC Input signal source 500 Q impedance Accuracy 0 1 25 C 77 F 0 5 60 C 140 F Operating voltage 24V DC 15 20 ripple lt 15 299 Appendix A 300 Specifications Attribute 1755 IF8 Maximum common mode x13V DC voltage to l Current consumption 150 mA 3 3V DC 400 mA 24V DC Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Weight 240 g 0 53 Ib Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A B amp C C Tick Australian Radiocommunication Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Certified by T V 1755 OF8 Analog Output Module Attribute 1755 OF8 Quantity of outputs 8 Output values max 0 10V or 0 20 mA Overvoltage protection 24V Source value UINT Load impedance load lt 600 current limit resistance gt 5 KQ voltage Accuracy 0 3 25 C 77 F 0 5 60 C 140 F Safet
35. LC DI Pulse Channel Write Source channel of pulse feed 0 Input channel 1 Pulse from first DO channel 2 Pulse from second DO channel 3 Pulse from third DO channel 4 Pulse from fourth DO channel 5 Pulse from fifth DO channel 6 Pulse from sixth DO channel 7 Pulse from seventh DO channel 8 Pulse from eighth DO channel DI LC Delay Write Waiting time for pulse output short circuit proof GuardPLC 1600 and 1800 Controllers and 1753 IB16 and 1753 IB20X0B8 modules DI Pulse Delay 1753 IB8XOB8 and 1753 IB16X0B8 1 xx the affected input channel of the controller or module Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 317 AppendixB System Signal Variables Digital Output Module Variables for GuardPLC 1600 1800 Controllers 1753 IB20X0B8 Modules and 1753 0B16 Modules The GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers 1753 IB20XOB8 modules and 1753 OB16 modules support these digital output parameters 1 0 Data Read Write Description DO Error Code Read Error mask for all digital outputs 0x0001 Error in digital output range 0x0002 MEZ test of test pattern failed 0x0004 MEZ test auxiliary supply failed 0x0010 FTZ test of test pattern failed 0x0020 FTZ test of test pattern of the output switch failed 0x0040 FTZ test of the test pattern of the output switch disconnection test of outputs failed DOpo Error Code Read Error mask of all digital output channels 1 xx affected output channel of t 318
36. Safety Reference Manual publication 1753 RMO002 Specify the system ID of the controller The system ID is a component of the SRS System Rack Slot and can be in the range of 2 65535 The programming terminal uses the system ID to communicate with the controller The purpose of the SRS is to match a routine to a specific resource and guarantee that only a routine with a matching SRS can be downloaded to a resource The system ID of the controller should not be set at 1 because 1 is the default system ID for the programming terminal IMPORTANT The SRS set in the configuration is compiled in the routine EXE file and must match the SRS of the GuardPLC controller for a routine to be correctly downloaded to the GuardPLC controller A different system ID results in an Invalid Configuration error during download IMPORTANT The default SRS of a new controller is 60000 You must use this to establish communication with the controller the first time Once you establish communication you can change the SRS Safety Time ms the safety time in milliseconds for the controller The safety time is the time e the controller must react to an input signal with an output signal e within which the controller must react to an error The default safety time is 2 times the default watchdog time You can specify any time from 20 50000 ms Watchdog Time ms 118 the maximum amount of time in milliseconds that the controller
37. Transmitter supplies 25 37 28 24V 46 mA short circuit proof Safety accuracy 2 Environmental Conditions Temperature operating Temperature storage 0 60 C 32 140 F 40 85 C 40 185 F Mechanical Dimensions Width 257 mm 10 1 in including housing screws Height 114 mm 4 49 in including latch Depth 66 mm 2 60 in including grounding screw 80 mm 3 15 in including shield plate Weight 1 2 kg 2 64 Ib Certifications when product is marked c UL us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity e EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A B amp C C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Certified by T V 1753 IB16 Input Module Attribute General GuardPLC Ethernet interfaces 1753 IB16 2 x RJ 45 10 100BaseT with 100 Mbps with integrated switch Operating voltage 24V DC 15 2096 Was 15 from a power supply with protective separation conforming to IEC 61131 2 requirements Response time gt 10 ms Current consumption 0 8 A max with max load 0 4 A idle current Publicatio
38. Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 6 232 Check the Connected and then the Cache Connections boxes The Connected option ensures that messages are sent over a Class 3 connection not as unconnected ones Cache Connections is the default option If it is checked the connection is opened the first time the controller is in Run mode and the rung condition is true In this example the rung condition is true when Enable value is true and the timer has expired DN flag is set This connection remains open until the controller goes to Program mode If Cache Connections is unchecked a connection is opened every time the controller is in Run mode and the rung condition becomes true The Logix controller opens the connection sends an explicit message over the new connection and then closes the connection immediately The next time the rung condition is true the whole sequence is repeated open connection send message close connection Build the third rung containing these instructions e Examine on Enable tag e Examine on TIMER CONN DN e Message instruction with the control tag Mac WRITE Enable TIMER CONN DN I MER 2 bm JE Type CIP Generic N Message Control MSG WRITE Nos R Configure the message parameters as follows a Set Service Type to Set Attribute Single b Set Class to 4 assembly c Set Instance to 121 This is the assembly instance number that will be written to d Set Attribute
39. for voltage supply connections 47 Chapter3 General Wiring Considerations Shield contact Plate Connections Detailed Wiring Information 48 Shielded cabling is fed in from below so that the shielding can be connected to the shield contact plate by using a clip Remove about 2 cm 0 79 in of the outer cable insulation so that the mesh is exposed at the point where the cable is clipped to the plate Position the clip over the uninsulated cable shielding and push it into the slots of the shield contact plate until it fits firmly in place as shown below Mesh Cable Clip Shield contact Plate IMPORTANT Make sure that the mesh comes in direct contact with the shield contact plate If the mesh does not touch the plate the cable is not grounded For detailed wiring information by product see the table below For See GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and Chapter 4 GuardPLC 1200 Controllers GuardPLC 2000 Controller Chapter 5 1753 IB16 1753 0B16 1753 IB20X0B8 Chapter 6 Modules 1753 IB8XOB8 Chapter 7 1753 IB16X0B8 Chapter 8 1753 IFBXOF4 Chapter 9 1753 OW8 Chapter 10 Wiring Examples Appendix C To be sure that GuardPLC controllers and I O modules are used in a safety related manner SIL3 in accordance to IEC 61508 the whole system including connected sensors and encoders must satisfy the safety requirements described in the GuardPLC Controllers Safety Reference Manual publication 1753 R
40. ms Number of Time Slices Fo Be Administrator This field Displays The average cycle time in milliseconds of the last 50 cycles The cycle time in milliseconds of the last cycle Cycle Time ms min The fastest cycle time in milliseconds Cycle Time ms last Cycle Time ms max The slowest cycle time in milliseconds If this value exceeds the Watchdog Time the controller goes to Failure Stop Com Time Slice ms The time required to process all Peer to Peer communication tasks within a CPU cycle Number of Time Slices The number of time slices required to process all communication tasks This value should always be 1 to avoid having multiple CPU cycles to complete all communication tasks Date Time The date and time in the controller Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Chapter 14 P2P Peer to Peer State Tab Control Panel Robot1 lox PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help e ZE b mmi o Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distibuted 170 HH State Environment Data os IP Settings Len tse State Pop lf Repl avf Rept mi spT a MsgNo AckMsgNof E abs Receive Resend AckTMO Cuever Newtever_ pues sumo mee m w s m sem sow sawn 1 0 o 0 ied 100 o puooooz0 168000020e
41. read and write The data size is determined by the number of signals transferred between the devices In contrast a GuardPLC distributed I O module can have only one connection the connection to the controller that owns it The amount of data shared between a distributed I O module and the controller is fixed and defined by the type of I O module The total number of controllers distributed I O module OPC servers and programming terminals on a network is limited only by the number of available IP addresses and the network bandwidth maximum 100 Mbps of a segment of the network However large amounts of data flowing on the network will affect the network response time and therefore the safety time of the system Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Network Configuration HH Protocol Parameters Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Peer to peer Communication Overview Chapter 16 Communication between GuardPLC controllers can be established via different kinds of Ethernet topologies Both the HH protocol and the peer to peer protocol can be adapted to the network in use to allow smooth and efficient data transfer You configure the HH protocol and the peer to peer protocol by setting parameters either manually or with the help of network profiles Network profiles are preset combinations of parameters you can choose to make configuration simpler To optimize data transfer and customize the configuration you must
42. typical Supply 5 x 20V 100 mA 24V short circuit proof Digital Outputs Number of Outputs 8 not electrically isolated Output voltage range 18 4V 26 8V utput current Channels 1 3 and 5 7 0 5 A 60 C 140 F Channels 4 and 8 1 A 60 C 140 F 2A Q 50 C 122 C urge current per 1 A for 10ms 1 Hz Channels 1 3 and 5 7 4 A for 10ms 1 Hz Channels 4 and 8 urrent load min 2 mA per channel C On state voltage drop max 2 0V DC 92A Off state leakage current max 1 mA Q 2V Environmental Conditions Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage Mechanical Dimensi 40 85 C 40 185 F ons Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Width 257 mm 10 1 in including housing screws Height 114 mm 4 49 in including latch Depth 66 mm 2 60 in including grounding bolt Weight 1 2 kg 2 64 Ib 285 AppendixA Specifications GuardPLC 1800 Controller 286 Attribute 1753 L28BBBM and 1753 L28BBBP Certifications when product is marked c UL us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity e EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8
43. uo E RR E Peer to Peer Editor RobotC Delete Peer to Peer Connection Connect Process Signals Connect System Signals HH Network Configurati gt gt Assign HH Network Peer to peer communication requires the HH Network which must be entered in the Peer to Peer Editor To assign the HH Network click the HH Network in the tree view and drag and drop it in the Network column of the Peer to Peer Editor The return path is automatically updated with the HH Network RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management lol xi Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help S E CAT 4Estop 44 Configuration E Peer to Peer Editor RobotA Worst Case Network Robot fz00 HH Network_1 Fast amp Noisy 2 Rebet Ton ge HH Network_1 Fast amp Noisy Ja Programming Terminal B HH Network 1 B XX Token Group 1 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 185 Chapter 17 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Choose a Peer to peer Profile 1 Click in the Profile column and choose one of the profiles Make sure that the profile is suitable for your network topology and matches the HH profile See page 161 for a detailed description of all the profiles E Peer to Peer Editor RobotA HH Network 1 Fast amp Noisy z Robot Jam HH Network_1 Fast amp Cleanroom Fast amp Noisy Medium amp Cleanroom Medium amp Noisy Slow amp Cleanroom Slow amp Noisy 2 Click outside
44. 15 16 L Chapter 4 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 OOooooooo DI LS 17 18 1920 21 22 2324 L Digital inputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function 11 LS Sensor supply for inputs 1 8 12 1 Digital input 1 13 2 Digital input 2 14 3 Digital input 3 15 4 Digital input 4 16 5 Digital input 5 17 6 Digital input 6 18 7 Digital input 7 19 8 Digital input 8 20 L reference pole 21 LS Sensor supply for inputs 9 16 22 9 Digital input 9 23 10 Digital input 10 24 11 Digital input 11 25 12 Digital input 12 26 13 Digital input 13 27 14 Digital input 14 28 15 Digital input 15 29 16 Digital input 16 30 L Reference pole 31 LS Sensor supply for inputs 17 24 32 17 Digital input 17 33 18 Digital input 18 34 19 Digital input 19 35 20 Digital input 20 36 21 Digital input 21 37 22 Digital input 22 38 23 Digital input 23 39 24 Digital input 24 40 L Reference pole 55 Chapter4 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers Safety related Digital Output Terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OOOOOOOO D L 1 234 5 6 7 8 L 2A 2A Digital outputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Designation Function Current Number 1 L Reference pole 2 1 Digital output 1 0 5 A 3 2 Digital output 2 0 5 A 4 3
45. 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire 1753 IB16 1753 0B16 and 1753 IB20X0B8 Modules Topic Page Safety related Digital Inputs 69 Safety related Digital Outputs 70 Power Supply Connections 70 Wire the 1753 IB16 Input Module 71 Wire the 1753 0B16 Output Module 73 Wire the 1753 IB20X0B8 Combination Module 75 The status of digital inputs is indicated via status indicators when the module is in Run mode Follow the closed circuit principle for external wiring when connecting sensors To create a safe state in the event of a fault the input signals revert to the de energized state 0 The external line is not monitored but a wire break is interpreted as a safe 0 signal The GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers provide power to input devices through their LS terminals However input devices with their own dedicated power supply can also be connected instead of contacts The reference pole L of the power supply must then be connected to the reference pole L of the appropriate GuardPLC input group See the wiring diagrams in Appendix C for examples In general the LS terminals not L on the power supply connection should be used to supply voltage for safety inputs Each LS features individual short circuit and EMC protection Due to current limitations use LS for only the safety inputs on the same terminal plug An EN 61000 4 5 surge impulse can be read as a short duration HI signal in some modules
46. 1761 CBL PM02 series C cable to connect to the serial port The mini DIN connector attaches to the controller The other end is a 9 pin 265 Chapter 21 Communicate with ASCII Devices o o o comms COMM2 COMMI GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT SICH C34 266 D shell connector This mini DIN connector is not commercially available so you cannot make this cable The pin assignment of the ASCII Serial port is shown below 2 4 4 3 5 8 6 7 Pin Function 24V DC ground GND request to send RTS received data RxD received line signal detector DCD clear to send CTS transmitted data TxD ground GND oj co N OD oy A wy N not applicable Connect to a GuardPLC 1600 or 1800 Controller The ASCII COMM3 port location and connector pin assignment are shown below Connection Signal Function 1 2 RP 5V decoupled with diodes 3 RxD TxD A Receive Transmit data A 4 CNTR A Control Signal A 5 DGND Data reference potential 6 VP 5V positive pole of supply voltage 7 8 RxD TxD B Receive Transmit data B 9 CNTR B Control Signal B IMPORTANT The ASCII port is RS 485 You must use an electrical interface device to connect the controller to an RS 232 device Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Communicate with ASCII Devices Chapter 21 Connect to a GuardPLC 2000 Controller EC oo Allen Bradley UC
47. 24V COM Their status is indicated via status indicators The positive and negative switching digital outputs can be connected in a one pole or two pole manner If configured for one pole operation use the reference pole L for the positive switching outputs and reference pole S for the Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB8XOB8 Module Chapter 7 negative switching outputs The total output current of the module is limited to 8 A and is generated from the 24V of the system If configured for two pole operation the positive switching output DO4 operates with the negative switching output DO4 and the positive switching output DO8 operates with the negative switching output DO8 Line control is carried out for detection of an external short circuit between positive and negative switching outputs A switch on delay is necessary for inductive or capacitive load or lamp load because the inrush of these loads may be mistakenly detected as a short circuit This delay is set in the RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management via the Switch on delay signal at the negative switching output variables The delay can be set from 0 30 ms in 1 ms increments An external line break will not be detected An output is in a safety state when it is de energized When a fault occurs all outputs are switched off Outputs 1 3 and 5 7 can have a load of 0 5 A Outputs 4 and 8 can each have a load of 1 A at the maximum
48. 60 C 140 F 2A 50 C 122 C Surge current per channel 1 A for 10 ms 1 Hz Channels 1 3 and 5 7 4 A for 10 ms 1 Hz Channels 4 and 8 Current load min 2 mA per channel Internal voltage drop 2 0VDC 2A max Off state leakage 1 mA Q 2V current max Total output current 7A max Counters Number of counters 2 not electrically isolated Inputs 3 per counter A B Z Input voltages 5V and 24V DC High signal 5V DC AN DN High signal 24V DC 13V 33V Low signal 5V DC OV 0 5V Low signal 24V DC 3V 5V Input currents 1 4 mA 5V DC 6 5 mA Q 24V DC Input impedance 3 7 kQ Counter resolution 24 bit Input frequency max 100 kHz Triggered on negative edge Edge steepness 1 V us Pulse duty factor Analog Inputs Number of inputs 1 1 8 unipolar not electrically isolated External shunt for current measurement 500 Qfor 0 20 mA Input values related to L Nominal Value 0 10V DC or 0 20 mA with 500 Q shunt Service Value 0 1 11 5V DC or 0 4 23 mA with 500 Q shunt Input impedance 1 MQ Internal resistance of lt 500 Q the signal source Overvoltage protection 15V 4V Resolution A D 12 bit converter Accuracy 0 1 25 C 77 F 0 5 60 C 140 F 287 AppendixA Specifications Distributed 1 0 288 Attribute 1753 L32BBBM 8A and 1753 L32BBBP 8A
49. Ae e ein 245 Configure a Write Operation 246 Configure a Read Operation s 9s EXPERS AS 247 Chapter 20 Introduction ss e Tos dle FRE oe deb eae BAe oe ed 249 Prepare the GuardPLC Controller for Class 1 Scanner CODDEGDORS som ieee ec ooo ted ec Rae ACE ed 249 Connect the Scanner Signals iced dw ere beers RR 250 Disable Scanner Function on the Controller 251 Configure the EtherNet IP Drivers ose ios ee AR 252 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Communicate with ASCII Devices Communicate with Modbus and Profibus Devices Specifications Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Table of Contents Configure Connections in RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP BOTAS ste ee eti Puff a eti due debe Ee pes aO dt 254 Open a Connection to a Logix Controller 260 Create a Producing Data T38 4525 9 secede olend eS 25 260 Configure Connections from the GuardPLC Controller to the Logix ee s is ewes ts PU C 261 Save the Connection Configuration in the GuardPLC Contolera peo ferae Erat a P a Eel is wach agas 262 Remove the Connection Configuration 263 Chapter 21 rit FOUIBCHOBS o ou Gowan che RYE V aba toS ein Dodd I es qt 265 Connect the Controller to an ASCII Device 265 Connect to a GuardPLC 1200 Controller 265 Connect to a GuardPLC 1600 or 1800 Controller 266 Connect to a GuardPLC 2000 Controller 267 Configure the ASCII Serial Port 5 4 e ves Reb 2
50. Attribute Single 0x1 z C Assembly Object e Hex pom Instance Byte Offset 120 p Attribute Hex 3 Description This item is located in GPLC Output Assembly 120 Tag Initial Value o Scaling Data Entry Limits Scale Offset Min Max fi 0 bm 12000 Parameter Setting Messaging Type CIP Node Name Enter the name of the GuardPLC controller that will receive the command Service Code Choose Set Attribute Single to indicate that this is a write operation Class Code Enter 4 for an assembly object Instance Number Enter 120 to indicate the GuardPLC target output assembly that was created for the PanelView Standard terminal to write to Attribute Enter 3 to provide access to the assembly object instance data Byte Offset Index into the GuardPLC input assembly x number of bytes then write the data Configure a Read Operation This example configures the PanelView Standard terminal to perform a read operation on the accumulated value of a tag located in the GuardPLC controller s target input assembly IN_121 at offset 4 bytes 1 From the Objects menu choose Numeric Display Data 2 Position the pointer on the application screen hold down the left mouse button and drag to draw the object on the screen The object is created with six characters as a placeholder for the numeric value Each character is a single digit Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 247 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC C
51. CPU State CPU Configuration CRC Avg Cycle Rem Force Time Faulty 1 0 Modu Action TE Download 0K All operations successfully terminated After successful download the CPU Status is Stop Valid Configuration 5 Select all controllers again if necessary and click Coldstart to start the application With the initial network settings made in the HH protocol and Peer to Peer protocol communication is likely to work but the settings can be optimized for homogenous network load and faster message exchange IMPORTANT If there is no real need to reduce Worst Case ReactionTime do not make changes to the WDZ and the ReceiveTMO Only optimize the ResponseTime A high WDZ or ReceiveTMO does not degrade performance but an optimized ResponseTime increases availability Before starting the optimization steps let the project run for several hours Test as many operating conditions as possible to address timing factors that may prevent a project from running after optimization Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Chapter 17 Check Routine Timing 1 In the Multi Control Panel select all controllers and click Control Panel 2 In the Control Panels of each controller click the Statistics tab Control Panel RobotA io xi PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help Control Panel RobotB si A bm Ed ab PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Ex
52. Characters 00000 0000 amp This error response is typically sent when more signals are requested than exist in the ASCII protocol output tab For example 10 signals were dragged to the ASCII output section but 20 signals were requested in the command string Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Communicate with ASCII Devices Chapter 21 Data Type Formats Follow these formats for sending different data types Data Type Format Example BOOL Description boolean 0 Size 1 character 1 Range 1 true 0 false SINT Description short integer 101 Size 1 4 characters 5 Range 128 127 127 128 INT Description integer 25724 Size 1 6 characters 232 Range 32768 32767 6 248 DINT Description double integer 1357679042 Size 1 11 characters 257 Range 2147483648 2147483647 6200471 USINT Description unsigned short integer 123 Size 1 3 characters 35 Range 0 255 6 255 UINT Description unsigned integer 65535 Size 1 5 characters 7 Range 0 65535 333 597 UDINT Description unsigned double integer 4294967295 Size 1 10 characters 256 Range 0 4294967295 334510 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 273 Chapter 21 Communicate with ASCII Devices Notes 274 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 22 Introduction Modbus RTU Slave Protocol Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Communicate with Modbus and Profibus Devices
53. Controllers Programming Manual publication 1753 PM001 Description Provides procedural information for programming GuardPLC Controller Systems Using RSLogix Guard PLUS Programming Software GuardPLC Controller Systems Safety Reference Manual publication 1753 RM002 Contains in depth information on the safety concept of GuardPLC controller systems including the DeviceNet Safety Scanner for GuardPLC Controller DeviceNet Safety Scanner for GuardPLC Controllers User Manual publication 1753 UM002 Provides information on installing configuring and operating a DeviceNet Safety Scanner in a GuardPLC application DeviceNet Safety I O User Manual publication 1791DS UM001 Provides information on operating 1791DS DeviceNet Safety 1 0 Modules GuardPLC Certified Function Blocks Safety Reference Manual publication 1753 RMD01 Provides information on using Certified Function Blocks in your GuardPLC safety application EtherNet IP Performance and Application Guide publication ENET APD01 Information on EtherNet IP protocol Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley programmable controllers Application Considerations for Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 A description of important differences between solid state programmable controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices National Electri
54. Digital output 3 0 5 A 5 4 Digital output 4 for increased load 20A 6 5 Digital output 5 0 5 A 7 6 Digital output 6 0 5 A 8 7 Digital output 7 0 5 A 9 8 Digital output 8 for increased load 20A 10 L Reference pole Safety related Analog Input Terminals The GuardPLC 1800 controller features 8 single ended analog inputs Differential analog inputs cannot be used on the GuardPLC 1800 controller Two or four wire transmitters can be used These devices can be powered from the transmitter supply terminal of the GuardPLC 1800 controller or from an external power supply See Appendix C for example wiring diagrams IMPORTANT Unused analog inputs must be short circuited See page 51 Al Al Al Al T1 11 L T2 12 L T3 13 L TA M L T5 14 L T6 l6 L T7 17 L T8 l8 L 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 56 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers Chapter 4 The analog inputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function 41 T1 Transmitter supply 1 42 n Analog input 1 43 L Reference pole 44 T2 Transmitter supply 2 45 12 Analog input 2 46 L Reference pole 47 T3 Transmitter supply 3 48 I3 Analog input 3 49 L Reference pole 50 T4 Transmitter supply 4 51 14 Analog input 4 52 L Reference pole 53 T5 Transmitter supply 5 54 15 Analog inpu
55. Editor and the Peer to Peer P2P Process Signals dialog boxes side by side When you open it for the first time the PZP Process Signals dialog box is empty Using the tabs below the button bar of the P2P Process Signals choose the direction of data exchange In the example below the direction of data exchange is from RobotA to RobotB In the Signal Editor click a signal name and drag amp drop it in the P2P Process Signals You can also add signals by using the New Connected Signals button This creates a new line in the list in which you must enter the case sensitive signal name exactly as defined in the Signal Editor Ej P2P Process Signals RobotA RobotB New Connected Signal Delete Connected Signal Help Pulse Test Fault Pulse Test Source ch Pulse Test Source ch2 Tiedown Fault 188 su p Sending a signal from one controller to another PES gt PES makes the value of this signal available in PES To process this value in the logic of PES identical signal names must be used in the logic of both PES and PES Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Chapter 17 Compile and Download Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 8 Change the direction of data exchange with the tab and define the return signals The illustration below shows the signals that RobotB sends to RobotA Ej P2P Process Signals RobotA Robot
56. EtherNet IP application in PanelBuilder32 software 1 Select Create New Application from the PanelBuilder32 start up screen and click OK Create New Application x Application Name wv ENET Cancel Selected Terminal Help 2711 T10C20 PV1000 Color Touch FAN 4 20 4 xx PanelView Type Protocol DeviceNet Keypad PV1000 Gray DPI PV1400 DH L e Touch PV300 DH485 PV300 Mico Keypad Touch Multiple Language Support French German Italian Spanish and English I Set As Default Terminal Selection Catalog amp Revision Numbers gt gt 2 Enter a name for your application 3 Select your PanelView terminal and EtherNet protocol 4 Click OK Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 Configure the PanelView Terminal for EtherNet IP Communication Follow these steps to configure the PanelView terminal 1 Double click the Comms Setup button on the Application Settings dialog box 2 When the Communications Setup Ethernet dialog box opens press the Insert key Communications Setup Ethernet 3 Choose Generic CIP from the Node Type list Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 245 Chapter 19 246 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 4 Enter the GuardPLC controller s Node Name and it s EtherNet IP 5 address Communications Setup Ethernet 2 x Terminal My ENET InterScan Delay Cancel
57. GH Data Files Bl cross Reference D 00 output Ej n input D s2 status D B3 BINARY D 14 TIMER D c5 COUNTER E R6 CONTROL E nz INTEGER deer Lin PLC 5 Message Control Block 2 Insert a MSG instruction rung and assign it to a MSG instruction control block PLC 5 Controller SLC 5 05 Controller Read Write Message Type Peer To Peer Read Write Read Target Device PLCS Local Remote Local Control Block N10 0 Control Block Length 93 Read Write Message Control MG9 0 Setup Screen Setup Screen 3 For an SLC 5 05 controller edit the instruction parameters in the as described below Parameter Setting Read Write Choose either Read or Write Target Device PLC 5 Local Remote Local Control Block Enter an integer file with at least 93 elements Control Block Length 93 This is automatically entered by the programming software 4 Double click Setup Screen in the MSG instruction to configure the MSG instruction 240 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 5 Configure the This Controller parameters PLC 5 Controller a MSG Rung 2 0 MG9 0 This PLC 5 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read Data Table Address Undefined Size in Elements n Port Number r Target Device Data Table Address Local Station Address oct dec o Local Remote il Local
58. GuardPLC device However Rockwell Automation strongly recommends that a protection diode be fitted directly to the load to suppress any interference voltage A 1N4004 diode is recommended Before connecting the power supply check for correct polarity value and ripple A Do not reverse the L and L terminals or damage to the controller will result There is no reverse polarity protection The supply voltage is connected via a 4 pin connector that accommodates wire sizes up to 2 5 mm 14 AWG You only need to connect one wire to L and one wire to L Both L and L terminals are internally connected The other terminal can be used to daisy chain 24V DC to additional devices The power supply connector is rated to 10 A Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire the 1753 IB16 Input Module Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire 1753 IB16 1753 0B16 and 1753 IB20XO0B8 Modules Chapter 6 The 1753 IB16 input module features 16 digital inputs and 4 pulse test Sources Safety related Digital Inputs DI DI DI L 4 12 3 4L 194 5678L LSe 9 101112 L OOOO OOOO OOOO 123456 7 8 9 101112 13 14 15 16 17 18 123456 7 8 9 101112 13 14 15 16 17 18 Digital inputs are connected to these terminals DI LS 13 14 15 16 L OOOO 19 20 21 22 23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24 Terminal Number Designation Function 1 LS Sensor supply for inputs 1 4 2 1 Digita
59. HIGH Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 System Signal Variables Appendix B 1 0 Data Read Write Description Al xx Error Code Read Error mask for analog input channels 1 8 DI xx Error Code Read Error mask for digital input channels 9 32 0x01 Error in input module 0x02 Measured values invalid 0x04 A D converter faulty 0x08 Measured value not within the safety accuracy 0x10 Measured value overflow 0x20 Channel not in operation 0x40 Address error of both A D converters 0x80 Configuration of hysteresis faulty Al xx Value Analog Read Analog value of Al channels 1 8 WORD from 0 1000 The validity is dependent on the error mask Di xx Value Analog Read Analog value of the DI channels 9 32 WORD from 0 3000 The validity is dependent on the error mask DI xx Value Bool Read Digital value of DI channels 9 32 BOOL according to hysteresis The validity is dependent on the error mask Al xx Hysteresis LOW Write Upper limit of the 0 signal voltage range Di xx Value Bool Al xx Hysteresis HIGH Write Lower limit of the 1 signal voltage range Di xx Value Bool Al xx Used Write Configuration for indicating utilization of channels 1 8 DI xx Used Write Configuration for indicating utilization of channels 9 32 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 329 AppendixB System Signal Variables Notes 330 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Append
60. If the controller is in Stop mode the controller configuration and routine can also be deleted by using the programming software s Clear resource configuration command The controller goes into the Stop_Invalid Configuration mode Configuration changes take effect only if you re generate code before downloading to the controller Control Panel GPLC1600 1 PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help S maso Set Date Time Resource State Safety Parameters Stat Change System ID Device Settings Update OS D Reboot Resource Load Resource Configuration From Flash Clear Resource Configuration Set Backplane Type To execute a single step operation cycle step the controller must be in Run mode The Test Mode Allowed switch must be set to ON To enter Test Mode choose the Test Mode menu from the control panel Then choose from Hot Start Warm Start or Cold Start Control Panel GPLC1600 1 PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help m gt m g 1b Enter Test Mode Hot Start Resource State Safety Parame Enter Test Mode Warm Start Enter Test Mode Cold Start 1b Single Cycle Continue with Run The controller state changes to Freeze and you can now single cycle the routine by using the Single Cycle option on the Test Mode menu To return to normal operation choose Continue with Run For more information on Test mode options refer t
61. MsaNo AckMsaNo nmm sme pode 02 REESEN Control Panel RobotB PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help S Y mg Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distributed 1 0 HH State Environment Data os IP Settings nea exo cc n 70 s mm em DataSec 3 Compare the RspT avg of two linked controllers for the forward and return path Values for RspT avg may jump a bit 4 Watch both readings for a couple of seconds and pick the largest value Your reading need not be accurate to the millisecond 195 Chapter 17 Configure Peer to Peer Communication 5 Note the larger of the two values The example on page 195 shows RespT avg for Robot A gt Robot B 11 ms and Robot B gt Robot A 10 ms 6 Compare the RspT max of two linked controllers for the forward and return paths Note down the larger of the two values The example on page 195 shows RspT max for Robot A Robot B 19 ms and Robot B Robot A 20 ms 7 In the P2P State tab check the entries for Resends and EarlyMsgs a If the entries for both Resends and EarlyMsgs are 0 no messages have been repeated In this case delete the noted RspT avg b If one or more entries for Resends or EarlyMsgs is not 0 messages have been repeated In this case delete the noted RspT max Control Panel RobotA E PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help SZ mg
62. O ERROR O PROG O FORCE O FAULT O osL O BL Indicator State Description 24V DC On 24V DC operating voltage present Off No operating voltage RUN On This is the normal status of the controller A routine which has been loaded into the controller is executed The controller processes input and output signals carries out communication and performs hardware and software tests Flashing The controller is in Stop mode and is not executing a routine All system outputs are reset Stop mode can be triggered by setting the Emergency stop system variable to TRUE in the routine or by direct command from the programming software Off The controller is in Failure_Stop see ERROR ERROR On A hardware error has been detected by the controller The controller goes to Failure_Stop and the execution of the routine is halted Hardware errors are errors in the controller errors in one or more of the digital input and output modules or errors in the counters A software error in the operating system has been detected by the controller The watchdog has reported an error due to exceeded cycle time All system outputs will be reset and the controller ceases all hardware and software tests The controller can only be restarted by a command from the programming software Off No errors are detected Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 143 Chapter 15 Diagnostics Indicator State Descr
63. Outputs Inputs Scanner Assemblies Adapter Target Assemblies Input Assemblies Output Assemblies IN_120 OUT_121 Read Write PLC 5 Read SLC 5 05 PanelView Standard Produced Signals Consumed Signals Via Explicit Messages ontrolLogix E Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 CompactLogix Scanner Generic Device 201 Chapter 18 202 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Data Limits In addition to the Ethernet IP protocol other protocols for example PROFIBUS DP TCP S R and others can also be executed on a GuardPLC controller at the same time A total of 16284 bytes of data can be transmitted and received per GuardPLC controller These 16284 bytes can be arbitrarily divided between the protocols However the system signals for the configured assemblies must be subtracted from the maximum of send and receive data GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Up to 64 assemblies of any type input or output can be configured in one GuardPLC controller acting as a target as long as the maximum transmit or receive data is not exceeded However because there are always 2 scanner assemblies the true maximum for adapter assemblies is 62 These assemblies must have instance numbers in the range of 120 183 All input adapter assemblies and the input scanner assembly together should not exceed 16K in size Likewise all output adapter assemblies and the output scanner assembly together should not exceed 16K in
64. Personnel responsible for installation programming operation and troubleshooting of safety related controllers must be familiar with relevant safety standards for programmable electronic systems PES Purpose of This Manual The manual only briefly describes the safety concept of the GuardPLC family of controllers Its purpose is to provide information on installing and operating your controller system For detailed information on the safety policy regarding GuardPLC controllers including information on the controller s central functions input and output channels operating system application program safety and regulations for use refer to the GuardPLC Controller Systems Safety Reference Manual publication 1753 RM002 For procedural information on programming and configuring GuardPLC Controller Systems with RSLogix Guard PLUS programming software refer to Using RSLogix Guard PLUS Software with GuardPLC Controllers publication 1753 PM001 Additional Resources The table on the following page lists documents that contain additional information concerning Rockwell Automation GuardPLC products You can view or download publications at http www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 17 Preface Preface Resource Using RSLogix Guard PLUS Software with GuardPLC
65. Q 15V 0 Signal Voltage max 5V DC Current consumption max 1 5 mA 1 0 mA 5V Switching point typically 7 5V Sensor supply 2 x 20V 100 mA Q 24V 4 x 24V DC 40 mA short circuit 5 x 20V 100 mA Q 24V short circuit proof proof buffered for 20 ms short circuit proof 2 x 24V DC 1 A short circuit proof not buffered Digital Outputs Number of outputs 8 positive switching 8 positive switching 8 not electrically isolated 2 negative switching 8 negative switching not electrically isolated not electrically isolated Output voltage range 2 L minus 2V gt L minus 2V gt L minus 2V Output current channels 1 3 and 5 7 channels 2 4 5 and 7 channels 1 3 and 5 7 0 5 A 60 C 140 F 0 5 A 60 C 140 F 0 5 A 60 C 140 F channels 4 and 8 channels 1 and 8 channels 4 and 8 1 A Q 60 C 140 F 1 A 60 C 140 F 1 A 60 C 140 F 2 A 40 C 104 F 2 A 40 C 104 F 2A 50 C 122 F channels 3 and 6 1 A Q 60 C 140 F Surge current per 1 A for 10 ms 1 Hz channel Channels 1 3and 5 7 4 Afor 10 ms Q 1 Hz Channels 4 and 8 Current load min 2 mA per channel 290 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Attribute 1753 IB8XOB8 1753 IB16X0B8 Specifications Appendix A 1753 IB20X0B8 Internal voltage drop max 2V 2A Leakage current with 0 signal maximum 1 mA 2V Total output current max 7A BA
66. To avoid an error either e install shielded input lines to prevent effects of surges in the system e implement software filtering in the user program A signal must be present for at least two cycles before it is evaluated 69 Chapter6 Wire 1753 IB16 1753 0B16 and 1753 IB20X0B8 Modules E Safety related Digital Outputs Power Supply Connections 70 The status of digital outputs is indicated via status indicators when the module is in RUN mode GuardPLC outputs are rated to either 0 5 A or 1 0 A at an ambient temperature of 60 C 140 F At an ambient temperature of 50 C 122 F outputs rated at 1 0 A increase to 2 0 A If an overload occurs the affected outputs are turned off When the overload is eliminated the outputs are under the control of the controller and are energized based on the user program code An output is in the safe state when it is de energized Therefore outputs are switched off when a fault that affects the safe control of those outputs occurs For connection of a load the reference pole L of the corresponding channel group must be used Although L poles are connected internally to L on the power supply input it is strictly recommended to connect the L reference poles only to their corresponding output group EMC testing was performed in this manner TIP Inductive loads can be connected without a protection diode on the load because there is a protection diode located within the
67. Topology example on page 167 only these links between Token Groups are allowed e A 0 A2 e B1 amp B2 e C1 amp C2 To configure this scenario the controllers are placed in their respective token groups Token Group 1 Token Group 2 Token Group 3 Controller 1 Controller 5 Controller 9 Controller 2 Controller 6 Controller 10 Controller 3 Controller 7 Controller 11 Controller 4 Controller 8 Controller 12 In the Peer to Peer Editor you create connections between controllers For example all controllers in Token Group 1 can communicate to each other but Controller 1 can also communicate to Controller 5 in Token Group 2 Token Group 1 Connections Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 3 Controller 4 Controller 2 Controller 1 Controller 1 Controller 1 Controller 3 Controller 3 Controller 2 Controller 2 Controller 4 Controller 4 Controller 4 Controller 3 Controller 5 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Token Group 1 Token Group 2 Token Group 3 DI ER E bg d LER R amp T ER H GuardPLC mu GuardPLC bai 3 2000 20 dei la controllers b E i jscontrollers d i GuardPLC 1200 GuardPLC 1200 controller Peer to peer Communication Overview Chapter 16 HH Network Profile Il Configuration Topology controller
68. Voltage Supply Pulse Test Sources Digital Outputs Connection 1 8 917 13 M 15 16 17 18 Lamm G nm 0000 0000 0000 24V DC LS 1 2 4 8 S L 1 2 3 Art L 5 6 7 8 L DNE o oo QA DO A avoc O RUN O Li ERROR O Allen Bradley Guard PLC 1 PROG O Distributed VO FORCE O Fur O 1753 IBSXOB8 osL O 8 DC Inputs BL O 8 DC Outputs DI DI 1941 2 3 4 L is 0000 WEEN GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT rE m2 EEEE 75 20 27 28 28 30 7V Digital Inputs Ethernet Ports on Bottom of Module g p 24 Di LS 5 6 7 8L 0000 19 20 21 22 23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24 D1 LS 9 101112 L 0000 Di 25 26 27 28 29 30 25 26 27 28 29 30 Voltage Supply Connection 010 020 030 0410 O50 O60 070 O80 o o o o o o o o LS 13 14 15 16 L 0000 31 32 33 34 35 36 31 32 33 34 35 36 Distributed I O 1753 IB200XB8 20 DC Inputs 8 DC Outputs Di LS 17 18 1920 L 0000 37 38 39 40 41 42 37 38 39 40 41 42 1753 IB16X0B8 Module Digital Outputs 12345 678 9 101 1213 M 15 16 Distributed VO 1753 0B16 16 DC Outputs DO L 13 141516 L 0000 19 20 21 22 23 24 13 20 21 2 23 Digital Outputs Pulse Test Sources 1718 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 SEHTCCCS 1222 3 3 eh DO Allen Bradley B St 6 6 7 7 B 8 DO e TERT 0052 595208 2202 PO PULSE TEST Guard PLC m Distributed VO 1753 IB16 OXB8 16 DC Inputs 8 DC Ou
69. Window Help SS SR BR x Autobrowse peres Browsing node 192 168 1 174 found Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 d AB_ETH 1 Ethernet ds AB_ETH 2 Ethernet ds AB_ETH 3 Ethernet ga AB_ETH 4 Ethernet dis AB ETH 5 Ethernet a ds LI AB_ETH 6 Ethernet AB_ETHIP 1 Ethernet B E 3 5 9 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 EtherNetIP 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A s 9 9 3g a a H 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 104 EtherNetIP Master Stack Library EtherNetIP Master Stac 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 1794 AENT A 1794 AENT A 1734 AENT 192 168 1 160 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 192 168 1 161 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 192 168 1 162 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 192 168 1 163 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBTJA 192 168 1 164 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 192 168 1 165 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 192 168 1 166 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 192 168 1 167 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A 192 168 1168 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBTJA 192 168 1 169 1756 ENBT A 1756 ENBT A wd 192 168 1170 1794 AENT FLEX I O Ethernet Adapter 1794 AENT A S 192 168 1 171 1794 AENT FLEX UO Ethernet Adapter 1794 AENT A 192 168 1 172 1734 AENT PointIO EtherNet IP Adapter 1734 AENT Ett 192 168 1 173 1734 AENT PointlO EtherNet IP Adapter 1734 A
70. a connection to RobotB and RobotC Because the return path is automatically added you do not need to drag RobotA onto the Peer to Peer editors of RobotB or RobotC RsLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management d EC inl x Project Edit Signals Online windows Help B Ta CAT4Estop ee 44 Configuration OBI Robota Ge Bil 2 Robot i mI Robot B B Programming Terminal E E HH Network_1 Loe Token Group_1 184 E Peer to Peer Editor RobotA ox li Delete Peerto Peer Connection Connect Process Signals Connect System Signals HH Network Configurati 3 gt Resource Worst Case Network Profile L espores Time ms ReceiveTMO ms A Robob 700 HH Network 1 Fast amp Noisy 100 500 2 Robot mo HH Network_1 Fast amp Noisy 100 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Chapter 17 This example shows how the three Peer to Peer Editors would appear if connections existed between all three controllers Ej Peer to Peer Editor Roboto Delete Peer to Peer Connection Connect Process Signals Connect System Signals Resource ReceiveTMD ms EECHER bus bannen oo o fo 2 Robott E Peer to Peer Editor RobotB Il Delete Peer to Peer Connection Connect Process Signals Connect System Signals HH Network Contigurati gt gt Resource Worst Case Network Profile Response Time ms ReceiveTMO ms Reo mo bont Face roo Rer m Faiten
71. and I O module tests FAILURE STOP Safe state of the controller after a system fault e A loaded routine is in Stop or Failure Stop mode e The outputs of the controller are being reset LOW e The controller is not performing software or hardware tests e The controller is being held in the safe state e he hardware watchdog is not triggered e To recover from Failure Stop a restart of the controller is necessary A restart can be initiated only via RSLogix Guard PLUS software See Recover From a Failure Stop on page 116 114 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Controller Configuration and Modes of Operation Chapter 13 Controller Modes Hardware Software Errors FAILURE_STOP Hardware Software Errors Hardware Software Errors No Stop Command Yes Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 115 Chapter 13 116 Controller Configuration and Modes of Operation Recover From a Failure_Stop If the controller is in Failure_Stop you must restart the controller following the steps below 1 If the controller is not online you must go online first a In the Hardware Management window from the Online menu choose Control Panel J JRSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help Eg examplet 44 Configuratic Force Editor Diagnostics Access Management Communication Settings Multi Control Panel b Type the Administrator user
72. as safety related outputs for control of safety related actuators Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Input Configuration for Pulse Testing Chapter 11 Set up these signals by using the Outputs tab of the digital inputs Signal Connections dialogbox in RSLogix Guard PLUS software Pulse Testing Name Description Type Initial Notes Value Number of Pulse Channels Number of pulse outputs being used USINT 1 to 8 1 4 for 1753 IB16 1 8 for GuardPLC 1600 2000 controllers 1 8 for 1753 IB20XOB8 1 2 for 1753 IB8XOB8 and 1753 IB16X0B8 Pulse Slot Slot occupied by the module with the UDINT 2 for GuardPLC 1600 controllers pulsed outputs 2 for 1753 IB20XO0B8 1 for 1753 IB16 3 for 1753 IB8XOB8 3 for 1753 IB16XO0B8 1 6 for GuardPLC 2000 controllers wherever 1755 IB24XOB16 is located Pulse Delay Pulse delay is both the low pulse UINT 400 Values in us from 5 2000 width and pulse test duration default Error Code Error code for each switch BYTE N A See Appendix B for error code descriptions Value Value for each switch BOOL DI xx PulseChannel Indicates which pulse output is USINT 1 to 8 1 4 for 1753 IB16 sourcing the input channel 1 8 for GuardPLC 1600 2000 controllers 1 8 for 1753 IB20XOB8 1 2 for 1753 IB8XOB8 and 1753 IB16X0B8 DO xx Value Initialization value for the pulse BOOL TRUE Each pulse output must be activated outputs Publication 1753 UM001C EN P Mar
73. bits for the serial data transfer The default is 1 stop bit 1 Even if the baud rate is changed from 9600 the power up string is always sent out at 9600 baud Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Communicate with ASCII Devices Chapter 21 Connect Signals Only ASCII output signals are sent from the controller You connect signals to the ASCII outputs to determine which signal values you want to send from the controller to the connected ASCII device 1 Expand Protocols right click the ASCH icon and choose Connect Signals j RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help i WO Guard Ven B Programming Terr E Signal Connections Configuration 2 Resource Protocols ASCH New Connected Signal Delete Connected Sianal New Offsets Help AX Token Group Connected Signal BOOL If you want to Choose this tab create a new signal New Connected Signal renumber offsets sequentially for all signals New Offsets delete the selected signal Delete Connected Signal 2 Edit the output signals you want to send to the ASCII device e Use the Outputs tab to define output values to send to the ASCII device Associate each output with a signal from the signal editor by dragging the signal from the Signal Editor to the Signal field on the Outputs tab in the ASCII Signal Connections dialog box e Refer to the Using RSLogix Guard PLUS Software W
74. can take to execute one cycle The watchdog time must be e 2 10 ms 0 5 x Safety Time Worst case two cycles must occur within the Safety Time Therefore Safety Time 2 is the maximum watchdog time no more than 5000 ms The default watchdog time is e 500 ms for GuardPLC 1200 and GuardPLC 2000 controllers e 50 ms for GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers e 10 ms for 1753 IB16 1753 IB20XOB8 1753 0B16 modules If the controller exceeds the watchdog time the controller goes into Failure Stop Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Controller Configuration and Modes of Operation Chapter 13 This switch Main Enable You can set these switches Specifies whether CPU switches can be changed while the controller is executing If Main Enable is disabled you cannot change the settings of the other 7 switches described below while the controller is in operation routine in Run Default On Enabled Autostart whether the controller automatically starts up after restarting the controller or applying power to the controller If Autostart Enable is enabled the routine automatically starts up after a restart or applying power to the controller Off Disabled Start Restart allowed whether you can start a routine manually If Start Restart allowed is enabled you can start a routine manually via the Routine menu of the Control Panel Choose either Coldstart or Warmstart Coldstart is the recom
75. connecting ASCII device 265 overview 21 status indicators 142 GuardPLC 1600 connecting ASCII device 266 overview 22 status indicators 143 GuardPLC 1800 connecting ASCII device 266 overview 22 status indicators 143 GuardPLC 2000 1755 HSC terminals 68 1755 IB24X016 wiring 342 1755 IF8 wiring 343 1755 0F8 wiring 343 connecting ASCII device 267 overview 25 status indicators 145 GuardPLC Ethernet overview 27 H HH Network Profiles 161 167 fast 161 medium 164 None 167 HH protocol parameters 153 156 HH Network 178 180 High Level High Speed HH protocol 151 High Speed Safety Protocol 23 29 connections 40 1 0 data 307 input only connection 222 257 IP addresses definition 205 L line control 1753 IB16 104 1753 IB16XOB8 104 1753 IB20XOB8 103 1753 IB8XOB8 104 GuardPLC 1600 103 response to faults 102 line monitoring 1753 IB16XOB8 89 Line Short Line Break monitoring 91 lamp and inductive loads 91 required signals 93 resistive capacitive loads 92 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 link mode 155 link mode extern 156 listen only connection 223 257 Logix controllers as scanners 218 Class 1 connections 219 228 Class 3 connections 228 234 related publications 230 manuals related 18 Modbus configuring 276 connecting 276 overview 29 protocol 279 signals 277 modes controllers 113 routines 120 monitoring diagnostics 139 See also line monitoring 0 OPC Server overview 30 P PanelBuilder
76. controller to an RS 232 device Configure the Modbus Serial Port You must either create a new project or open an existing project before you can configure Modbus communication Once the software opens a project it automatically displays the Hardware Management window from which you configure the Modbus port 1 Right click Protocols and choose New gt Modbus Slave Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help E Fg examplet B ad Configuration E 2 Resource Distributed 1 0 Ai Typelnstance MN P Profibus dp Slave mU GuardPLC 1600 SPY H2 Modbus Slave iB Programming Terminal S H HH Network 1 dX Token Group AX Token Group 1 Properties 276 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Communicate with Modbus and Profibus Devices Chapter 22 2 Expand Protocols right click the Modbus Slave icon and choose Properties Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help Fg examplet B Configuration BE 2 Resource H Distributed 1 0 Protocols Zap Configuration Resource Protocols Modbus Type Made Se Slave Address hoo Refresh Rate ms kr Interface s GF Typelnstance Connect Signals Baud rate 57600 E BIO GuardPLC 1600 Parity Jaen zl cB Programming Terminal E 8 HH Network 1 DK Cancel Apply Help Ti Token Group GE Sof Token Group 1 For this field Specify Slave Address the slave address 1 247 of the controller The Modbus protocol of the controller supports
77. described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures o A A A A Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation GuardPLC GuardPLC 1200 GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 GuardPLC 2000 RSLogix Guard PLUS RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP RSLinx RSLogix RSLogix 5 RSLogix 5000 PLC 5 ControlLogix FlexLogix CompactLogix SLC 500 PanelView PanelView Plus VersaView FLEX I O POINT I O PanelBuilder
78. device wit 500 Qfor Current external power source Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wiring Examples Appendix C GuardPLC 1200 Controller A1 A2 Safety 2AV DC Relay Power CH1 CH2 COM Supply i A1 A2 Safety Relay CH1 CH2 di gt ZAVDC 16 ml 20 2 g ISSIRISISINISRIS SISSE 2 Be Ab A 2VDC Power Supply COM Pulse Tested Safety Input 6 IB no Ip W4 116 118 120 l l j 1 3 5 9 ia 13 1 vl al al sj S PIPIBIPIBISIBIBISIBIST Wa A upply cunan or Eat n ei wl S COM N nee Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 311 Appendix C Wiring Examples 1755 1B24X016 Digital Input Output Modules 1755 IB24XOB16 RUN ERR vo 0 JO UE DAHM Same power supply used by GuardPLC CPU OINHAUPWNHEHO 24V DC Power COM Supply A2 Safety Relay CH1 CH2 342 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wiring Examples Appendix C 1755 IF8 Analog Input Modules 10K Q current devices 500 Q voltage devices external power supply single ended exemal U U voltage power supply COM external ended Power current supply 2 wire transmitters i external differential power voltage supply 4 wire analog devices 1755 OF8 Analog Output Modules external power supply external 4 current _ out
79. for inputs 1 4 14 1 Digital input 1 15 2 Digital input 2 16 3 Digital input 3 17 4 Digital input 4 18 L Reference pole 19 LS Sensor supply for inputs 5 8 20 5 Digital input 5 21 6 Digital input 6 22 7 Digital input 7 23 8 Digital input 8 24 L Reference pole 25 LS Sensor supply for inputs 9 12 26 9 Digital input 9 27 10 Digital input 10 28 11 Digital input 11 29 12 Digital input 12 30 L Reference pole 31 LS Sensor supply for inputs 13 16 32 13 Digital input13 33 14 Digital input 14 34 15 Digital input 15 35 16 Digital input 16 36 L Reference pole 37 LS Sensor supply for inputs 17 20 38 17 Digital input 17 39 18 Digital input 18 40 19 Digital input 19 41 20 Digital input 20 42 L Reference pole 53 Chapter4 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers Wire the GuardPLC 1800 Controller 54 Safety related Digital Output Terminals 123456 7 8 9 101112 123456 7839111 ooo OOO D0L 123 4L D0L 5678L 2A 2A Digital outputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function Current 1 t Referencepole 2 1 Digital output 1 0 5 A 3 2 Digital output 2 0 5 A 4 3 Digital output 3 0 5 A 5 4 Digital output 4 for increased load 20A 6 L Reference pole 7 L Reference pole 8 5 Digital output 5 05A 9 6 Digital output 6 0 5 A 10 7 Digital output 7 0 5 A 11 8 Digital out
80. impedance of a load and allows the modules to detect the following faults when LSLB monitoring is configured by using the system variable DOlxx LSLB e Short circuit between DO and DO e Short circuit DO and external L e Short circuit between DO and external L e Short circuit between DO and external L e Short circuit between DO and external L e Line break between DO and DO Line monitoring of the digital outputs is possible only when outputs are configured for 2 pole operation and both poles DO xx and DOlxx are wired to a load A detected line fault is reported in the system signal DO xx Error Code or DO xx Error Code See Appendix B for information on system signals There are two kinds of line monitoring e Line monitoring for lamp loads and inductive loads e Line monitoring for resistive capacitive loads For both types you must configure a period and time for line monitoring by using the system signal variables described on page 93 Line Monitoring for Lamp and Inductive Loads For short circuit detection a 24V impulse with a duration of 500 Us is switched in the output circuit Afterwards a 10V signal is set for the duration of the monitoring time to detect a line break To configure this type of line monitoring e set a DO LSLB period and DO LSLB time e set the output DO xx 2 pole signal to 1 TRUE e set the output DO xx LSLB monitoring signal to 1 TRUE e set the output DO xx LS monitori
81. information Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire for OS Configurable Line Control Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Pulse Testing Chapter 11 GuardPLC 1600 Controller and 1753 1B20X0B8 Module Up to 8 digital outputs DO1 to DO8 can be configured as pulsed outputs The example below shows 2 outputs configured as pulse test outputs connected to the digital inputs DD of the same system As a result the connections to the digital inputs DD are monitored The pulse outputs must begin at DO 01 and must be sequential For example if two pulse outputs are required they must be DO 01 and DOI02 Emergency OFF 1 Emergency OFF 2 D01 Configurable 5 2000 us D02 Configurable 5 2000 us The digital outputs DO1 and DO2 are pulsed briefly set to low so that the connections to the digital inputs are monitored The duration of the test can be configured in the range of 5 2000 Us with a default value of 400 Us 103 Chapter 11 104 Pulse Testing 1753 IB16 1753 IB8X0B8 and 1753 IB16X0B8 Modules The 1753 IB16 module has four digital pulse test sources PO The 1753 IB8XOB8 and 1753 IB16XOB8 modules have two digital pulse test sources The example below shows 2 pulse test sources connected to the digital inputs DD of the same system As a result the connections to the digital inputs DD are monitored Emergency OFF 1 Emergency OFF 2 Do not use pulsed outputs
82. ms If no errors occur the output is set per the application program The duration of monitoring time adds to the cycle time A There are 4 tests during the LSLB test period DO LSLBperiod TIP s In principle this means that there will be a test every 1 4 of the period So if the period is 1 second there will be a test every 250 ms If the LSLB time duration DO LSLB time is 20 ms there will be 230 ms between 20 ms tests Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Name DO LSLB period Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16XOB8 Module Chapter 8 Required Signals for Line Monitoring Line monitoring must be configured by using these system signals for 1753 IB16XOB8 modules on the Outputs tab of the digital outputs Signal Connections dialog box in RSLogix Guard PLUS software Description The time between steps in Line Short Line Break LSLB monitoring Setting Values in one second increments from 1 100 DO LSLB time The duration of LSLB monitoring Values in one millisecond increments from 0 50 ms The default is 0 ms DO xx 2 pole Configures the module for 2 pole operation 2 pole operation 0 1 pole operation DO xx Value Output value for DO channels DO 1 pole Value 0 or 1 2 pole identical to DO Value 0 or 1 DO xx Value Output value for DO channels DO 1 pole Value 0 or 1 2 pole identical to DO Value 0 or 1 DO xx LSLB monitoring Configur
83. names in alphanumeric order to begin with For example signal 101 signal 102 signal 103 signal 104 and so forth 278 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Profibus DP Slave Protocol RS 485 GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT 3H H4 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Communicate with Modbus and Profibus Devices Chapter 22 Profibus DP Slave protocol is available only via the GuardPLC 1600 and 1800 controllers COMMI port This connection is two way non safety related communication from the controller slave to the master device You cannot program the controller by using this port To use the Profibus DP function signals that you wish to send out the COMMI port must be connected to placeholders in the Profibus DP protocol Connect Signals dialog box Connect the Controller to a Profibus DP Device Connection Signal Function 1 2 RP 5V decoupled with diodes 3 RxD TxD A Receive Transmit data A 4 CNTR A Control Signal A 5 DGND Data reference potential 6 VP 5V positive pole of supply voltage 7 8 RxD TxD B Receive Transmit data B 9 CNTR B Control Signal B IMPORTANT The Profibus port is RS 485 You must use an electrical l interface device to connect the controller to an RS 232 device 279 Chapter 22 Communicate with Modbus and Profibus Devices Configure the Profibus DP Serial Port You must either create a new project or open an existing project before you can c
84. not a critical factor It is well suited for virtual private networks VPN where data exchange is slow due to safety devices firewalls encoding decoding but error free TIP Normally use the profile Medium amp Noisy see page 172 Medium amp Cleanroom Characteristics Minimum Ethernet network requirements 10 MBit 10 Base T or 100 Mbit technology 100 Base TX or network with both 10 MBit and 100 MBit components LAN switches required Medium or Fast No loss of data due to traffic overload harsh environmental conditions or network defects Time for 2 0 repetitions Clean Characteristics of the communication path Moderate delays ResponseTime ReceiveTMO otherwise ERROR ResponseTime manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor Variables ReceiveTMO manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor WDZ manually set in the controller properties Suitable HH network Fast profile Medium lt 10 controllers in a Token Group Peer to Peer parameter presets e QueueLen 3 e Communication Time Slice large enough to process and send all data defined for transmission in one CPU cycle e ResentT MO if ReceiveTMO gt 2 x WDZ then ResendTMO ResponseTime 2 0 Resends possible if Receive TMO lt 2 x WDZ then ResendTMO ReceiveTMO e AckTMO ReceiveTMO or AckTMO AckTMOMax whichever is smaller e ProdRate ResponseTime 4 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March
85. one controller in a second token group Furthermore the overall number of links between token groups is limited to eight Token Group 1 Token Group 2 GuardPLC 1600 Controllers with Integrated Ethernet Switch GuardPLC GuardPLC 2000 RK e 2000 Controller Controllers WI JEN PP er Ill ii i i GuardPLC GuardPLC 1200 GuardPLC 1200 GuardPLC 1200 scili Contro Controller Controller Controller pum ww uardPLC 1800 Controller with Integrated Ethernet Switch Programming Terminal 10 Mbps Hub ABB AA wuu v FFF EE EEE X The illustration above shows an application consisting of two token groups The token groups equipped with hubs require token passing to coordinate network access within the token groups The token groups are interconnected via a LAN switch Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 165 Chapter 16 166 Peer to peer Communication Overview In this network topology only one controller in Token Group 1 is allowed to exchange data with one controller in Token Group 2 If Token Group 2 needs data from different controllers in Token Group 1 the talking controller in Token Group 1 must collect the data In the HH Network Profile II Configuration
86. only a direct point to point connection between the master and slave The controller is always configured as slave It transfers process values via the serial interface to the master only when it receives the corresponding request from the master Interface the field bus interface to be used by the Modbus Slave protocol comm1 comm2 comm3 Choose comm1 for GuardPLC 1600 or 1800 controllers Refresh Rate Refresh rate in ms for non safe communication The default is 0 the fastest refresh rate Baud Rate the data transfer speed in bits s Choose from a pull down menu of predefined values between 300 and 115 200 bps The default baud rate is 9600 bps Parity the parity for the recognition of transfer errors Choose No Odd or Even The default is No parity Stop Bit either 1 or 2 stop bits for the serial data transfer The default is 1 stop bit Connect Signals The Modbus RTU Slave protocol lets you read data from the GuardPLC controller and write data to the GuardPLC controller but none of this data can be used for safety functions Inputs are signals sent from the Modbus master to the controller slave Outputs are signals sent from the controller slave to the master Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 271 Chapter 22 Communicate with Modbus and Profibus Devices Follow these steps to connect signals 1 Expand Protocols right click the Modbus Slave icon and choose Connect Signals j RSL
87. regarded as overload The overload is limited to lt 11 A per output or lt 2 A if all four outputs are overloaded at the same time With an overload of 2 A the output voltage drops to 18V All counter common reference poles C share the same path All digital output common reference poles L share the same path but are electrically isolated from the C pins Terminal Number Designation Function 1 C Common reference pole 2 Al Signal input for counter 1 3 B1 Counting direction input for counter 1 4 Z1 Reset input for counter 1 5 C1 no function 6 C Common reference pole 7 C Common reference pole 8 C Common reference pole 9 C Common reference pole 10 C Common reference pole 11 A2 Signal input for counter 2 12 B2 Counting direction input for counter 2 13 Z2 Reset input for counter 2 14 C2 no function 15 C Common reference pole 16 C Common reference pole 17 C Common reference pole 18 C Common reference pole 19 L Reference pole for digital outputs 20 1 Digital output 1 21 2 Digital output 2 22 3 Digital output 3 23 4 Digital output 4 24 L Reference pole for digital outputs 25 L Reference pole for digital outputs 26 L Reference pole for digital outputs 2 L Reference pole for digital outputs Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 6 Introduction Safety related Digital Inputs Publication
88. terminals are internally connected Therefore all PO1 and all PO2 terminals pulse together 94 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 9 Introduction Safety related Analog Inputs Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire the 1753 IF8XOF4 Analog UO Module Topic Page Safety related Analog Inputs 95 Standard Analog Outputs 97 The 1753 IF8XOF4 module features 8 safety analog inputs and 4 standard analog outputs These input values are available Input Channels Polarity Current or Voltage Range Safety Accuracy 8 unipolar 0 10V 0 2000 2 0 20 mA 4 20 0 1000 mA 0 2000 2 1 With external 250 Q shunt 2 With external 500 Q shunt Voltage Measurement If an open circuit fault occurs during voltage measurement unpredictable input signals are received on the high resistance inputs Values resulting from this fluctuating input voltage are not reliable Because the module does not feature circuit monitoring you must terminate input channels with a 10 kQ resistor when measuring voltage Consider the internal resistance of the source as well Current Measurement To measure current connect a 500 Q external shunt in parallel to the input Accuracy of the shunt must be included in accuracy calculations of the input signal Terminating resistors are not required for current measurement with the external shunt connected in parallel 95 Chapter9 Wire the 1753 IF
89. that the OUT 121 signals show 16412 16 34 16 ab 16 cd Resource View Options Help Start Stop Takeover Configure Gend Export Import Append Resource Resource Forcing activated Force Time 5000 sec Forcing allowed Remaining Force Time 4546 sec Iv Stop on Timeout Signals 1 0 Channets Signal_120_0001 12345678 y DINT of 12345678 v E Sion 120 0008 seres wpiNI sme md mE Sraa ml Bm setzte em mE Des ses Em D s s BYT Scope Demo_Config contre v Show Show All v Sot TagName v 3 Value ForceMask e Enable 1 Decimal POOL MSG_READ BA att MESS MSG WRITE rm 19953 MESS P ReadBulfer fisci Decimal Jour ReadBuffer0 12345678 Decimal DINT ReadBuffer1 13572468 Decimal DINT ReadBuffer2 98765432 Decimal DINT TIMER_CONN TERN Goan TIMER whiteBuffer TEES Hex SINTA WriteButfert0 16812 Hex SINT WriteBuffer 1 16834 Hex SINT writeBuffer2 l jab Hex SINT EH WiiteBuffer3 l scd Hex SINT 234 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use a GuardPLC Controller as an Unconnected Adapter Use Unconnected PCCC Messaging from a PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 Controller Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 Using the GuardPLC controller as an unconnected adapter is similar to
90. the event of a fault all outputs are switched off This includes faults in Ethernet communication GuardPLC 1200 System The GuardPLC 1200 controller is a compact system consisting of a CPU watchdog and on board digital I O The GuardPLC 1200 controller features 20 digital inputs 8 digital outputs and 2 high speed counters An RS 232 serial port supports ASCII communication and an Ethernet port provides safety related communication A user supplied 24V DC power supply is required See page 45 for power supply connections GuardPLC 1200 Controller Upper Terminal Block dISISISISISISISISISISISISISIS SEELEN P Back up Battery Compartment Bui Factory ASCII Serial Port Use Only RER NIY Lower Terminal Block lt lt g Ethernet Dongle Required Ethernet Port on Bottom of Controller RJ 45 Pot M 21 Chapter 1 22 Overview of Safety Controllers GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 System GuardPLC 1600 Controller RJ 45 Ethernet Ports on Top of Controller Digital Outputs Voltage Supply Connection Allen Bradley Guard PLE RS 485 Serial Ports E P 1600 See Page 23 ae Uu mmm 8 DC Outputs RJ 45 Ethernet Ports on Bottom of Controller Digital Inputs GuardPLC 1800 Controller RJ 45 Ethernet Ports on Top of fun Gre
91. the load because there is a protection diode located within the GuardPLC device However Rockwell Automation strongly recommends that a protection diode be fitted directly to the load to suppress any interference voltage A 1N4004 diode is recommended Safety related Analog GuardPLC 1800 controller analog inputs provide for the unipolar Inputs measurement of voltages from 0 10V referenced to L A 10 KQ p shunt is used for single ended voltage signals With a 500 Q shunt resistor currents from 0 20 mA can also be measured Analog cabling should be no more than 300 m 984 ft in length Use shielded twisted pair cables with the shields connected at one end for each measurement input See the instructions for connecting shielded cabling to the shield contact plate on page 48 Unused analog inputs must be short circuited Place wire jumpers to ground on any inputs that are not used Al Ti Hl L T2 I2 L 41 44 Wire Jumper Wire Jumper Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 51 Chapter4 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers High speed Counters 52 The GuardPLC 1200 and 1800 controllers feature inputs for high speed counting up to a maximum of 100 kHz These counters are 24 bit and are configurable for either 5V or 24V DC The counters can be used as a counter or as a decoder for 3 bit Gray Code inputs As a counter input A is the counter input input B is the counter direction input and
92. the parameters and how they influence one another To simplify the setup RSLogix Guard PLUS software provides six Peer to Peer profiles which can be selected by the user depending upon application requirements and the capabilities of the network Profiles are combinations of matched parameters that are automatically set when the user chooses a certain profile The intention of all profiles is to optimize the data throughput on the network which minimizes the ReceiveTMO and results in a low Worst Case ReactionTime For the definitions of the Peer to Peer network parameters see page 157 The six profiles listed below are described in the following sections e Fast amp Cleanroom e Fast amp Noisy e Medium amp Cleanroom e Medium amp Noisy e Slow amp Cleanroom and e Slow amp Noisy Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Peer to peer Communication Overview Chapter 16 Peer to Peer Profile I Fast amp Cleanroom This profile provides the fastest data throughput for applications that require fast data update rates It is also best for applications that require the shortest feasible Worst Case ReactionTime Fast amp Cleanrooom Characteristics Minimum Ethernet network requirements Fast 100 Mbit technology 100 Base TX Fast Ethernet full duplex recommended LAN Switched switches or integrated switches GuardPLC 1600 1800 controller required No loss of data due to traffic over
93. the table or press the Return key to activate the selection The profile of the return path is automatically updated with the new profile Define Peer to peer Parameters The most important timing parameter of a safety related installation is the Safety Time Safety Time is the time a process can run with incorrect controller outputs without affecting the safety of the process See the GuardPLC Controller Systems Safety Reference Manual publication 1753 RM002 for more details on the Safety Time The Worst Case Reaction Time Tp is the time within which two linked controllers must detect the occurrence of a physical input signal at PES and put out the resulting physical output signal at PES To guarantee the integrity of the application the requirement below must always be fulfilled Tg lt Safety Time When you choose a peer to peer profile most parameters are automatically preset Because ReceiveTMO safety relevant is part of the Worst Case ReactionTime Tp see Peer to peer Protocol Parameters 186 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Chapter 17 on page 157 ReceiveTMO must be calculated and set manually by overwriting the default value in the Peer to Peer Editor For profiles where ProdRate 0 Fast amp Cleanroom Fast amp Noisy ReceiveTMO is ReceiveTMO Tp 2 x WDZ PES 2 x WDZ PES For profiles where ProdRat
94. to 3 assembly data e Set Source Element to WriteBuffer f Set Source Length to 4 bytes The Source tag can be larger in size than the target GuardPLC assembly However the Source Length should exactly match the size of the assembly otherwise an error occurs Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 This Class 3 example uses the Cache Connections option A connection with this flag is opened when the controller switches to Run mode and the rung condition is true In our example the rung condition is true when Enable value is true and the timer has expired DN flag is set When the rung condition is False the connection remains open If the Enable tag is changed to false the connection still remains open To maintain the open connection the Logix controller periodically sends the last message with the same data sequence number This same data sequence number indicates to the GuardPLC controller that this is just a keep alive message and that the data has not changed If this is a write message the GuardPLC controller still responds to it but ignores the data that came with it because it knows the data has not changed This periodic frequency is set by default to 7 5 seconds meaning that every 7 5 seconds a keep alive message will be sent to keep the connection open Once Enable is set back to true the messages are sent with
95. to peer Communication Overview Networking Limitations 152 As seen in the figure below both the HH and the peer to peer protocols are vital for safe Ethernet Communication HH protocol can be considered the wire or transport media through which messages are passed Peer to peer P2P is the protocol that runs on the wire making sure that the messages are transmitted over the HH connection within the watchdog time P2P is the mechanism that qualifies the GuardPLC Ethernet network as a safety network Controller 1 Controller 2 ceu P2P PP com HH 1 HH Ethernet TIP The peer to peer protocol is designated as a safe protocol according to DIN V 19250 AK6 IEC61508 SIL 3 and ISO 13849 1 PLe Cat 4 respectively A peer to peer link is defined as communication from one GuardPLC controller to another GuardPLC controller or from a GuardPLC controller to a distributed I O module A device on an Ethernet network must make a connection to another device on the Ethernet network for the two of them to communicate Connections need to be established only between devices that wish to communicate with each other A single GuardPLC controller may have up to 64 connections to other devices on the GuardPLC Ethernet network GuardPLC controllers GuardPLC distributed I O module OPC servers or programming terminals Each connection can transfer up to 900 bytes of data in each direction
96. 0 Introduction Prepare the GuardPLC Controller for Class 1 Scanner Connections Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Topic Page Prepare the GuardPLC Controller for Class 1 Scanner Connections 249 Configure the EtherNet IP Driver 252 Configure Connections in RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP Software 254 Open a Connection to a Logix Controller 260 Save the Connection Configuration in the GuardPLC Controller 262 Remove the Connection Configuration 263 Make sure the GuardPLC controller resource has the EtherNet IP protocol added under the Protocols folder in the RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management project tree If it does not see page 203 for instructions on adding EtherNet IP protocol to the project TETH Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help E Ta SDProject 44 Configuration Validate F Typelnstance i Bin GuardPLC 160 jm Programming Terminal MCP Configuration ASCII Protocol HP ei HSP Protocol Copy Paste The GuardPLC controller s scanner I O assembly consists of two buffers one to store input data and the other to store output data When a new connection is opened from the GuardPLC controller to an I O module the scanner input buffer receives data from the I O module and the scanner output buffer stores data that is sent to the I O module You must allocate enough spa
97. 0 Output Size Words Output Address Configuration Size 8 v Words Auto Address Preferences Cancel Apply Help In a produce consume system modules multicast data meaning that multiple modules can receive the same data at the same time from a single module When you choose Connection Name in this dialog box you must choose whether to establish an owner or listen only relationship with the module An owner connection is any connection that does not include Listen Only in its Connection Name Property Description Some modules do not support all of the possible EtherNet IP connection types Exclusive Owner Input Only and Listen Only The Connection Name pulldown menu contains only the connection types supported by the selected module When the exclusive owner type is used output assemblies can be written Only one exclusive owner Exclusive connection is allowed to connect to a single output assembly Multiple Exclusive Owner connections can Owner be made to input only modules Any module that contains output assemblies can have only one Exclusive Owner Connection An input only connection lets input assemblies be exported to one or more consumers Another connection Name request to the same input connection can be made if the same data size and requested packet rate are Input Only ee beds specified All Input Only connections are independent of one another When one of the connections is closed the others r
98. 0 Resource 1 i Distributed 1 0 Statistics P2P State Distributed 1 0 HH State Environment Data os IP Settings ModbusMs License HSP Protocol EIP Protocol Status Connections Status EE Ethemet iP d 5 Gf Scanner L RSNelWorx Configuration FS Upload Vendor Id f 120 IN 120 Device Type 14 121 QUT 121 122 IN_122 Product Code es 123 OUT 123 Major Minor Revision 1 1 124 IN_124 CIP SerialNumber 16841002284 125 DUT 125 126 IN 126 Status 1580074 127 OUT 127 Product Name 1753 L28BBBx GPLC 1600 128 IN_128 Disable Scanner o 129 QUT 129 130 IN 130 Bad Messages 1168 131 QUT 131 132 IN_132 133 QUT 133 134 IN 134 135 QUT 135 138llN 136 E 0 Online Administrator 4 Right click the controller Resource in the project tree and choose Code Generation to compile the configuration code 262 Publication 1753 UMO001C EN P March 2010 Remove the Connection Configuration Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Chapter 20 You can also remove a connection configuration from a project 1 Click the RSNetWorx Configuration under the EtherNet IP Scanner branch and press the Delete key RSLogix Guard PLUS software removes the RSNetWorx Configuration branch 2 Right click the controller Resource and choose Code Generation to save the change to the project 263 Chapter 20 Us
99. 000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity C Tick Australian Radiocommunication Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety 1 with external shunt resistor Certified by TUV 293 1753 0W8 Relay Output Module Attribute 1753 0W8 Response Time gt 10ms GuardPLC Ethernet 2 x RJ 45 10 100BaseT with 100 Mbps with integrated switch Interfaces Operating voltage 24V DC 1596 2096 ws lt 15 from a power supply with protective separation conforming to IEC 61131 2 requirements Current consumption 0 6 A max with max load Isolation voltage No isolation between circuits Wiring category category 2 on communication ports signal ports and power ports Wire size 1 0 1 5 mm 16 AWG 0 14 mm 26 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 75 C 167 F or greater with 3 64 inch 1 2 mm insulation max Power 2 5 mm 14 AWG 0 34 mm 22 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 75 C 167 F or greater with 3 64 inch 1 2 mm insulation max Terminal block torque 0 51 Nm 4 5 in Ib Fuse external 10 A slow blow Battery backup none Relay Outputs Number of outputs 8 normally open contacts Switching voltage gt 5V x250V AC 250V DC Switching current UL 24V DC 1 A resistive load 250V AC 6 A general purpose TUV e up to 240VA for V AC e up to 30V DC 90 W
100. 1 2 Right click the ASCII icon and choose Properties Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help Er Ts example ad Configuration ER 2 Resource Distributed 1 0 S Protocols Configuration Resource Protocols ASCI dli Typelnstance Connect signals Type ke EA OI GuardPLC 1600 SbeAddes fi Ct iB Programming Terminal FF E S HH Network_1 Set Sch Token Group Interface zi AX Token Group 1 Baud rate 9600 z Parity Stop Bit OK Cancel Apply Help Specify the slave address 1 65535 of the controller The ASCII protocol of the controller supports only a direct point to point connection between the master and slave The controller is always configured as slave It only transfers process values via the serial interface to the master when it receives the corresponding request from the master Refresh Rate the refresh rate in milliseconds for non safe communication between the COM and CPU The default is 0 the fastest refresh rate Interface the field bus interface to be used by the ASCII protocol comm comm2 comm3 Choose comm3 for GuardPLC 1600 or 1800 controllers Baud Rate the data transfer speed in bits s Choose from a pull down menu of predefined values between 300 and 115 200 bps The default baud rate is 9600 bps Parity the parity for the recognition of transfer errors Choose No Odd or Even The default is No parity Stop Bit either 1 or 2 stop
101. 10 Introduction Prevent Electrostatic Discharge Power Supply Considerations Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter J General Wiring Considerations Topic Page Prevent Electrostatic Discharge 45 Power Supply Considerations 45 Ground the Equipment 46 Terminal Connections 47 Shield contact Plate Connections 48 Detailed Wiring Information 48 Electrostatic discharge can damage integrated circuits or semiconductors Follow these guidelines when you handle the module e Touch a grounded object to discharge static potential e Wear an approved wrist strap grounding device e Do not touch conductors or pins on component boards e Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment e Use a static safe workstation if available e Keep the equipment in appropriate static safe packaging when not in use The power supply must provide a voltage between 20 4 and 28 8V DC You must supply enough power to drive the controller inputs and outputs because all GuardPLC controllers and distributed I O modules source the current for the input channels and drive the output devices connected to them No additional power supply is required to drive outputs To operate GuardPLC controllers typically draw less than 1 A at 24V DC They require additional power to operate the inputs and outputs connected to the controller Consider the power draw of the I O when specifying the size of the power supply and req
102. 10 100BaseT RJ 45 connectors to provide communication via the GuardPLC Ethernet network to other GuardPLC controllers distributed I O and RSLogix Guard PLUS software These connectors also provide communication via an EtherNet IP network to other Ethernet devices Connectors 1 and 2 are located on the bottom side on the left Connectors 3 and 4 are located on the top side on the left Ethernet Ports 3 and 4 GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT vo on Ethernet Ports 1 and 2 All four connectors and the GuardPLC controller are connected together by an internal Ethernet switch In contrast to a hub a switch is able to store data packets for a short period of time to establish a temporary connection between two communication partners for the transfer of data In this way collisions typical of a hub can be avoided and the load on the network is reduced The switch automatically switches between transfer rates of 10 and 100 Mbps and between full and half duplex connections This makes the full bandwidth available full duplex operation in both directions A switch enables several connections to be established at the same time and can address up to 1000 absolute MAC addresses Auto crossing recognizes that cables with crossed wires have been connected and the switch adjusts accordingly Therefore either cross over or straight through Ethernet cabling can be used Star or line configurations are available Make sure that a network loo
103. 100 e ms Ethernet Config Help r Network Nodes jede fame Htode Address Path Mode Type I GuardPLC 101 102 103 104 Generic CIP End of Node List gt Press lt Insert gt to insert a new node Press lt Delete gt to delete an existing node Leave the Path field blank 6 Click OK Configure a Write Operation The example below configures the PanelView Standard terminal to perform a write operation to set the preset value of a tag located in the GuardPLC controller s target output assembly OUT_120 1 2 From the Objects menu choose Numeric Entry gt Cursor Point Position the pointer on the application screen hold down the left mouse button and drag to draw the object on the screen The object is created with six characters as a placeholder for the numeric value Each character is a single digit Double click the object to open the Properties dialog box Check the Touch Cell checkbox Enter a name for the Write Tag Click the Edit Tag button to open the Tag Form dialog box Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 7 Configure the tag as shown below Tag Form 2 xl Tag Name Data Type Tank 3 Preset z Unsigned Integer ivi Cancel Help j Menag Tove Node Name C Controller Address Buff zl a Service Code Value Hex CIP Set
104. 2 7 8 9 101 12 0000 DO L 1234L DO L 5678 L 2A DN avic O me Allen Bradley Gua PLC D PROG o Distributed VO FORCE rur 1753 IB200XB8 os O 20 DC Inputs Pulse Tested BL 8 DC Outputs Safety Input Di D1 Di Di Di 198 12 3 4L LS 5 6 7 8L LS 9 101112 L LS 13 141516 L LS 17 18 1920 L 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 131415161718 19 20212223 252627282930 31 3233343536 37 38 39 40 41 42 GuardPLC Ethernet Dry 10 100 BaseT Contact 123 42 q 25 26 27 28 29 30 b 37 38 39 40 2NDC 4 Power B Supply COM Light Curtain Safety Input Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wiring Examples Appendix C 1753 IB8X0B8 Modules Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 E Contactor Sd i 718 0000 0000 oooo L 1 2 4 8 S L 1 2 3 44L L 5 6 7 8 L POPUISETEST DO DO 2A DO 2A QD Allen Bradley Guard PLE 7 Distributed VO 1753 IBBXOB8 8 DC Inputs 8 DC Outputs o0ooooooo D1 LS 1 2 3 4L ooo DI LS 5 6 7 8L ooo GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT cr Power Supply Light Curtain Safety Input 337 Appendix C Wiring Examples 1753 IB16XOB8 Modules 24V D OM Power Supply OFEREEAETEATA Fo oT Tt e S D0 po Woh A YE Ld PO PULSE TEST avoc O o o e Oo 020 o 0 0 Allen Bradley Guo PLE i mo O 0 Distributed O ro
105. 2 3 4L LS 5 6 7 8L LS 9 1011 12 L LS 13 14 15 16 L LS 17 18 19 20 L OOOO 0000 0000 0000 0000 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25262728 2930 3132333435 36 37 38 3940 41 42 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 The digital inputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function 13 LS Sensor supply for inputs 1 4 14 1 Digital input 1 15 2 Digital input 2 16 3 Digital input 3 17 4 Digital input 4 18 L Reference pole 19 LS Sensor supply for inputs 5 8 20 5 Digital input 5 21 6 Digital input 6 22 7 Digital input 7 23 8 Digital input 8 24 L Reference pole 26 9 Digital input 9 27 10 Digital input 10 28 11 Digital input 11 29 12 Digital input 12 30 L Reference pole 32 13 Digital input 13 33 14 Digital input 14 34 15 Digital input 15 35 16 Digital input 16 36 L Reference pole 38 17 Digital input 17 39 18 Digital input 18 40 19 Digital input 19 41 20 Digital input 20 42 L Reference pole Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 75 Chapter6 Wire 1753 IB16 1753 0B16 and 1753 IB20X0B8 Modules Safety related Digital Outputs 123456 7 8 9 101112 123456 7839111 ooo OOO D0L 123 4L DO L 5 67 8L 2A 2A The digital outputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Designation Function Current N
106. 200 or 2000 controller into which a TIP l back up battery has not yet been installed is always in Failure Stop and must be restarted before you can download a routine Controller Configuration To enable the controller to perform its tasks you have to configure the controller The parameters you specify are stored in the nonvolatile RAM and in the flash file system of the communication section of the controller To configure a controller follow these steps 1 In the Hardware Management Window expand the Configuration module 2 Right click Resource and choose Properties W Configuration Resource SR Type GuardPLC 1800 zap Ft Name Resource Salety Time me Wacha Telm Kr System ID SRS 60000 S Safety Time ms 100 Watchdog Time ms Main Enable Autostart Start Restart allowed Loading allowed Test Mode allowed Online Test allowed B Forcing allowed Stop on Force Timeout v max Com Time Slice ms 10 Code Generation Version fa EI OK Cancel Apply Help 3 From the Type pull down menu choose your controller Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 117 Chapter 13 Controller Configuration and Modes of Operation For this parameter System ID SRS 4 Set the controller parameters based on the information the table below IMPORTANT The safety time you specify must meet the needs of the controlled process See the GuardPLC Controller Systems
107. 2010 171 Chapter 16 172 Peer to peer Communication Overview Peer to Peer Profile IV Medium amp Noisy The Medium and Noisy profile provides medium data throughput for applications where only a moderate data update rate is required It is good for applications where the Worst Case ReactionTime is not a critical factor Minor loss of messages can be corrected Medium amp Noisy Characteristics Minimum Ethernet network requirements 10 MBit 10 Base T or 100 Mbit technology 100 Base TX or network with both 10 MBit and 100 MBit components Usage of hubs possible Medium or Fast Low probability for loss of messages Noisy Time for 2 1 repetitions Characteristics of the communication path Moderate delays ResponseTime ReceiveTMO 2 Variables Responselime manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor ReceiveTMO manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor WDZ manually set in the controller properties Suitable HH network profile Medium or Fast Peer to Peer parameter presets e QueueLen 3 e Communication Time Slice large enough to process and send all data defined for transmission in one CPU cycle e ResendTMO if ReceiveTMO gt 2 x WDZ then ResendTMO ResponseTime 2 1 Resend possible if ReceiveTMO 2 x WDZ then ERROR e AckTMO ReceiveTMO or AckTMO AckTMOMax whichever is smaller e ProdRate ResponseTime 4 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P Ma
108. 24V DC supply voltage Refer to the GuardPLC 2000 Power Supply Installation Instructions publication 1755 IN007 for detailed instructions 64 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire the 1755 IB24X0B16 Digital UO Module Wire the GuardPLC 2000 Controller and UU Chapter 5 This module is a combination I O module featuring 24 safety related digital inputs and 16 safety related digital outputs Inputs The sockets with pins 2 9 11 18 and 20 27 provide the 24 digital inputs I1 124 Pins 1 10 and 19 are the common positive poles LS Each group of 8 inputs has current limits of 100 mA e Outputs The sockets with pins 29 36 and 38 45 provide the 16 digital outputs O1 016 Pins 28 and 37 are the common negative poles L for the output loads e Each output channel can be loaded with 2 A but the total load of all 16 outputs must not exceed 8 A Terminal Designation Function Terminal Designation Function Number Number rezaxon16 1 LS Digital input supply 24 121 Digital input 21 for inputs 1 8 RUN ERR 1 b 2 11 Digital input 1 25 122 Digital input 22 Td S 95 3 E Digital input 2 26 ES Digital input 23 4 I3 5 e 4 I3 Digital input 3 2 124 Digital input 24 6 I5 7 Qze 5 14 Digital input 4 28 L Reference pole for S 2 outputs 1 8 6 15 Digital input 5 29 01 Digital output 1 7 l6 Digita
109. 3 Wire the 1753 IB20XOB8 Combination Module 75 Safety related Digital Inputs a onnaa naaa 75 Safety related Digital Outputs oo Ba e aa 76 Chapter 7 Tt POCO VOLES atas a ean Aloe te e ENEE 77 Safety related Digital Inputs va Sad oe Mh XC Roa 77 Terminal Connections poe hac P uev X Pez Xr dro 78 Surge on Digital Inputs 4 ve ache tree ee dd 78 Satety related Digital Outputs 74 9 i0 eid a a eRe Ee 78 Signals for Output Configuration 79 Terminal Connections yo ns d acie uer V a ASS 80 PUSS Test OUPCES dha x pase dac A n qp dol eto 81 Chapter 8 MEO CISION ree Vestes e e cede I Ed CREUSE CREAR 83 Safety related Digital Inputs o an naaa 83 Terminal Connections 3 paret Ret fee dee a e ead 85 Safety related Digital Outputs uu ava nde dye e RS cts 86 ee E exor te oa 2 Gp he kG hans TIENES RSS 86 Terminal Connections osaa 5 oy Y 679 me died amp dhe eS 90 Monitor for Line Short Line Break ANNERES EEN E A 91 Line Monitoring for Lamp and Inductive Loads 91 Line Monitoring with Reduced Voltage for Resistive Capacitive Loads s a v bet dp sun EE xo pe a b t 92 Required Signals for Line Monitoring ess sew ERES 93 Pulse Test Sources Le cst nata Re S ette AOR e TU ete 93 7 Table of Contents Wire the 1753 IF8XOF4 Analog 1 0 Module Wire the 1753 OW8 Relay Output Module Pulse Testing High Speed Counters Controller Configuration and Modes of Operation Chapter 9 TOL OCCU ORGS en sec V opas N
110. 3 58 Lower Terminal s ie so REA der dettes 58 Upper Terminal Block a eso eor aen 59 Chapter 5 VOTO DH OM Met bios oreet ea Te pte CUN ES ERN 61 Safety related Digital Inputs llle 61 Safety related Digital Outputs cies eia epi Ra 62 Safety Related Analog Inputs 1755 IF8 62 High speed Counter Module 1755 HSC 63 Safety related Analog Output Module 1755 OF8 64 C rrent DEO Sese dere a EDI EORR Be RLS gh dh apne ed gian 64 Wire the 1755 IB24XOB16 Digital I O Module 65 Wire the 1755 IF8 Analog Input Module 66 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire 1753 IB16 1753 0B16 and 1753 IB20X0B8 Modules Wire and Configure the 1753 IB8XOB8 Module Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16X0B8 Module Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Table of Contents Wire the 1755 OF8 Analog Output Module 66 Wire the 1755 HSC Counter Modules 68 Chapter 6 THOOCOSCHOR Gs ons area rs RU RAD e Aaa eee 69 Satety related Digital Inputs 24 oux Rub EIER REY 69 Safety related Digital Outputs lille 70 Power Supply Connections v5 eo s ur oe Gore oc 70 Wire the 1753 1616 Input Module c2 ve S WEXV e d 71 Safety related Digital Inputs e 71 Pulse Test SOUPCeS y uti ou e A cu a A Rt abs aby 72 Wire the 1753 OB16 Output Module 73 Operating Voltage Considerations 73 Safety related Digital Outputs 7
111. 30 L Reference pole Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire the 1753 0B16 Output Module Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire 1753 IB16 1753 0B16 and 1753 IB20X0B8 Modules Operating Voltage Considerations Chapter 6 The 1753 OB16 output module has a total current capacity 16 A higher than the terminal block current limitation 10 A Therefore it features two separate operating voltage supply connections if more than 10 A is used by the module The two output groups are shown below Each group has a current capacity of 8 A Group 1 Ll be b DI DN RUN ERROR 123456 0000 DOIL 1234L Group 2 TES WNW 0000 D LS678L PROG rorce O mur O os O BLO Di L 9 101112 L GuardPLC Ethernet FFTTTT 10 100 BaseT 1 Hi 13 14 15 16 17 18 16 DC Outppts D02 L 13 14 1516 L 19 20 20 22 23 28 SAAZZA Group Outputs 1 1 2 3 4 and 9 10 11 12 2 5 6 7 8 and 13 14 15 16 Safety related Digital Outputs The module has 16 digital outputs DO1 to DO16 whose status is indicated via status indicators D01 LS 1 2 3 4 L 0000 123456 123456 D01 LS 9 1011 12 L 0000 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18 D02 LS 8 L 567 OOOO 7 8 9 101112 7 8 9 1011 12 D02 LS 13 14 15 16 L 0000 19 20 21 22 23 24 19 20 21 22 23 24 Each output is rated for up to 1 A at 60 C 140 F or 2 A at 40 C 104 F However each gro
112. 32 Rockwell Software and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since the last publication To help you find new and updated information in this release of the manual we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph For Information About See Configuring Communication Between the Controller and a 205 PanelView PLUS Terminal Updated GuardPLC 1800 specifications 286 Added service life specifications for 1753 OW8 module 294 Updated information on battery replacement Appendix D Various updates to style and format throughout Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 3 Summary of Changes Notes 4 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Overview of Safety Controllers Installation Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Table of Contents Preface Who Should Use This Manual 245 2522 att et Tate 17 Purpose of This Manual ox qam Ae eee teed RU 17 Additional Resources das epe o8 a 17 Chapter 1 Introd ct om na s Ay wei Em LOS wae ee wa SS 19 Sale CONCEDE dined Dt c aco RE ef EI ee eae 19 Response to Fauliss sei Ke eek eee See A 20 Safe DEMS qd oou ee ee REAL eo Ripe Pi Gary onde e e e d 21 Itiput qa idR TI Le AC obe eq a AI a 21 Outputs qu que gue eee pure qs OX TG EP SES 21 Guard PL
113. 32 software version level 243 PanelView Standard terminals CIP messaging 243 248 related publications 244 PCCC messaging 235 243 Peer to Peer Network Profiles 168 174 fast amp cleanroom 169 fast amp noisy 170 medium amp cleanroom 171 medium amp noisy 172 slow amp cleanroom 173 slow amp noisy 174 Peer to Peer protocol 151 PLC 5 controllers PCCC messaging 235 243 related publications 236 power supply connections distributed UU 49 64 70 GuardPLC 1600 49 64 70 GuardPLC 1800 49 64 70 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Index primary controller 156 primary timout 156 production rate 160 Profibus DP Slave configuring 280 connecting 279 overview 29 protocol 282 signals 280 publications related 18 pulse test sources 1753 IB16 104 1753 IB16XOB8 104 1753 IB8XOB8 104 configuration 105 0 queue length 159 receive timeout definition 158 reconfiguring 197 setting 159 Requested Packet Interval in scanlist configuration 257 resend timeout 159 reset pushbutton 43 response time definition 155 157 reconfiguring 195 variables 158 response time extern 156 routines modes 120 RPTO SPTO function blocks 101 RSLinx software 203 237 252 RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management version level 203 RSLogix Guard PLUS Program Management version level 203 RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP version level 203 Run Idle header 216 217 in Class 3 connections 228 with CIP messages 243 with Logix controllers 218 with
114. 55 PB720 power supply module provides two voltages 3 3V DC and 5V DC for the GuardPLC 2000 controller They are electrically isolated from the supply voltage 24V DC 1755 IB24X0B16 Lt Module The 1755 IB24XOB106 digital input output module provides 24 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs The status of each I O signal is displayed with a status indicator located on the right side of the front plate connectors Inputs and outputs are electrically isolated from the supply voltage 24V DC 1755 IF8 Analog Input Module The 1755 IF8 analog input module has eight inputs These inputs can be used as either eight single ended inputs or four differential analog inputs that are electrically isolated from the logic side of the GuardPLC module The measured input value can be either voltage or current If you use the input module for current you need a shunt resistor The measured value is digitally transferred to the processor system as a value between 0 and 2000 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Overview of Safety Controllers Chapter 1 1755 OF8 Analog Output Module The 1755 OF8 analog output module provides eight outputs galvanically isolated in groups of 2 that is 2 outputs per power supply They are electrically isolated from the processor system Each analog output can operate as a current source or a voltage source 1755 HSC High Speed Counter Module The 1755 HSC counter module provides two counters and four digital out
115. 68 Connect SIBIdls os dus Deas e e Se e So eet 269 ASCI Protocol mersa vate m oe ae OR ER E 270 ASCII Master Request llle 270 ASCII Slave Controller Response 271 Data Type Formats da quoe Nava eu vedete de UR 273 Chapter 22 Introductions ner RUM ESRETREUPESPEDEEES RPSESER D 275 Modbus RTU Slave Protocol 0 00000002 ae 275 Connect the Controller to a Modbus Device 276 Configure the Modbus Serial Pont 270 Connect Signals ad gestes dro Fe oe o S oe 277 Profibus DP Slave Protocol 2 2 x 2o eoe ec oe etc 279 Connect the Controller to a Profibus DP Device 279 Configure the Profibus DP Serial Pott 5 us 280 Connect terme iu de ere Sed eer eR DR dur 280 Configure the Profibus Master 282 Appendix A GuardPLC 1200 Controller eo xa A vas eae Pe OE ROR EXS 283 GuardPLC 1600 Controller uos do Ee r tedesca 284 Guard PLC 1800 Cotittollet Aug St A he BG ce entum pes 286 Distib ted E re ed ra CUR E CER Bee ORE CR CRI 288 1753 IB16 Input Module eq oer po oe peto A 288 1753 Combination I O Modules 2 rm e eh 290 1753 IF8XOF4 Analog Combination Module 292 1753 OW8 Relay Output Module 294 1753 OB16 Output Module 296 13 Table of Contents System Signal Variables GuardPLC 2000 Controller 4 doa t Bera gm buss dede den 297 GuardPLC 2000 Distributed I O Modules 298 1755 IB24XOB106 Digital I O Module 298
116. 8 DO DO Terminal Designation Function Number 2 S Reference pole for negative switching digital outputs 3 S Reference pole for negative switching digital outputs 4 S Reference pole for negative switching digital outputs 5 S Reference pole for positive switching digital outputs 6 S Reference pole for positive switching digital outputs 7 S Reference pole for positive switching digital outputs 8 S Reference pole for positive switching digital outputs 9 1 Digital output 1 negative switching 0 1 Digital output 1 positive switching 1 2 Digital output 2 negative switching 12 2 Digital output 2 positive switching 13 3 Digital output 3 negative switching 14 3 Digital output 3 positive switching 15 4 Digital output 4 negative switching 16 4 Digital output 4 positive switching 17 5 Digital output 5 negative switching 18 5 Digital output 5 positive switching 19 6 Digital output 6 negative switching 20 6 Digital output 6 positive switching 21 7 Digital output 7 negative switching 22 7 Digital output 7 positive switching 23 8 Digital output 8 negative switching 24 8 Digital output 8 positive switching 90 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Monitor for Line Short Line Break Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16X0B8 Module Chapter 8 The Line Short Line Break LSLB monitoring measures the
117. 8 in including grounding bolt Weight 1 3 kg 3 47 Ib Certifications when product is marked c UL us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions European Union 73 23 EEC LVDDirective compliant with e EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunication Act compliant with e AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Certified by T V 1 Use this Conductor Category information for planning conductor routing Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 295 Specifications 1753 0B16 Output Module Attribute General GuardPLC Ethernet interfaces 1753 0B16 2 x RJ 45 10 100Base T with 100 Mbps with integrated switch Operating voltage 24V DC 15 20 Weg 15 from a power supply with protective separation conforming to IEC 61131 2 requirements Response time gt 10 ms Battery backup none Current consumption Digital Outputs approximately 0 2 A per group idle current Number of outputs 16 not electrically isolated Output Voltage Range 2 L minus 2V Output current maximum 1 A 60 C 140 F maximum 2 A 940 C 104 F Surge current per 4 Afor 10 ms Q 1 Hz channel Current load min 2 mA per ch
118. 8XOF4 Analog 1 0 Module Terminal Connections Analog cabling should be no more than 300 m 984 ft in length and must be shielded twisted pair cables for each measurement input The shields must be connected at one end IMPORTANT Short circuit unused input channels to the reference pole by connecting wire jumpers Al Tn L T2 12 L 41 44 Wire Jumpers Wire Jumpers Al Al Al Al Tilt L T212 L T3 13 L T414 L T5 15 L T6 16 L T7 I7 L T8 18 L 123456 7 8 9 101112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 See the wire size and terminal torques specifications on page 292 Analog inputs AI are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function 1 TI Sensor supply 1 2 n Analog input 1 3 L Reference pole input 1 4 T2 Sensor supply 2 5 12 Analog input 2 6 L Reference pole input 2 7 T3 Sensor supply 3 8 I3 Analog input 3 9 L Reference pole input 3 10 T4 Sensor supply 4 11 14 Analog input 4 12 L Reference pole input 4 13 T5 Sensor supply 5 14 15 Analog input 5 15 L Reference pole input 5 16 T6 Sensor supply 6 17 l6 Analog input 6 18 L Reference pole input 6 96 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire the 1753 IF8XOF4 Analog 1 0 Module Chapter 9 Terminal Number Designation Function 19 T Sensor supply 7 20 p Analog input 7 21 L Reference pole input 7 22 T8 Sensor supply 8 23 18 Analog input 8 24 L Reference pole in
119. A 5V Digital Outputs Quantity of outputs 16 Output voltage range operating voltage minus 2V depending on load Output current 30 C 2 A per channel overload protected 8 A max per module 298 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Attribute General Specifications Current consumption 1755 IB24X0B16 0 3 A 3 3V DC Specifications 0 5 A 24V DC Idle current to run module Appendix A Operating voltage 24V DC 15 42096 ripple lt 15 Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Weight 260 g 0 57 Ib Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity e EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A B amp C C Tick Australian Radiocommunication Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Certified by T V 1755 IF8 Analog Input Module Attribute Number of inputs 1755 IF8 8 single ended or 4 differential Input values rated values 0 10V DC or 0 20 mA with shunt user values 0 10 25V DC or 0 20 5 mA with shunt
120. Address 192 168 1 160 C Host Name 1 z KE Pr a Electronic Keying Compatible Module S nea JUST zm Cancel e Click Finish RSLogix 5000 software displays the new 1756 ENBT module under the I O Configuration 3 Right click the new 1756 ENBT icon and choose New Module 219 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter A Choose Generic Ethernet Module from the list and click OK Module Properties ENBT_1 ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 Type ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Parent ENBT_1 o a Connection Parameters Name BPLC E xclusive_Owner Assembly Output Comm Format Data SINT v Address Host Name Ze PAddress 192 168 1 180 C Host Name Cancel Next gt Finish gt gt Help Description Instance Size Input 120 6 E 8 bit 121 2 ES 8 bit 1 0 mm fi p e Configuration 5 Type the connection name in the Name field 6 Type the IP address of the GuardPLC controller in the IP Address field 7 Enter the Configuration Assembly Instance as 1 and its size as 0 because the configuration data instance will not be used by the GuardPLC controller Configure the Type of Connection GuardPLC controllers support these types of Class 1 connections e Exclusive Owner both sides are cyclically producing data for one another e Input Only more than one scanner can listen to the same da
121. B m ol New Connected Signal Delete Connected Signal Help Robot gt RobotB fi y p Signal Boot D Compile Logic If changes such as adding or deleting a tag are made to a connection between two controllers the code must be recompiled for both controllers To compile logic right click the resource controller in the RSLogix Guard PLUS Project Management window and choose Code Generation Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help TR CATAE stop B 44 Configuration mI Robot BE 2 RobotB bi Open j B Programming Terminal ES HH Network 1 LE Token Group 1 OFF LINE Simulation Code Generation ON LINE Test If code generation is not successful carefully check the Error state viewer in the Hardware Management window for error messages and correct the errors Start Download 1 Using the Multi Control Panel click Select all 8 to select all controllers 2 Click Stop W to make sure that all controllers are in Stop mode 189 Chapter 17 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Network Optimizing 190 3 Click Download to start the simultaneous download for all selected controllers The Action column shows the command that is currently executed or a short status message In the example below the downloads have completed successfully EET ell PADT Resource Online Table Help F Z Eng SA a RI e Name System Bach
122. B4 module requires 2 5 WORDs or 5 BYTEs for the input assembly If you use anything other than BYTE signals the GuardPLC returns an error to RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software when you try to save the scanlist The GuardPLC controller uses four input bytes for status To TIP prevent this data from automatically being the first four data signals add four BYTE signals to the first 4 rows of the Inputs tab In RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software offset 0 will be TAG 000 as shown below E Signal Connections Configuration 60000 Reso Bel E Signal Editor New Signal Delete Signal New Offsets Help New Signal Inputs ES Info Reserved I IN_1 Reserved IN 2 EMI Reserved IN 3 a Reserved IN 4 SCANNER IN 0 5 2 SCANNER_IN_1 SCANNER_IN_10 Reserved IN_1 fae Reserved_IN_2 Reserved_IN_2 E Em UI Reserved IN 3 poene IN 3 N Reserved IN 4 Disable Scanner Function on the Controller The controller is able to function as a scanner by default Follow these steps if you need to disable scanner function 1 Right click EtherNet IP in the project tree under the desired Resource and choose Connect Signals to open the Signal Connections dialog box 2 To open the Signal Editor from the Signals menu choose Editor 3 Create a new signal of type BOOL and an initial value of 1 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 251 C
123. Buffered L Buffered L Not Buffered L Buffered Current Current Current Current Current Current Limiting Limiting Limiting Limiting Limiting Limiting 40 mA 1A 40 mA 40 mA 1A 40 mA ___ _ o__ EON LUN LUN LUN Z ON fg ZN LS LS LS LS LS LS LS LS 33 34 43 44 Terminal Number 53 54 63 64 Follow the closed circuit principle for external wiring when connecting sensors To create a safe state in the event of a fault the input signals revert to the de energized state 0 Although the external line is not monitored a wire break is interpreted as a safe 0 signal Unused inputs must not be terminated An EN 61000 4 5 surge impulse can be read as a short duration HI signal in some modules To avoid an error either e install shielded input lines to prevent effects of surges in the system e implement software filtering in the user program A signal must be present for at least two cycles before it is evaluated 84 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16X0B8 Module Terminal Connections LS LS 1 2 3 4 L Lb LS LS5 6 7 8 LLALA LS LS 9 1011 12 LLAD 181813 14 15 16 L Lb db OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4142 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 5152 Chapter 8 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 See the wire size and terminal to
124. C System Hard wares eusaceaxm eb pese 21 GuardPLC 1200 System so Laue Gt ieee ee d Sr eene 21 GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 System 22 GuardPLC Distributed DCH goss tee eee daw pee 23 GuardPLC 2000 System tee 2 o eR ie ek P oul es 25 Communication Capabilities 27 GuardPLC Ethernet Network 27 EtherNet IP V 28 ASD An eae NE Pe a ee 28 High speed Safety Protocol tated y ra Oe ee ey 29 Modbus RTU Slave s o asto ue buie uem S i bI 29 PROFIBUS DP Blavey 2 3 0 d Qu eite m Eee f ed 29 OPG SGEVOES ese reo Ad DN o Pen wd eod tie es 30 Chapter 2 Ke e Sa d obe qr ach edu Oe Ne ES P FEE RI E PX 31 General ae odncot Ser obo p ADR ded oed a dri 31 Mounbthe Eguiprnent x24 o x oret RUE ded Roe 32 GuardPLC 1200 Controller se REX TE SER bd 32 GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 Controllers and Distrib ted Oo vau ient YU EE ech 33 GuardPLC 2000 Chassis is ie itn town ve ee dics 34 GuardPLC 2000 Controller I O and Power Supply 36 Communication Connections e 38 Guard PLC 1200 Conttoller 3 20 49 xm EEN 38 GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 Controllers 39 GuardPLC Distributed I O Modules 41 GuardPLC 2000 Controller vc edie 24 08 ae bs Sexe es 42 Reset Pushbutton ny ses de oe we ee OE a DE 43 Table of Contents General Wiring Considerations Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers Wire the GuardPLC 2000 Controller and UU Chapter 3 tele ce ela ie See echoes
125. Digital Inputs Voltage Supply Connection DO eeeeeeee D eeeeeeee LESIIIIIIIJ Allen Bradley PEN 1500 RS 485 Serial Ports See Page 23 High Speed Counter AAA ELL Analog Inputs RJ 45 Ethernet Ports on Bottom of Controller The GuardPLC 1600 system features 20 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs with the addition of optional distributed Safety I O The GuardPLC 1800 system features 24 digital inputs 8 digital outputs 8 safety related analog inputs and 2 high speed counters as well as optional distributed Safety I O The status of inputs and outputs is indicated via status indicators A user supplied 24V DC power supply is required See page 45 for information on power supply requirements Each controller features four 10 100BaseT RJ 45 connectors to provide safety related communication via the GuardPLC Ethernet network to distributed I O and other GuardPLC controllers OLE for Process Control OPC servers and with RSLogix Guard PLUS programming software The four connectors and the controller are connected via an internal Ethernet switch II The OPC server is not suitable for safety related communication Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Overview of Safety Controllers Chapter 1 Three ports are located on the front of the controller providing these non safety related communication options Serial Port Function Designation COMM Modbus RTU Slave 1753 L28BBBM or 1753 L32BBBM 8A
126. Digital input 13 66 14 Digital input 14 67 15 Digital input 15 68 16 Digital input 16 69 L Reference pole 70 L Reference pole 71 Ground Shield 72 Ground Shield The module has 8 digital output pairs each with a positive and negative switching output The digital outputs are not electrically isolated An output is in the safe state when it is de energized Therefore outputs are switched off when a fault that affects the safety control of those outputs occurs If an overload occurs the affected output is switched off If the total current exceeds 9 A all eight outputs are switched off When the overload is eliminated the outputs are activated again according to their current software driven state Configuration The digital outputs can be configured three ways e 1 pole switch no line monitoring e 2 pole switch with or without line monitoring e 3 pole switch 2 pole with common reference Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16X0B8 Module Chapter 8 1 Pole Connection For 1 pole applications all 8 positive switching and all 8 negative switching outputs are available for a total of 16 outputs If you are using a positive switching output connect the other side of the output to S If you are using a negative switching output connect the other side of the output to S Line monitoring with a 1 pole connection is not p
127. Distributed 1 0 pes POEM BP Ethomet P j i 121 QUT 121 E iE Typelnstance Scanner defines the GuardPLC controller s scanner I O space which consists of two buffers one to store input data and one to store output data The controller s adapter input assembly 120 IN_120 contains data that is produced by the GuardPLC controller The controller s adapter output assembly 121 OUT 121 contains the data that is consumed by the GuardPLC controller You need to know the IP settings for the GuardPLC controller when you configure a device to communicate with it over the EtherNet IP network To view and configure the IP settings for the GuardPLC controller follow these steps 1 Expand the controller in the project tree 2 Right click COM and choose Properties JzJRSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help 3 ts SDProject Configuration Resource GuardPLC 1600 COM Bill x B 44 Configuration CBE 160000 Resource ERR Extended l Key Distributed 1 0 E z E Protocols CeBDEthemeuP Subnet Mask 255 Default eee Lenze 121 Fr ET ypelnstance 3 BIO GuardPLC 1600 2100 8008 OK Cancel Apply Help E a Programming Terminal ES HH Network 1 i MCP Configuration Publication 1753 UM001C E
128. EE 155 Response DIG euh oti ped eb Bea Rs 155 Token Cycle Teo perire ea ON ONE ESO SRE ESS Y 155 Token Alive TMC OU ost S ea ehe res de 156 Primary Timeout o4 522 pe eos Bl RE abide 156 Secondary Interval sss raa ac a Kaw FR EA FAEERE 156 Link Mode xtern e ow ete ESOS PER qp 156 Response Time Extern oaoa era de o eate ded 156 Peer to peer Protocol Parameters llis 157 Message Response Time ReponseTime 157 Receive Timeout ReceiveTMO llis 158 Resend Timeout ResendTMO 5 159 Acknowledge Timeout ACKTMO 159 Queue Length QueueLen iuo ee X e pervRS 159 Production Rate ProdRate 14 od adeo oer ee 160 Watchdog Time CES EE er RE a 160 Worst case Reaction Time CIR 160 HH Network Profiles acs Geek y rS A UN ede e bbs 161 Profile F ste essersi hae le Bate doi ete doas 161 Profile I Medium S LoT een Ge Ra Een a 164 The NORE Profiles eof noe s a hares a Shahn Vie xw pec eia S 167 Peer to Peer Network Profiles 168 Peer to Peer Profile I Fast amp Cleanroom 169 Peer to Peer Profile II Fast amp Noisy 170 Peer to Peer Profile III Medium amp Cleanroom 171 Peer to Peer Profile IV Medium amp Noisy 172 Peer to Peer Profile V Slow amp Cleanroom 173 Peer to Peer Profile IV Slow amp Noisy 174 Chapter 17 HEEN qo Too acoso Binh eG dap eit elt OM ip e 175 Considerations for Using P
129. EG ery Mta pes 113 Controller Modes sus s ue ROE dle Ep Rond 113 Recover From a Failure Stops dva uar ERN 116 Controller Configuration os yo Oo pd ee EN EE EES Ses 117 Routine Modes s meer En Ih ee a 120 Load a Configuration and Routine in Stop Mode only 121 Test Mode of the Routine 4 25 ovr e ql PSU e CR 122 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Diagnostics Peer to peer Communication Overview Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Table of Contents Chapter 14 kat ere re nr err petet dtd qp Oo da Rea dott dp o ua qi NC 123 Resource State T3D c onda ew Een E P RE 124 Safety Parameters Talia fig wat ea a cie boe a se d 125 Statistics EH a sd scere diae edet co ls do aes eed ho 126 P2P Peer to Peer State Tab 4522 bee V Reti 127 Distributed I O Tab du aon up d d eie n CDU e Ron ees 128 HH High level High speed State Tab 128 Environment Data Tab 4 ux a Mote xus ORO XU ok Cx 129 OS EAS eu art aetas e stab d ert aed P eof a sts 129 HSP Protocol TAE 4 qu eu ede he s ee EU S e ode doces 130 EIR Protocol Tas nebat S er E avia ui 131 Use the Multi Control Panel 222g RS 132 Control Panel Resource Men 135 Control Panel Extra Menu 1 ois aG4 24aG4 a 136 Chapter 15 Itt Oel ON Trastero PROCHE Fae oO e Fo A 139 View Controller Diagnostics 0 0000000000000 139 Choose Online or Offline Diagnostics 141 Filtering Diagnostic Data es esc
130. ENT Et P 192 168 1 174 Unrecognized Device 1747 551 C C 9 DC 3 33 mea 192 168 1 180 1753 L2888Bx GPLC 1600 1753 L2888Bx GPLC 1600 mea 192 168 1 181 1753 L2888Bx GPLC 1600 1753 2888Bx GPLC 1600 vd 192 168 1 227 1794 AENT FLEX I O Ethernet Adapter 1794 AENT A Jj 192 168 1 7 Unrecognized Device Ethernet to DeviceNet Gateway d AB ETHIP 3 Ethernet TIP 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 192 168 1 7 1734 AENT 1747 L551 1753 L28BB 1753 L28BB 1794 AENT A Ethernet joo m m g 10 02 05 10 25 PM The controllers will be recognized automatically if they are in the same subnet If the controller type or name is unidentified you must install the correct EDS file EDS files are available on the RSLogix Guard PLUS software CD or at http support rockwellautomation com 253 Chapter20 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Configure Connections in RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP Software Before starting RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software and configuring the GuardPLC controller s scanlist make sure the GuardPLC controller is in the STOP VALID CONFIGURATION state or RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software will generate an error 1 Start RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software 2 To create a new configuration from the File menu choose New EtherNet IP RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP File Edit View Network Device Diagnostics Tools Help Bs c
131. EtherNet IP communication Able to run EtherNet IP communication at the same time as safety rated GuardPLC Ethernet network the GuardPLC controller uses the EtherNet IP network to communicate status about the safety control system to other standard devices such as PLCs ControlLogix FlexLogix CompactLogix SLC 500 or PLC 5 controllers HMIs PanelView PanelView Plus and VersaView terminals and others The GuardPLC controller can even control standard I O like FLEX I O and POINT I O modules on an EtherNet IP network ASCII This read only non safety related protocol can be used to extract diagnostic and status information from the GuardPLC controllers ASCII protocol is available over the RS 232 port on the GuardPLC 1200 and GuardPLC 2000 controllers and via the RS 485 Comm 3 port on GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers See Chapter 21 for details on communication with ASCII devices Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Overview of Safety Controllers Chapter 1 High speed Safety Protocol GuardPLC 1600 and 1800 controllers support High speed Safety Protocol CHSP which allows them to connect to the DeviceNet safety network via the 1753 DNSI DeviceNet Safety Scanner Refer to the DeviceNet Safety Scanner for GuardPLC Controllers User Manual publication 1753 UM002 for more information Modbus RTU Slave Modbus is a standard industrial non safety related serial protoco
132. Gs nix Help Inputs Outputs iName r ReosiveTineou uont 1 Response Time UONT i Ves womb These system signals can be used as inputs for the application e Connection State Using the Connection State system signal of the Peer to Peer Editor the user program can evaluate the status of the communication between two controllers This table shows the possible values for the Connection State system signal and the corresponding status Value Status Description 0 CLOSED Communication path is closed No attempt to connect 1 TRY_OPEN Communication path is closed Attempt to connect 2 CONNECTED Communication path is open No attempt to connect e Receive Timeout in milliseconds is set by the user For more information see Receive Timeout ReceiveTMO on page 158 and Define Peer to peer Parameters on page 186 e Response Time in milliseconds is the actual value of the last answer message and is identical to RspT last in the P2P status of the Control Panel For more information see Reconfigure ResponseTime on page 195 e Version indicates the CRC for the peer to peer configuration between two controllers The CRC must be identical to establish communication Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 181 Chapter 17 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Output System Signal Using the output system Connection Control signal the user program can c
133. GuardPLC Controller Systems Allen Bradley Bulletin 1753 1754 1755 User Manual oo orbe e Re Rockwell Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software
134. If the ReceiveTMO 2 2 x ResponseTime minimum the loss of at least one message can be handled without losing the Peer to Peer connection Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Peer to peer Communication Overview Chapter 16 If the Receive TMO is not 2 2 x ResponseTime minimum the availability of the Peer to Peer connection is guaranteed only in a collision and noise free network However this does not result in a safety problem for the CPU The maximum permissible value for ReceiveT MO depends upon TIP oe i i the application and is set in the Peer to Peer Editor along with the expected maximum ResponseTime and the profile Profile Response Time Receive TMO Fast amp Cleanroom Fast amp Cleanroom Resend Timeout ResendTMO Resend Timeout is the safety related monitoring time of PES If the receipt of a data transmission is not confirmed by PES within this time period ResendTMO PES repeats the data transmission Acknowledge Timeout ACKTMO Reception of data must be confirmed by the CPU with an ACK acknowledge message to the sender of the data If the CPU is busy ACK is delayed Acknowledge Timeout is the maximum delay an ACK message may have The AckTMO cannot be entered manually but is set in conjunction with a profile in the Peer to Peer Editor For fast networks AckTMO is zero Queue Length QueueLen QueueLen describes the number of
135. Input is low e Output is de energized While the system is in Run mode ERR is indicated continuously for both a module and a channel error Depending on the type of error the module switches off only a faulty output channel but the operation of the other outputs continues or all the output channels are switched off The inputs are always in operation A faulty input channel transmits Low signal to the logic If the entire module is switched off all input and output channels are switched off The 1755 IF8 analog input module CAB AD has status indicators for e power supply e module status Indicator Status Description RUN ON green The module has the correct operating voltage 24V DC OFF The module has no power ERR ON red If the system is in Stop mode one or more of the inputs or outputs is faulty or the module is faulty Use the RSLogix Guard PLUS software to verify the location of the fault If the module is faulty replace the module immediately or the safety related operation of the GuardPLC 2000 controller is not maintained OFF The module is operational While the system is in Run mode ERR is indicated continuously for both a module and a input channel error Depending on the type of error the module may switch off only one input channel that is a faulty channel transmits the value 0 to the logic but the module continues operation with the remaining channels If the entire modu
136. L UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity SC 131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A B amp C Tick Australian Radiocommunication Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Certified by TUV 1 The power supply can supply up to 30 A for 1 0 modules Use an appropriate fuse for your system s power requirements 303 AppendixA Specifications Notes 304 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Appendix B System Signal Variables Introduction Topic Page Programming Controller Data 305 1 0 Variables 307 Programming Controller The controller supports system variables that you can configure Data The system variables are defined as e SAFE the controller can use this information in safety related functions NON SAFE additional information that safety functions must not rely on These are the system variables System Variable Unit Value Read Write Description Contact Assembly 1 true Write On true the contact closes on false the contact does not close Contact Assembly 2 false Only available for a GuardPLC 2000 controller Contact Assembly 3 BOOL Contact Assembly 4 NON SAFE Cooling Fan State 0 1 2 Read 0
137. Logix Guard PLUS software and the I O controller tags in RSLogix 5000 software to test the connection between the GuardPLC controller and the Logix controller Under normal operating conditions the GuardPLC application program will change and update the data being read and update the data being read by the Logix controller By using the Force Editor you can force changes to the input assembly and see this change reflected in the Logix tag In the example below the Force Editor is configured to display Signal 120 xxxx and Signal 121 xxxx Signal 120 xxxx is set in RSLogix Guard PLUS software and the data is received in the GPLC Exclusive Owner ILData tag in RSLogix 5000 software Likewise after GPLC Exclusive Owner O Data is modified in RSLogix 5000 software the changes are visible in the Signal 121 xxxx signals in RSLogix Guard PLUS software Note that the first four bytes in the GuardPLC controller s output assembly Signal 121 0001 to Signal 121 0004 are the Run Idle header received by the Logix controller E Force Editor Resource iel Re source View Options Help Start Stop Takeover Configure Send Export Import Append Resource Resource Forcing activated Force Time 5000 sec Scope Demo Confia cor E Show Show All v Sot Tas Name EI Tag Name 3 Value Force Mask Style Type Forcing allowed Remaining Force Time 4445 sec WiiteBuf
138. M002 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Introduction Chapter 4 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers Topic Page Power Supply Connections 49 Safety related Digital Inputs 50 Safety related Digital Outputs 51 Safety related Analog Inputs 51 High speed Counters 52 Wire the GuardPLC 1600 Controller 53 Wire the GuardPLC 1800 Controller 54 Wire the GuardPLC 1200 Controller 58 Power Supply Connections Power supply connections for GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 controllers are described in the following sections Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 Controllers Before connecting the power supply check for correct polarity ATTENTION value and ripple A Do not reverse the L and L terminals or damage to the controller will result There is no reverse polarity protection The supply voltage is connected via a 4 pin connector that accommodates wire sizes up to 2 5 mm 14 AWG You only need to connect one wire to L and one wire to L Both L and L terminals are internally connected The other terminal can be used to daisy chain 24V DC to additional devices The power supply connector is rated to 10 A 49 Chapter4 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers E Safety related Digital Inputs 50 GuardPLC 1200 Controller Both L and L terminals must be used in pa
139. MPORTANT Unused channels must be short circuited See page 63 All reference poles I are internally connected Terminal Number Designation Function 1 11 Analog input 1 2 Reference pole for input 1 5h 3 12 Analog input 2 Go 4 Reference pole for input 2 4 l 5 13 Analog input 3 s E 6 Reference pole for input 3 4 e 7 HI Analog input 4 9 8 Reference pole for input 4 9 shield connection signal ground 10 15 1 Analog input 5 11 Reference pole for input 5 12 16 2 Analog input 6 13 Reference pole for input 6 14 17 3 Analog input 7 15 Reference pole for input 7 16 18 4 Analog input 8 17 Reference pole for input 8 18 shield connection signal ground This module features 8 analog outputs Devices cannot be powered from the 1755 OF8 module An external power supply is required for all analog output devices Wire the 1755 0F8 Analog Output Module 66 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire the GuardPLC 2000 Controller and 0 Chapter 5 There are 4 reference poles for the 8 outputs A pair of outputs share a reference pole as shown below These outputs Share these Reference Poles 1 and 2 01 and 02 3and 4 03 and 04 5and 6 05 and 06 7 and 8 07 and 08 IMPORTANT Each group of 2 outputs is electrically isolated from the others IMPORTANT If an unused c
140. MUX faulty 0x0100 MEZ test walking bit of data bus faulty 0x0200 MEZ test multiplexer addresses faulty 0x0400 MEZ test operating voltages faulty 0x0800 MEZ test measuring system characteristic faulty unipolar 0x1000 MEZ test measuring system final values zero point faulty unipolar 0x8000 A D conversion faulty DRDY HIGH 323 AppendixB System Signal Variables 1 0 Data Read Write Description Allxx Error Code Read Error code of analog input channels 0x01 Error in the analog input module 0x02 Limit value underflow overflow 0x04 A D converter faulty measuring values not valid 0x08 Measured value not within safety accuracy 0x10 Measured value overflow 0x20 Channel not in operation 0x40 Address error of both A D converters Al xx Value Read Analog value of each channel INT from 0 2000 0V 10V The validity depends on the Al xx Error Code Al xx Used Write Configures the channel for operation 0 Channel is not in operation 1 Channel is operating Al xx Transmitter Used Write Configures the channel for transmitter supply 0 Transmitter supply is not used 1 Transmitter supply is used Transmitter Voltage 01 Write Configures switchover of the transmitter supply per group 1 8 2V 2 26 0V Transmitter Error Code Read Error codes of the transmitter unit 0x0001 Error in the transmitter supply 0x0400 FTZ test 1 temperatu
141. N P March 2010 Parameter IP address Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Chapter 18 Description The IP address uniquely identifies the module The IP address is in the form XXX XXX XXX XXX where each xxx is a number between 0 255 These are reserved values you cannot use e 127 0 0 1 e 0 0 0 0 e 255 255 255 255 subnet mask Subnet addressing is an extension of the IP address scheme that allows a site to use a single network ID for multiple physical networks Routing outside of the site continues by dividing the IP address into a net ID and a host ID via the class Inside a site the subnet mask is used to redivide the IP address into a custom network ID portion and host ID portion This field is set to 0 0 0 0 by default If you change the subnet mask of an already configured module you must cycle power to the module for the change to take effect gateway Configuring Communication Between the Controller and a PanelView PLUS Terminal Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 A gateway connects individual physical networks into a system of networks When a node needs to communicate with a node on another network a gateway transfers the data between the two networks This field is set to 0 0 0 0 by default For more information on the EtherNet IP network refer to these publications from Rockwell Automation e EtherNet IP Performance Application Solution publication ENET APO01 e EtherNet IP Modul
142. Net IP Communication Overview 199 GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 199 GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner qoo RESP RS 201 Data LIMItS ror 202 Software Required to Configure EtherNet IP COMMUNICA 5v Vo a RCUS Febr er Bee SIE Cae E ed 203 Add EtherNet IP Protocol to the Resource 203 View the Controller IP Settings 204 Configuring Communication Between the Controller and a PanelView PLUS Terminal aaan BOs ee oR Tee 205 Set Up FactoryTalk View Studio Machine Edition te ne i BS pate EE Baga dabei deg ke 206 Add Ethernet IP Protocol to Your Project 208 Read Integers from the Controller and Display Them on the PanelView Plus Terminal y suu oa wk ot 209 Read BOOLs from the GuardPLC Controller and Display Them on the PanelView Plus Terminal 210 Writing Integers to the GuardPLC Controller from the PanelView Plus Terminal ut iore ka hee woe ee x 212 Writing BOOLs to the GuardPLC Controller from the Panel View Plus Terminal 24e need pe ette Eb RR 215 11 Table of Contents Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Chapter 19 TAG OCMC Gi iawn Uh CM NR RUBORE CST AR DR 215 Configure the GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 215 Configure the Adapter Input Assembly 215 Configure the Adapter Output Assembly 216 Connect Signals to the Adapter Assemblies 217 Open a Class 1 Connection from a Logix Con
143. OOJOOD Do OOOO D0 0000 L 1 294 8 S L1234L L 5678 L See the wire size and terminal torques specifications on page 290 Digital outputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Designation Function Number 4 4 Negative switching digital output 4 for increased load or bi polar output 5 8 Negative switching digital output 8 for increased load or bi polar output 6 S Reference pole for negative switching outputs short circuit protection 7 L Reference pole for positive switching outputs 8 1 Digital output 1 9 2 Digital output 2 10 3 Digital output 3 11 4 Digital output 4 for increased load or bi polar output 12 L Reference pole for positive switching outputs 13 L Reference pole for positive switching outputs 14 5 Digital output 5 15 6 Digital output 6 16 7 Digital output 7 17 8 Digital output 8 for increased load or bi polar output 18 L Reference pole for positive switching outputs For connection of a load the reference pole L of the channel group must be used Although L at terminals 7 and 12 and at terminals 13 and 18 are connected internally to L on the power supply input it is strictly recommended to use 7 and 12 for outputs 1 4 only and 13 and 18 for outputs 5 8 only EMC testing was performed in this manner 80 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Pulse Test Sources Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire and C
144. P March 2010 135 Chapter 14 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Control Panel Extra Menu Use the Extra menu of the Control Panel to modify communication Menu Item Set Date Time settings and change controller operation You must have Administrator access to use most of these menu options as indicated in the table below Control Panel GPLC1600_1 j PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help S gt m wf o Set Date Time Resource State Safety Parameters Stat Change System ID Device Settings Update OS Reboot Resource Date Time 03 03 2004 16 10 06 Load Resource Configuration from Flash Clear Resource Configuration Set Backplane Type Description Sets the controller clock if Set Main Enable is activated Enter the date as mm dd yy and the time as hh mm Change System ID SRS Changes the system ID SRS of the controller You must have Administrator access to be able to change the system ID SRS Device Settings Changes the Ethernet network parameters You must have Administrator access and the controller must be in STOP mode Update OS Lets you download new COM OS and CPU OS Reboot Resource Reboots the controller See Recover From a Failure Stop on page 116 Load Resource Configuration from Flash Loads a copy of the last executable configuration to the controller Clear Resource Configuration Dele
145. PCCC messages 236 351 Index 352 S Safe States inputs 21 outputs 21 safety concept 19 scanlist configuration 254 259 scanner connect to Logix controller 260 261 disable function 251 input buffer 249 output buffer 249 remove connection configuration 263 save connection configuration 262 scanner signals connect 250 secondary controller 156 secondary interval 156 serial port 268 signals ASCII 269 counter data 312 UO data 307 Modbus 277 Profibus DP 280 system variables 305 SLC 5 05 controllers PCCC messaging 235 243 related publications 236 software version PanelBuilder32 243 RSLogix Guard PLUS 203 RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP 203 status indicators See diagnostics subnet mask 205 switches 119 system variables 305 T terminals 1755 HSC 68 token alive timeout 156 token cycle time 155 token group configuring 179 creating 178 definition 161 ID 154 179 U Unconnected adapter 235 V variables system 305 W watchdog time 160 reconfiguring 192 worst case reaction time definition 160 variables 160 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and applicationnotes samplecodeandlinkstosoftwareservice packs andaMySupportfeaturethatyoucancustomizeto
146. Profibus DP device 279 Profibus DP signals 280 scanner signals 250 signals to adapter assemblies 217 connection control system tag 182 connection state system tag 181 control panel 123 controllers configuring 117 control panel 123 GuardPLC 1200 status indicators 142 GuardPLC 1600 status indicators 143 GuardPLC 1800 status indicators 143 GuardPLC 2000 status indicators 145 modes 113 serial port 268 switches 119 system variables 305 counter configuration 109 counter mode inputs 108 counter modes 107 counters data 312 gray code 111 with direction and reset 110 with manual direction 109 349 Index 350 D data initialization 217 data types 273 decoder mode 111 inputs 108 DeviceNet Safety Scanner for GuardPLC See 1753 DNSI diagnostics 1755 HSC status indicators 149 1755 IF8 status indicators 148 1755 OF8 status indicators 149 controller 139 distributed 1 0 143 filtering 141 GuardPLC 1200 status indicators 142 GuardPLC 1600 status indicators 143 GuardPLC 1800 status indicators 143 GuardPLC 2000 status indicators 145 viewing 139 digital data 307 driver types 237 252 E EDS files 253 Ethernet see GuardPLC Ethernet EtherNet IP add to project 203 configure a driver 237 configure driver 252 overview 28 199 related publications 205 required software 203 exclusive owner connection 221 257 Faults response 20 filtering diagnostic data 141 G gateway 205 gray code 111 GSD file 282 GuardPLC 1200
147. QUT 123 f F Typelnstance Total size 4 bytes s i GuardPLC 1800 A E Programming Terminal A n x MEP Configuration New Signal Delete Signal reem EE dummyl Bool 2 dummy2 BOL a fromGuard BO bont 4 fromGuard BOOL2 boot 5 femGusd INTI It m fromGuard_INT2 JINT toGuard_BOOL1 41 20 2007 10 40 01 047 Inf Resource Offre 11 20 2007 10 57 56 744 Info Configuration 60000 Resource Protocols Ethemet IP 124 IN 124 deleted These momentary pushbutton objects write the two integers to the GuardPLC controller Tags N123 0 and N123 1 were used to match the output assembly used in the GuardPLC controller The GuardPLC controller does not use the N it is required for FactoryTalk View software r Graphic GuardPLC CPR9test Display EIS BOOL write N123 0 BOOL write N123 1 N123 0 corresponds to the first two BOOL tags in the GuardPLC assembly 123 The first tag changes between 0 and 1 the second is the dummy tag N123 1 corresponds to the next two BOOL tags in the GuardPLC assembly 123 Momentary Push Button Properties General States Common Connections T BuardPLECT800N123 1 een Cancel Apply Help Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 19 Introduction Configure the GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter
148. RS 485 Profibus DP Slave 1753 L28BBBP or 1753 L32BBBP 8A Read Write COMM not used COMM3 GuardPLC ASCII Protocol Read only High Speed Safety Protocol HSP RS 485 The COMMS RS 485 also supports High Speed Safety Protocol HSP for high integrity communication with the 1753 DNSI DeviceNet Safety Scanner Refer to the DeviceNet Safety Scanner for GuardPLC Controllers User Manual publication 1753 UM002 for more information GuardPLC Distributed 1 0 The following modules are available for use with the GuardPLC 1600 controllers GuardPLC 1800 controllers and series C GuardPLC 1200 controllers and with series C GuardPLC 2000 CPUs Module status is Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 indicated via status indicators Cat No Description Inputs Outputs 1753 IB16 Input Module 16 digital not isolated NA 4 pulse test sources 1753 0B16 Output Module NA 16 digital not isolated 1753 IB20XOB8 Input Output 20 digital not isolated 8 digital not isolated Module 1753 IB8XOB8 Input Output 8 digital not isolated 8 positive switching digital Module 2 pulse test sources 2 negative switching digital not isolated 1753 IB16XOB8 Input Output 16 digital not isolated 8 two pole digital Module 2 pulse test sources not isolated 1753 OW8 Relay Output NA 8 relay Module 1753 IF8XOF4 Analog 8 analog 4 standard analog Input Output Module 23 Chapter 1 Overview of Safety Con
149. Range as an input for the logic of Robot B OutRange is sent over the Ethernet 182 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Chapter 17 network via Peer to Peer from Robot A to Robot B which uses it as an input Design Logic for Robot A 2 Type Routine unchanged FT int UlI Gray Code TM Cnt 01 Halt TP mou i PT m P ua 3elect AB H Jm ap ami GrayValue Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 183 Chapter 17 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Configure Peer to peer As discussed in the following sections you configure peer to peer Communication communication by e defining controller connections e assigning the HH Network choosing a peer to peer profile e defining peer to peer parameters e defining process signals for exchange Define Controller Connections To define all of the controllers each controller can communicate with follow these steps 1 Right click the resource you want to define controller connections for and choose Peer to Peer Editor The title bar of the Peer to Peer Editor shows the name of the selected controller When the Peer to Peer Editor is opened for the first time it does not contain any entries In the project tree click a resource and drag and drop it in the Peer to Peer Editor Repeat step 2 to add more controller connections In the example below RobotA title bar has
150. Resource State a Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distibuted 170 HH State Environment Data os IP Settings State Rs R Rd Rd M Ad D Opens fResends NiadMsas EarlyMsas ReceiveTMO ms EE E INN NEN Pt eT NN Control Panel RobotB ResendTMO rr PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help S y go Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Dinibutoa 0 HH State Environment Data os IP Settings Recs ses sae Re E E Wo ope eu et Ets ced EE NON RS NR RUN 8 Enter the remaining noted value for RspT either avg or max in the ResponseTime of the Peer to Peer Editor Ej Peer to Peer Editor RobotA Delete Peer to Peer Connection Connect Process Signals Connect System Signals HH Network Configuration Help dk Less Tine ins Bez ms ResendTMO ms AckTMO ms ProdRate ms Queue C 0 peeeertway fo wo fio i 196 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Chapter 17 Reconfigure Receive Timeout 1 Set the new ReceiveTMO to 2 x ResponseTime 2 The Worst Case Reaction Time is optimized and displayed in the Peer to Peer Editor see above 3 Compile the project 4 Download the routines in the controllers again 5 Start and test your application Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 197 Chapter 17 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Notes 198 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P
151. S ie hai ea dre owe eA WD 95 Safety related Analog Inputs 0 0 0 0 0 00005 95 Voltage Measurement au Zeie ser audet matcr eoe ai 95 Current Measurement Ad dodo der dq C UD EE SAC Cd 95 Terminal GomJeclons s sos 4 422 RV ees 23224 96 Standard Analog Outputs 0 0 000 000 eee eae 97 Terminal Connections ars m el ons ae Ee o ac 98 Chapter 10 THROU OM ener org dee ACE ESAE AURORA 99 Safety related Relay Outputs llle 99 Terminal Connectors 2929 2 px qo RUE Home e moe aS 99 Example Connecting Actuators to the Outputs 100 Voltage Supply Considerations edo xsv RI ae Ses 100 Chapter 11 Io OCHO ee sod One Qo Rubeo pite OR nal a ded 101 Response to OS Configurable Faults 102 Wire for OS Configurable Line Control 103 GuardPLC 1600 Controller and 1753 IB20XOB8 WOOGIE s vf ahs welt hee tee tas and ae eh d o Ap E19 hee eet E 103 1753 IB16 1753 IB8XOB8 and 1753 IB16XOB8 EE EH 104 Input Configuration for Pulse Testing 105 Chapter 12 Introduction ss ois s art ee RC ao Re ok a P 107 Counter Decoder Modes uan dre X NO COE ORE Dd 107 Counter MOIderu sur sits fr oobis ane S ett ute t ed 107 Decoder Mod s isa nud acd asp Sci d xpi qe qot 108 Understand Counter Module Configuration 109 Counter Mode Manual Direction 109 Counter Mode Direction and Reset 110 Decoder Mode Gray Godes o2 eoe rive Res 111 Chapter 13 EEN
152. Sess 45 Prevent Electrostatic Discharge 12 22 ee bd awed Rd 45 Power Supply Considerations 45 Ground the Equipment 2 234 apnd eb tac RE ae acd 46 Considerations for Grounding All Controllers 46 GuardPLC 1200 Controller 066 i e demere 46 GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 Controllers and Distrib ted VO Suit Ee ded CUPS Dea SLO EES ex 47 GuardPLC 2000 a8818 5 ates op y Eb C o sh d 47 Terminal CoD GUDESa 02 amies o Re Eo e PU ede 47 Shield contact Plate Connections So pude a vae xS 48 Detailed Wiring Information Ae es os were EN WES 48 Chapter 4 e ENEE 49 Power Supply Connections 3 402 2 qur pe De nea seta ook 49 GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 Controllers 49 GuardPLG 1200 Controller sss be dme eme 50 Safety related Digital Inputs 00 0000 50 Safety related Digital Outputs Laser Voted kae RPS 51 Satety telated Analog Inputs 3 5 oix B5 esee baw REY 51 High speed COMME S qd aceetens e pint ue P cae DP ded 52 Wire the GuardPLC 1600 Conproller aaa 53 Safety related Digital Input Terminals 53 Safety related Digital Output Terminals 54 Wire the GuardPLC 1800 Controller nananana aaa 54 Safety related Digital Input Terminals 55 Safety related Digital Output Terminals 56 Safety related Analog Input Terminals 56 Safety related High speed Counter Terminals 58 Wire the GuardPLC 1200 Controller 252 917 332
153. State Status of the communication RspT elt Link Mode is TCS direct Token Passing OFF RspT is the ResponseTime of the HH profile for a message from PES PES gt PES based on the network hardware and topology This parameter cannot be changed by the user elt Link Mode is TCS TOKCYC Token Passing ON RspT is part of the Bus Cycle Time Link Mode e TCS direct when Token Passing is OFF e TCS TOKCYC when Token Passing is ON Token Group ID ID of the Token Group Read the RspT min parameter This is the minimum time needed for the communication modules COM of two controllers to talk to each other Refresh RspT values with Communication gt Update HH State if Token Passing is OFF 193 Chapter 17 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Control Panel Robot1 Check Peer to peer Status In the Control Panel click the P2P Status tab sl DS PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help WE gt ms o Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distibuted 1 0 HH State Environment Data os IP Settings Susemfacl State nap esl spl av Repl ein eset mod Nego AckMegNo Datoseq Qnens Resend Badhsq Eat Bee Reser AckT WO te ee pens mos owed m wo 5 Parameter 19 sesso sess sasso 1 o o o so 100 o puoO0020j16H000020e3 The P2P Status displays the following information Description Resource Name of the controller Syst
154. Zone A B amp C C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Attribute Controller User memory max Certified by T V 1753 L32BBBM 8A and 1753 L32BBBP 8A 250 KB user program memory 250 KB application data memory Watchdog time min 10 ms Safety time min 20 ms Current consumption 9 A max with max load 0 75 A idle current just running the controller Operating voltage 24V DC 1596 2096 Wa lt 15 from a power supply with protective separation conforming to IEC 61131 2 requirements Protection Digital Inputs Number of inputs IP 20 24 not electrically isolated Voltage on state 15V 30V DC Current consumption 3 5 mA Q 24V DC on state approx 4 5 mA Q 30V DC Voltage off state max 5V DC Current consumption off state max 1 5 mA 1 mA 5V DC Input resistance lt 7kQ Overvoltage protection 10V 35V Line length max 300 m 984 ft Supply 20V 100 mA short circuit proof Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Attribute Digital Outputs Number of outputs Specifications Appendix A 1753 L32BBBM 8A and 1753 L32BBBP 8A 8 not electrically isolated Output voltage range 2 L minus 2V Output current Channels 1 3 and 5 7 0 5 A 60 C 140 F Channels 4 and 8 1 A
155. a PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controller 1 Create a GuardPLC adapter Assembly Instance input or output including the data type assembly size and assembly name See pages 215 and 216 TIP Make sure the Run Idle header box is unchecked as PCCC messages do not use a Run Idle header 2 Configure an EtherNet IP driver for the PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controller by using RSLinx software 3 Add a MSG instruction to the PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 application program logic 4 Save and download your application These steps are described in more detail beginning on page 237 For detailed information on the MSG Instruction refer to these publications e PLC 5 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1785 6 1 e SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1747 RMOOI Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Configure an EtherNet IP Driver Chapter 19 If you are going to program the PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controller via the EtherNet IP network you must configure an EtherNet IP driver in RSLinx software to allow your PC to communicate with the PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controller 1 Start RSLinx software 2 Click the Configure Drivers button S 3 From the Available Driver Types pull down menu choose the Ethernet IP Driver 4 Click Add New 5 Enter a name for the new driver and click OK Configure Drivers Avai
156. a pde Sa eek 141 GuardPLC 1200 Controller Status Indicators 142 GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 Controllers and GuardPLC Distributed 1 6905 pe ea m ra a o men CEU 143 System Status Indicators sed oy mea COE eg Red 143 Communication Status Indicators 00 144 GuardPLC 2000 Controller Status Indicators 145 Controller Indicators ad iua oer s vr dabas c 145 Routine Indicators v 734 0 chide a De eek 146 Ethernet Communication Indicators 146 Serial Communication Indicators 147 1755 IB24XOB16 Module Status Indicators 147 Power Supply and Module Status 147 TO Stats ig ee diet ky wn cde To ee o e ia e d 148 1755 IF8 Analog Input Module Status Indicators 148 1755 OF8 Analog Output Module Status Indicators 149 1755 HSC Combination High speed Counter and Output Module Status TRO dt ak e SER ef ebe 149 Power Supply and Module Status 150 OR CREER UEM TEMERE S SO T PPM D 150 Chapter 16 TEE EOGOIDICUCH o eoo de ta dc doo Me o Ct DEA D ONSE eee 151 Peer to peer Communication Basics 151 Networking Limitations s 2 5 dr tr Od Se OES HERS 152 Table of Contents Configure Peer to Peer Communication Network Configuration una dope ary Y beg uere dor eres 153 HH Protocol Parameters n eh ars qe oe ce rao whe A ek 153 Token Group ID er qd bd dee oe ah ee ea ad 154 Protocol Mode 2 5923993389 ReLESY ESSA Rs 154 ENK pO
157. able Controllers Clause 8 Zone A B amp C C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Certified by TUV 289 AppendixA Specifications Attribute General GuardPLC Ethernet interfaces 1753 Combination UO Modules 1753 IB8X0B8 1753 IB16X0B8 1753 IB20X0B8 2 x RJ 45 10 100BaseT with 100 Mbps with integrated switch Operating voltage 24V DC 15 42096 Wee 15 from a power supply with protective separation conforming to IEC 61131 2 requirements Response time gt 10ms Battery backup none Current consumption 8 A max with max load idle 10 A max with max load idle 8 A max with max load idle current 0 4 A 24V current 0 4 A 24V current 0 4 A 24V Wiring category category 2 on communication ports signal ports and power ports Wire size 1 0 1 5 mm 16 AWG 0 14 mm 26 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 75 C 167 F or greater with 3 64 inch 1 2 mm insulation max Power 2 5 mm 14 AWG 0 34 mm 22 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 75 C 167 F or greater with 3 64 inch 1 2 mm insulation max Terminal block torque Digital Inputs Number of inputs 0 51 Nm 4 5 in Ib 8 not electrically isolated 16 not electrically isolated 20 not electrically isolated 1 Signal Voltage 15V 30V DC Current consumption 2 2 mA
158. able TIMER CONN DN Fees SR Type CIP Generic N Message Control MSG READ hD R2 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 Configure the message parameters as follows Message Configuration Mat READ Configuration Communication Tag Message Type z Service Ger Attribute Single e 90 z Type Cod Class j4 Hes Destination ReadBuffer Instance 120 Attribute 3 Hex New Tag Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 0 Error Code Extended Error Code Timed Out Error Path Error Text Cancel Ap Help a Set Service Type to Get Attribute Single b Set Class to 4 assembly c Set Instance to 120 This is the assembly instance number that will be read from d Set Attribute to 3 assembly data e Set Destination to ReadBuffer 5 Switch to the Communication tab and enter this text in the Path field ENBT 2 lt GuardPLC IP address gt Here 2 is the EtherNet IP port of the 1756 ENBT module Message Configuration Mat READ Configuration Communication Tag Path ENBT 2 192 168 1 180 Browse ENBT 2 192 168 1 180 Iw Connected M Cache Connections Enable Enable Waiting Start D Done Done Length 0 Error Code Extended Error Code Timed Out Error Path Error Text Cancel Apply Help Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 231 Chapter 19
159. act 1 terminal A 2 Contact 1 terminal B 3 D02 Contact 2 terminal A 4 Contact 2 terminal B 5 D03 Contact 3 terminal A 6 Contact 3 terminal B 99 Chapter 10 Wire the 1753 OW8 Relay Output Module Terminal Number Designation Relay Output 7 D04 Contact 4 terminal A 8 Contact 4 terminal B 9 D05 Contact 5 terminal A 10 Contact 5 terminal B 11 DO6 Contact 6 terminal A 12 Contact 6 terminal B 13 D07 Contact 7 terminal A 14 Contact 7 terminal B 15 D08 Contact 8 terminal A 16 Contact 8 terminal B The output contacts are connected in pairs via terminal connectors numbered terminals The terminal pins on the front plate of the module have the same numbering sequence to help prevent miswiring Example Connecting Actuators to the Outputs v N Voltage Supply For the connection of higher voltages 110 220V AC besides SELV H and PELV 24V DC suitable cables must be used with double or Considerations reinforced insulation 100 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Introduction Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 11 Pulse Testing Topic Page Response to OS Configurable Faults 102 Wire for OS Configurable Line Control 103 Input Configuration for Pulse Testing 105 Pulse testing is a high frequency diagnostic test that can detect wiring faults on input devices before demand is placed on the safety system There are two w
160. ags which are used for read and write messages Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 229 Chapter 19 230 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 5 Add a ReadBuffer tag with type DINT 3 and a WriteBuffer tag with type SINTI4 These types correspond directly to the signal types of the GuardPLC adapter assemblies When explicit CIP messaging is used to read and write assemblies the tag being written to or read from must be of the same or larger size than the assembly size in the GuardPLC controller The tag types should match the signal types associated with the target assembly in RSLogix Guard PLUS software For more information on programming Logix controllers refer to the Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual publication _1756 PM001 Create Ladder Logic 1 Switch to the Main Routine window in RSLogix 5000 software 2 Build the first rung containing the following instructions e Examine On Enable tag to start the connected messaging e Examine Off TIMER_CONN DN e A timer instruction with the control tag TIMER_CONN and a preset of 100 This is the rate at which Class 3 messages are sent by the Logix controller Enable TIMER CONN DN TON x Timer On Delay N Timer TIMER CONN N5 Preset 100 Accum 9 3 Build the second run containing the following instructions e Examine On Enable tag e Examine On TIMER CONN DN e Message instruction with the control tag Mac READ En
161. al Exp gt Enter gt Enter Handshake Cancel Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Writing BOOLs to the GuardPLC Controller from the PanelView Plus Terminal This example uses output assembly 123 Two BOOLs are written by the PanelView Plus terminal to the controller Four BOOL tags toGuard_BOOL1 and toGuard_BOOL2 and two dummy tags were used in the controller as shown on the following page TIP The dummy tags are required because BOOL extensions cannot be used on the write tags within the PanelView Plus termina INT tags must be used on the terminal side Because an integer is 2 bytes a dummy is needed to fill this space in the controllers buffer A BOOL tag takes up a complete byte in the GuardPLC controller s buffer 213 Chapter 18 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Momentary Push Button Properties General States Common Connections Nam Tag Espesson Tag Expin Nam Tag Espesson Tag Exp C GusrdPLCT800NT22 07 ii V O pen 214 IZ RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help E PYplus A Configuration E Signal Connections Configuration 6 jojx New Signal Delete Signal New Offsets Help Distributed 1 0 Pus T Protocols HPEthemet IP ee EE GA Scanner ENT BOOL i120 IN 120 2 teen bot dummy amp 8 121 QUT 121 a t2 bo toGuard BOOL2 i122 IN 122 123
162. ambient temperature 60 C 140 F 2 A at an ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F The negative switching outputs DO4 and DO8 can supply up to 1 A at the maximum ambient temperature of 60 C 140 F 2 A at an ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F With an overload one or all of the outputs are turned off When the overload is eliminated the outputs are activated again Signals for Output Configuration Set up these signals for 1753 IBBXOBS8 modules by using the Outputs tab of the digital outputs Signal Connections dialog box in RSLogix Guard PLUS software L Switching L Switching Description Notes DO1 xx Value DO2 xx Value Output value for digital output channels output is set outputs 1 to 8 outputs 4 and 8 0 output is not set no current DO2 xx 2 pole Configures the channel for 2 pole 1 channel DO2 01 4 is used for 2 pole operation operation with channel DO1 04 or channel DO2 02 8 is used for 2 pole operation with channel DO1 08 0 channel DO2 xx is not used for 2 pole operation Switch on delay Sets switch on delay for 2 pole tests due to lamp load inductive and capacitive load See Appendix B for a complete list of 1753 IB8XOB8 variables Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 79 Chapter 7 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB8X0B8 Module Terminal Connections 1 2 374 5 6 7 8 9 101112 13 14 15 16 17 18 12 3 456 7 8 91117 13141516 1 18 PO
163. amming Termina Twisted Pair Cable max 100 m Fiber Optic Cable LL V LH KA Buffer Amp Backbone 100 Mbps LAN Switch Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 GuardPLC 2000 Controller GuardPLC 1200 Controller Token Group 2 Chapter 16 GuardPLC 1600 Controllers with Integrated Ethernet Switch DOUCE Integrated Etherne GuardPLC 1800 Controller with oot Token Group 3 Switch GuardPLC GuardPL GuardPLC 1200 Contro controller mm um e Bader cH GuardPLC 1800 Controller with Integrated Fthernet Switch GuardPLC 1600 Controller with Integrated Ethernet Switch 163 Chapter 16 164 Peer to peer Communication Overview Profile Il Medium This profile provides medium speed data throughput and covers approximately 4 of all application cases It is appropriate for applications where timing is not a critical factor With the Medium profile network media access within a token group and communication with external token groups is controlled by token passing These external token groups must also run Medium profiles IMPORTANT In the Medium profile a token group must be co
164. and write data to the output assembly Unconnected Adapter Using the GuardPLC controller as an unconnected adapter is similar to using it as a Class 3 adapter In both cases an explicit message is sent from the client to the GuardPLC controller addressing one of the built in objects including Identity Assembly PCCC Connection Configuration Port TCP IP and Ethernet Link In the case of an unconnected adapter the message is not sent over a connection but is sent as a single independent request Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Chapter 18 GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner The scanner data memory is divided into input and output buffers of assemblies The input area is used for signals received from the target consumed data The output area is used for signals transmitted to the target produced signals Each I O assembly must have a corresponding signal connection Signal connections are configured by using RSLogix Guard PLUS software The scanner data memory is configured via a scanlist by using RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software To enable the GuardPLC controller to scan I O set up the controller as a scanner See Chapter 20 for information on using the GuardPLC controller as a scanner FLEX 1 0 POINT 1 0 ControlLogix or CompactLogix Controllers Produced Signals Consumed Signals 100 101
165. annel Current per group max 8 A per group max 16 A per module admissible total current Lamp load max 10 W for output 1 AJ 25 W for output 2 A Inductive load max 500 mH Internal voltage drop 2V 92A max Leakage current max 1 mA Q 2V with 0 signal Response to overload Environmental Conditi Temperature operating shut down of concerned output with cyclic reconnecting ons 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage Mechanical Dimensio Width 40 85 C 40 185 F ns 207 mm 8 16 in including housing screws Height 114 mm 4 49 in including latch Depth 66 mm 2 60 in including grounding bolt Weight 0 85 kg 1 87 Ib Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 GuardPLC 2000 Controller Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Attribute Certifications when pr c UL us 1753 0B16 oduct is marked Specifications Appendix A UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity e EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A B amp C C Tick Australian Radiocommunication Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Attrib
166. ansmit data B 9 CNTR B Control Signal B GuardPLC Distributed 1 0 Modules Each module has two 10 100BaseT RJ 45 connectors to provide safety related communication via the GuardPLC Ethernet network These two connectors and the GuardPLC distributed I O module are connected together by an internal Ethernet switch avoc O RUN O ERROR O PROG O FORCE O FAULT O osL O BL O GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT ra Ethernet Ports 1 and 2 41 Chapter 2 42 Installation GuardPLC 2000 Controller Connections for safety and non safety related communication are described in the following sections Connections for Safety Related Communication To configure program the GuardPLC system the controller must be connected on an Ethernet network to the RSLogix Guard PLUS programming terminal The GuardPLC Ethernet network also provides for peer to peer communication to distributed I O and to other controllers OO Tx COL Ethernet Port 10 100 Base T Connections for Non Safety Related Communication Connect the ASCII port FB2 to any RS 232 device that has the capability to send ASCII command strings to the controller The controller replies with a data variable string See Chapter 21 for more information on ASCII communication function 5 none send data receive data none ground none RTS CTS none ASCII Port co o N On Oil Est ojl N Pub
167. arch 2010 Chapter 17 Introduction Considerations for Using Peer to peer Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Topic Page Considerations for Using Peer to peer 175 Set Peer to Peer Controller Properties 176 Create a Peer to peer Network 178 Design the Logic 180 Configure Peer to peer Communication 184 Compile and Download 189 Network Optimizing 190 Using peer to peer communication you can exchange signals between controllers by dragging signals onto pages that create controller to controller connections For example controller 1 could send three signals out1 out2 and out3 to controller 2 Controller 2 can then use these signals as inputs within its function block code Before you start a project that exchanges data between several controllers you should become familiar with the requirements of your application Questions about the network design which should be answered prior to developing the project include the following e Is timing a critical factor of the application This is the most important question e How many controllers will be involved e Is it necessary to establish an Ethernet network exclusively for the application or can an existing network be shared e How far away from each other are the controllers Are transportation media other than the Ethernet network needed such as telephone lines radios fiber optics and so
168. are assigned to connections to the Output tab for the input assembly Fe Signal Editor Teil i New Signal Delete Signal Help Me Type i Retain Constant Desc DN 4476 Signal_181_0478 BYTE 4477 Signal_181_0479 BYTE 4478 Signal 181 0480 BYTE Signal 181 0482 Signal 181 0483 BYTE Signal 181 0484 BYTE Type Size Offset Signal Signal 181 0465 BYTE Signal PV Test 2 3 WORD P o Signa Pv N Signal 181 0486 BYTE Signal 181 0487 BYTE Signal 181 0488 BYTE Signal 181 0483 BYTE Signal 181 0430 BYTE Signal 181 0431 BYTE Signal 181 0432 BYTE Signal 181 0433 BYTE Signal 181 0494 BYTE Mes Irene TI fake sess ows favre TI uk sess rer pne Y 4497 Signal 181 0433 BYTE 4498 Nignal 181 0500 BYTE 4499 SMnal PV Test WORD 4 gt Drag the signals from the Signal Editor to the Signal Connections tab After assigning the signals either assign the offsets manually or click New Offsets and choose Renumber at the Renumber Offsets prompt The offsets are byte offsets When assigning offsets manually make sure there are no holes in the assembly buffer and that the next signal starts where the previous signal ended If the scanner is a Logix controller be sure that e the Run Idle header is checked for output assemblies
169. ashing If all the status indicators are on and ERROR blinks the boot loader detected a corrupted operating system and is waiting for an operating system download Off No errors are detected PROGress On The upload of a new controller configuration is in progress Flashing The upload of a new operating system into the Flash ROM is in progress Off No upload of controller configuration or operating system is in progress FORCE On The controller is executing a routine Run and Force mode is activated by the user Flashing The controller is in Stop mode but forcing has been saved and will be activated when the controller is started Off Forcing Is off 142 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Diagnostics Chapter 15 Indicator State Description FAULT On The routine logic has caused an error The controller configuration is faulty The upload of a new operating system was not successful and the operating system is corrupted Flashing An error has occurred during a Flash ROM write cycle One or more 1 0 errors have occurred Off None of the above errors have been detected COMMunication On The programming terminal with Administrator or Read Write access is communicating with the controller via an Ethernet link Off No communication or read only communication on an Ethernet link GuardPLC 1600 and System Status Indicators GuardPLC 1800 Controllers and GuardPLC Distributed o voc 1 0 O RUN
170. ave to type this shortcut name for each object in your graphic displays Ki FactoryTalk View Studio Machine Edition File View Application Tools Window Help ng Explorer GuardPLC CPR9test X El Local USMAYWEWALTZ3 Effa GuardPLC CPRStest Ei 4 RS Lins Enterprise a Communication cB GuardPLC_CPRSte meg System Sy HMI Tags Tags S Graphics EH Displays Global Obje El Libraries fg Images 3 Parameters FEB Local Mess Sy Alarms Em Alarm Setup Information RB Information E Information Logic and Contr v A Macros a 2 Communication Setup RNA SLocal GuardPLC_CPR9test RSLinx Enterprise P GuardPLC1800 Design Local Runtime Target Copy from Design to Runtime RSLinx Enterprise USMAYWEWALTZ3 9 1789 A17 Backplane ds EtherNet Ethernet xm 192 168 0 99 1753 L32BBBx 8A 1753 L32BBBx 8A GPLC 1800 Browse Cancel Verify Hel 1 NM Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 207 Chapter 18 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Add Ethernet IP Protocol to Your Project Next you need to add the Ethernet IP protocol to your project in RSLogix Guard PLUS software Follow these steps 1 In the Hardware Management window of RSLogix Guard PLUS software right click Protocols and choose Add Ethernet IP Tal RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help PY plus A Configuration
171. ays to generate a pulse test in the GuardPLC family of products e By using Redundant Pulse Test Output RPTO and Single Pulse Test Output SPTO certified function blocks in the application program e By using the services built into the GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 2000 controllers operating systems This table lists the pulse test methods available for your product Controller RPTO SPTO Function Blocks OS Configurable GuardPLC 1200 yes no GuardPLC 1600 yes yes GuardPLC 1800 yes no GuardPLC 2000 yes yes Pulse testing cannot be configured on the GuardPLC 1200 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers or on the 1753 OB16 output only module The GuardPLC 1800 controller is excluded because it features digital inputs that are actually analog inputs with 1 bit resolution You can choose between the two methods for pulse testing the GuardPLC 1600 controller and distributed I O modules catalog numbers 1753 IB16 1753 IBSXOBS 1753 IB16XOB8 and 1753 IB20XOB8 controlled by the GuardPLC 1600 controller You also have the choice of methods for the GuardPLC 2000 controller and 1755 IB24XOB16 module 101 Chapter 11 Pulse Testing Response to 0S Configurable Faults 102 Consider the following when choosing a method of pulse testing The certified function block lets the pulse test source output and safety input to be on different physical nodes The OS configured pulse test assumes that the source and input are local to t
172. bove the SLC 5 05 controller is configured to send a read instruction to the GuardPLC controller Four 16 bit words of data will be read from a GuardPLC assembly named BLK 121 at an offset of six 16 bit words The data will be placed into the SLC 5 05 controller s integer file number 7 at offset 0 Error Description No errors In the example above the PLC 5 controller is configured to send a read instruction to the GuardPLC controller Four 16 bit words of data will be read from a GuardPLC assembly named BLK_120 at an offset of eight 16 bit words The data will be placed into the PLC 5 controller s integer file number 7 at offset 22 7 Click the MultiHop tab 8 Press the Insert key to add the GuardPLC controller hop 242 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 PLC 5 Controller Z MSG Rung 2 0 MG9 0 General MultiHop Ins Add Hop This PLCS 1756 ENet I P str ControlLogix Backplane N A Backplane Slot dec 9 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 Enter the IP address of the GuardPLC controller SLC 5 05 Controller Del Remove Hop FromDevice FromPort__ To Address Type To Address 1 EtherNet IP Device str MOREZZIEEEETEI Use Unconnected CIP Messaging from a PanelView Standard Terminal Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the Generic CIP message profile to configure the PanelView Standard terminal to exchange data with the GuardPLC controller Both devi
173. cal Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 1 Overview of Safety Controllers Introduction Topic Page Safety Concept 19 Safe States 21 GuardPLC System Hardware 21 Communication Capabilities 2 Safety Concept GuardPLC controllers feature a fail safe CPU according to IEC 61508 SIL 3 and ISO 13849 1 PLe Cat 4 Faults that cause loss of safety function are detected within the safety time you specify Faults that cause loss of safety function only in combination with another fault are detected at least within the multiple error occurrence time 24 hours This results in these requirements for the safety concept You specify the safety time and the watchdog time The multiple error occurrence time is preset to 24 hours e Even upon the detection of an error the controller continues to react in a safety related way e Faulty input signals for example incorrectly transmitted input values do not affect the safe function of the controller Faulted input signals have a 0 value e An error in a non safety related module does not affect the safety of the controller e The failure of the controller has no effect on the safety of other safety related modules For more information on the safety concept refer to the GuardPLC Controllers Safety Re
174. cates the status of the offline versus the online configuration Once you complete the configuration the symbols disappear Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Chapter 20 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 100 100 93 10 4 Right click the GuardPLC controller icon in the graphic view and choose Scanlist Configuration to open the Scanlist Configuration dialog box PointlO 4 Slot Chassis 1756 A10 A 1 A cut Ctrl x Copy Ctri C e Paste Ctri V Delete Del Upload from Device Download to Device The GuardPLC controller is highlighted in the Scanlist Configuration dialog box to show that it is the scanner in this configuration Y Address 100 100 93 99 GuardPLC 1600 Scanlist Configuration File Edit View Network Device Connection Help El X 85 eli i 5 s s Ne z Edits Enabled Curent Current x a E Entries Used D of 32 Data Input File Usage 0 00 rL 5 Data Output File Usage 0 00 E ES 4 gt Nttode Memory Usage lal Address Slot Parameters Entry N Connection Name M4 M Connection Configuration d Connection Status For Help press F1 255 Chapter 20 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner 5 Right click the target I O module in the Scanlist Configuration dialog box and choose Insert Connection Address 100 100 93 99 GuardPLC 1600 Scanlist Configuration
175. cators e module status e O status 19 L 20 O 21 O2 22 O3 23 104 24 L Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 149 Chapter 15 150 Diagnostics Power Supply and Module Status Indicator Status Description RUN On green The module has the correct operating voltage 24V DC Off The module has no power ERR On red If the system is in Stop mode one or more of the inputs or outputs is faulty or the module is faulty Use the RSLogix Guard PLUS software to verify the location of the fault If the module is faulty replace the module immediately or the safety related operation of the GuardPLC 2000 controller is not maintained Off The module is operational 1 0 Status Indicator Status Description 1 2 3 4 On green The corresponding output is energized Off The corresponding output is de energized While the system is in Run mode ERR is indicated continuously for both a module and a counter channel error Depending on the type of error the module may switch off only one counter channel that is the counter transmits the value 0 to the logic the output has no signal but the module continues operation with the remaining counter channel If the entire module is switched off all counter channels are switched off Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 16 Introduction Peer to peer Communication Basics Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Pee
176. ce O50 murO O60 1753 IB16 OXB8 oLO 0710 16 DC Inputs s O O O 8 DC Outputs LS LS 1 2 3 4 LL LS LS 5 6 7 8 Ll LS LS 9 10 11 12 L L LS LS 13 14 15 16 L L 0000 sald 0000 kis 0000 iii 0000 GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT 1 H2 54 46 57 58 59 6061 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 Light Curtain Safety Input 338 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wiring Examples Appendix C 1753 0W8 Modules L2 or DC L1 or DC O 24v Dc o o o o O RUN 2 01 Do2 Dos 004 O ERROR em x L O pros Allen Bradley Guard PLCE D on O FORCE TT iriad VO hogar onus O Fault Oost OBL L1 or DC en D D os GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 m nm Mw 15 16 BaseT L1 or DC oad E L2 or DC Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 339 Appendix C Wiring Examples 1753 IF8XOF4 Modules 340 O voc O RUN Guard PLC 1753 IF8XOF4 8 Analog Inputs a ERROR Distributed I O 4 Analog Outputs PROG O FORCE AO Oraur Al Al Al 01 02 03 04 oO osL nn ok T2 m L T3 13 L T4 M L T5 I5 L T6 l6 L T i7 L T8 l8 L LR CR SEC ee CM O BL GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT 1 2 SR ER RSR ER i amp F Ss FT Fo A N Current B GE Output TN al 2 wiredevice crop M with power ESES Wa 1 WI 4 wire devicg ESO P ith c EE GuardPLC 10 KQfor Voltage 2 wire
177. ce in both of these buffers to store the corresponding data You do this by creating signals in the Signal Editor and assigning them to the scanner assembly For detailed information on defining signals by using the Signal Editor refer to the Using RSLogix Guard PLUS Software with GuardPLC Controllers Programming Manual publication 1753 PMO001 249 Chapter 20 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Connect the Scanner Signals 1 Right click Scanner and choose Connect Signals from the context menu to open the Signal Connections dialog box RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help Enet_IP_Scanner Configuration BE E0000 Resource Distributed 1 0 Protocols APE themet IP Validate Mews b 2 Assign signals created in the Signal Editor by dragging them to either the Input or Output tab on the Connect Signals dialog box The Input tab contains all signals to be received from the target The Output tab contains all signals to be transmitted to the target E Signal Connections Configuration 60000 Reso DEG VE Editor New Signal Delete Signal New Offsets Help Inputs ES Info Offset Signal Reserved IN 1 Reserved IN 2 Reserved IN 3 Reserved IN 4 SCANNER IN D SCANNER IN 1 SCANNER IN 2 SCANNER IN 3 SCANNER IN 4 TAG 50 SCANNER IN 5 TAG 60 SCANNER IN amp B e Tee EK Fame Ha rase KW Eh Fos
178. ces must be connected to the EtherNet IP network You will need PanelBuilder32 software version 3 82 xx or later to configure the PanelView Standard terminal Follow these steps to enable the PanelView Standard terminal to message to the GuardPLC controller acting as an adapter target 1 Create a GuardPLC Assembly Instance input or output including the data type assembly size and assembly name See pages 215 and 216 TIP Make sure the Run Idle header box is unchecked as unconnected CIP messages do not use a Run Idle header Create a new EtherNet IP application in PanelBuilder32 software Configure the PanelView terminal for EtherNet IP communication To perform read and write operations to the GuardPLC controller s target assemblies add objects to the PanelView Standard terminal s application Configure those objects for read or write operation using tags 243 Chapter 19 244 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 5 Save and download your application These steps are described in more detail beginning on page 244 For more information on PanelView Standard terminals and using PanelBuilder32 software refer to the following e PanelView Standard Operator Terminals User Manual publication 2711 UM014 e PanelBuilder32 Application Development Software for PanelView Standard Terminals Quick Start publication 2711 05003 Create an EtherNet IP Application Follow these steps to create a new
179. ch 2010 105 Chapter 11 Pulse Testing Notes 106 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 12 High Speed Counters Introduction This chapter covers using counters in these systems e GuardPLC 1200 controllers e GuardPLC 1800 controllers e GuardPLC 2000 controllers using a 1755 HSC module Topic Page Counter Decoder Modes 107 Understand Counter Module Configuration 109 Counter Decoder Modes The counters can be used in these operating modes e Counter mode e Decoder mode The two counters can be used in different modes at the same time Counter Mode Counter mode is used for counting pulses at speeds up to 1 MHz on the GuardPLC 2000 controllers and 100 kHz on the GuardPLC 1200 and 1800 controllers Follow these guidelines when using counters in a GuardPLC system Jj e The 5V signal must be between 4 5V and 5 5V while the 24V signal must be between 13V and 26 4V e The steepness of the falling edge must be at least 1V per us e The low and high signal times must be at least 5 us for the GuardPLC 1200 controller duty cycle 5096 at 100 kHz and 0 5 us for the GuardPLC 2000 controller duty cycle 5096 at 1 MHz e Shield the cable against noise Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 107 Chapter 12 High Speed Counters Counter Mode Inputs Pins Functions A1 A2 counting input for pulses high signals with falling edge of the pulses B1 B2 counting direc
180. changed on a regular basis Use unconnected requests when data should be sent occasionally and the connection does not need to be maintained TIP To use the GuardPLC controller as an unconnected adapter with a Logix controller follow the steps in Open a Class 3 Connection from a Logix Controller on page 228 However when configuring the message instruction do not check the Connected box on the Communication tab as described on page 232 The GuardPLC controller and PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controllers exchange data via PCCC read write unconnected messages from the PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controller to the GuardPLC controller The PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controllers and GuardPLC controllers must be connected to the EtherNet IP network Channel 2 on the PLC 5 controller or Channel 1 on the SLC 5 05 controller must be configured for EtherNet IP communication 235 Chapter 19 236 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Refer to the Enhanced and Ethernet PLC 5 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1785 UM012 or to the SLC 500 Modular Hardware Style User Manual publication 1747 UMO011 for more information on configuring these controllers for Ethernet communication You will also need RSLogix 5 programming software to configure the PLC 5 controller or RSLogix 500 programming software to configure the SLC 5 05 controller Follow these steps to enable communication between the GuardPLC controller acting as an adapter target and
181. chnology 10 Base T if HH network profile Medium amp Cleanroom is selected Fast Fast Ethernet full duplex recommended LAN switches if HH network profile Fast amp Cleanroom is selected 10 MBit hubs if HH network profile Medium amp Cleanroom is selected Or use switches integrated into the GuardPLC 1600 1800 controllers Switched Low probability for loss of messages Noisy Time for gt 1 repetitions Characteristics of the communication path Minimum delays ResponseTime lt ReceiveTMO 2 otherwise ERROR Responselime manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor Variables ReceiveTMO manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor WDZ manually set in the controller properties Suitable HH network Fast profile Medium 10 controllers in a Token Group Peer to Peer parameter presets e Queuelen 2 e Communication Time Slice large enough to process and send all data defined for transmission in one CPU cycle e ResendTMO if ReceiveTMO gt 2 x WDZ then ResendTMO ResponseTime 2 1 Resend possible if ReceiveTMO lt 2 x WDZ then ERROR e AckTMO 0 e ProdRate 0 170 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Peer to peer Communication Overview Chapter 16 Peer to Peer Profile Ill Medium amp Cleanroom This profile provides medium data throughput for applications where only a moderate data update rate is required and where the Worst Case Reaction Time is
182. ck up battery every four years Replacement batteries are available from Rockwell Automation 1755 BAT Follow these steps to replace the battery Make sure that the GuardPLC 2000 controller is powered on Replacing the back up battery while the controller is off causes a reset All data including the clock settings will be lost 1 Remove the lid by removing the two Screws mn e 2 Use a flat head screwdriver to remove the N E battery from its compartment e ES 3 Insert a new battery following the polarity Ae shown on the compartment e IMPORTANT Make sure that the contact pins inside the battery compartment are not damaged Dispose of the used battery in accordance with local regulations ATTENTION A b Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in general trash collection They may explode or rupture violently Follow all local regulations for disposal of these materials You are legally responsible for hazards created during disposal of your battery GuardPLC 1200 controllers and GuardPLC 2000 power supplies contain a sealed lithium battery which may need to be replaced during the life of the product At the end of its life the battery contained in this product should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste The collection and recycling of batteries helps protect the environment and contributes to the conservation of natural resources as valuable materials are
183. ct plate on page 48 IMPORTANT Do not terminate unused high speed counter inputs To be sure that counters are used in a safety related manner SIL3 in accordance to IEC 61508 the whole system including connected sensors and encoders must satisfy these safety requirements Refer to the GuardPLC Controllers Safety Reference Manual publication 1753 RM002 for more detailed information Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 63 Chapter5 Wire the GuardPLC 2000 Controller and 1 0 i Safety related Analog Ee module uses analog outputs E transfer analog pue rom the user program into outputs ranging from 10V DC an Output Module 1755 OF8 0 20 mA The relationship between the value in the user program and the output value is linear and is displayed in this table Logic Value Output Voltage Output Current 0 0 00V 0 0 mA 1000 10 00V 20 0 mA 1000 10 00V na Current Draw The GuardPLC 2000 controller features several different modules These modules and their backplane current draw specifications are listed in this table Cat No CurrntDrawat33VDC CurentDrawat24VDC 1755 IB24X016 0 3A 0 5 A 1755 IF8 0 15 A 0 4A 1755 OF8 0 15 A 0 4A 1755 HSC 0 8A 0 1A 1755 L1 15A 1 0A TIP The GuardPLC 2000 controller can draw up to 30 A The majority of this 30 A is used to source inputs and outputs Only 1 A is required to operate the CPU module Connect the power supply 1755 PB720 to the
184. determined during the signal connection process Type the GuardPLC controller s Output Assembly instance number in the Output Assembly Instance field Type the size of the Output Assembly minus 4 bytes in the Output Size field The data size in RSLogix 5000 software does not include the 4 bytes of the Run Idle header but these 4 bytes must be part of the GuardPLC controller s output assembly because the ControlLogix controller sends the 4 byte Run Idle header to the GuardPLC controller For example if you created an output assembly of 6 bytes 6 BYTE signals assigned in RSLogix Guard PLUS software you must enter an Output Size of 2 in RSLogix 5000 software because only the last 2 bytes contain the actual data 221 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 222 7 Click Finish Input Only Connections 6 Click Next and type the desired packet rate for this connection in milliseconds When you use input only connections you can create more than one Class 1 scanner connection to the GuardPLC controller specifying the same input assembly instance The GuardPLC controller specifies the same multicast address for input data to all scanners asking for the same input assembly instance The GuardPLC controller only produces the data once and all scanners receive the same input data No output data will go from the scanners to the GuardPLC controller All input only connections are independent from each oth
185. dictates how many scanners should be able to read from this tag at the same time Enter the Data Type Click OK to save the changes Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Chapter 20 For more information on configuring Logix controllers refer to Logix5000 Controllers Quick Start publication 1756 QS001 Configure Connections from the GuardPLC Controller to the Logix Controller 1 In RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software right click the GuardPLC scanner controller in the graphic view and choose Scanlist Configuration 2 Right click the target Logix controller in the Scanlist Configuration dialog box and choose Insert Connection 3 In this example the Connection Name is Receive Data From Connection Properties KAES Connection Electronic Keying Details r Target Information To Address 192 168 1 160 Device Name 1756 L61 LOGIX5561 To Slot foo een leceive Data From r Communication Parameters DemoStatusBuffer Requested Packet Interval ms 20 H zl m Addressing Parameters Input Size sz Words Input Address 7 o Output Size bas Words Output Address n a Configuration sed z Words Auto Address Preferences 4 Enter the name of the producing tag in the Communication Parameters Value field 5 Make sure that the Input Size value matches the size of the producing tag
186. dministrator Displays Cyclic redundancy check CRC option for the configuration in the CPU in hexadecimal notation This identifies the configuration loaded in the controller System ID The system ID Safety Time ms The safety time in milliseconds Watchdog Time ms The watchdog time in milliseconds Main Enable Whether controller switches can be changed while the controller is executing Autostart Whether the controller automatically starts up after restarting the controller or applying power to the controller Start Restart allowed Whether you can start a controller manually Loading allowed Whether you can load new configuration information to the controller Test Mode allowed Whether you can freeze the routine Forcing allowed Whether you can force tags Stop on Force Timeout Whether to stop executing the routine when the force time expires Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 125 Chapter 14 Statistics Tab 126 Cycle Time ms average Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Control Panel GPLC1600_1 l DI xl PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help f gt mw wl gt Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distibuted 1 0 HH State Environment Data OS IP Settings Date Time 03 03 2004 16 08 20 last avg min max Cycle Time ms SI 4185 Com Time Slice
187. does not use the B it is required for FactoryTalk View software F Graphic GuardPLC CPR9test Display DER BOOL1 read B122 0 0 BOOL read B122 0 8 B122 0 0 corresponds to the first BOOL tag in the GuardPLC assembly 122 B122 0 8 corresponds to the second BOOL tag in the GuardPLC assembly 122 Multistate Indicator Properties Multistate Indicator Properties General States Common Connections General States Common Connections Name Tag Expression Tag Espm Name Tag Expression Tag Espm IEEE t GuadPLCt800 E200 a ITEM C GuardPLC1800 JAE EA omes Got TIP GuardPLC is a BYTE machine BOOL tags take up a complete BYTE in the buffer That is why 0 and H are used in the VIEW tags to read the first bit from the GuardPLC byte If a third BOOL tag was read the address in the VIEW tag would be B122 1 0 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 211 Chapter 18 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Writing Integers to the GuardPLC Controller from the PanelView Plus Terminal This example uses output assembly 121 and shows how two integers can be written by the PanelView Plus terminal Two INT tags toGuard_INT1 and toGuard_INT2 were used in the controller as shown i RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help Ta PVplus Configuration E Signal Connections EUH ojx New Signal Delete Signal New Offsets
188. e Publication 1753 UMO001C EN P March 2010 345 Appendix D Replacing the Back up Battery GuardPLC 1200 Controllers 346 Replace the back up battery on your GuardPLC 1200 controller every two years The battery case is located on the left hand side of the cabinet see drawing below The battery must be replaced together with the case Replacements are available from Rockwell Automation under part number 1754 BAT Follow these steps to replace the battery Battery Case Back up Battery and Case m bottom view EE ATTENTION A K SS it 1 k E Make sure that the GuardPLC 1200 controller is powered on Replacing the back up battery while the controller is de energized causes a reset All data including the clock settings will be lost 1 Press the left side of the battery case toward the controller and pull the left side of the battery case toward you to remove the battery case 2 Insert a new battery case making sure that the case is correctly aligned and the pins inside the GuardPLC 1200 controller are not bent 3 Press on the left edge of the case so that the pins seat in the connector then press on both sides of the case until the battery snaps into place Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 GuardPLC 2000 Power Supply Battery Disposal Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Replacing the Back up Battery Appendix D Replace the ba
189. e 0 ReceiveTMO is ReceiveTMO Tp 3 x WDZ PES 2 x WDZ PES 2 Calculate the ReceiveTMO with the suitable formula and overwrite the default value in the Peer to Peer Editor Profile Response Time ms ReceiveTMO ms Fasti Cieancon In first approximation the ResponseTime can be calculated as ResponseTime ReceiveTMO 2 Overwrite the default value of the ResponseTime with the calculated value TIP Setting the ResponseTime this way allows the controller to resend a message in case of unexpected message loss For best network performance the ReceiveTMO and the ResponseTime are optimized after the project has been compiled loaded and started on the controllers At that time the actual ResponseTimes and the actual cycle times can be read in the Control Panel Define The Signals to Exchange Between Each Controller Connection 1 Right click a resource in the project tree and choose Peer to Peer Editor The Peer to Peer Editor opens 2 Click a line number leftmost column in the Peer to Peer Editor table This selects a controller with which the controller named in the headline of the Peer to Peer Editor exchanges data 187 Chapter 17 Configure Peer to Peer Communication E Signal Editor Filter l New Signal Delete Signal Help Open the Signal Editor by choosing Editor from the Signals menu Click Connect Process Signals in the Peer to Peer Editor Arrange the Signal
190. e 1755 IB24XOB16 Digital 1 0 Module 65 Wire the 1755 IF8 Analog Input Module 66 Wire the 1755 OF8 Analog Output Module 66 Wire the 1755 HSC Counter Modules 68 The status of digital inputs is indicated via status indicators when the controller or module is in Run mode Follow the closed circuit principle for external wiring when connecting sensors To create a safe state in the event of a fault the input signals revert to the de energized state 0 The external line is not monitored but a wire break is interpreted as a safe 0 signal Input devices with their own dedicated power supply can also be connected instead of contacts The reference pole L2 of the power supply must then be connected to the reference pole of the input L See the wiring diagrams in Appendix C for examples In general the LS terminals not L on the power supply connection should be used to supply voltage for safety inputs Each LS features individual short circuit and EMC protection Due to current limitations use LS for only the safety inputs on the same terminal plug An EN 61000 4 5 surge impulse can be read as a short duration HI signal in some modules To avoid an error either e install shielded input lines to prevent effects of surges in the system e implement software filtering in the user program A signal must be present for at least two cycles before it is evaluated 61 Chapter5 Wire the GuardPLC 2000 Controller and 1 0 E Sa
191. e Read Module type OxFDO2 analog input module for GuardPLC 2000 controller OxFFFF missing module in GuardPLC 2000 chassis Board State Read Error mask for the module 0x000 IO processing may be running with errors 0x001 No 1 0 processing CPU not in RUN 0x002 No 1 0 processing during start up tests 0x004 Manufacturing interface running 0x010 No 1 0 processing due to faulty parameterization 0x020 No 1 0 processing due to exceeded fault rate 0x040 No 1 0 processing because configured module is not plugged in 1 Ox input channel 01 08 310 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 System Signal Variables Appendix B Analog Output Module Variables AB AO for GuardPLC 2000 Controller The GuardPLC 2000 controller supports these analog output parameters 1 0 Data Read Write Description AO State Read Error mask for all analog outputs 0x0000 No errors detected 0x0001 Error of the module 0x0002 Within the safety time co efficient table check error 0x0004 No communication with the module due to controller error AO 0x Mode Write Mode of analog output channel 0 voltage 1 current AO Ox State Read Error mask for analog output channels 0x0000 0001 CPU detected error on AB AO module 0x0000 0002 CPU detected faulty monotony counter 0x0000 0004 CPU detected error in safe addressing 0x0000 0008 CPU detected faulty CRC 0x0000 0010 CPU detected error in wa
192. e data appears in chronological order from oldest to newest Start At Date Displays entries in chronological order starting at this date and time The number of lines shown in the table depends on the Entries Per Diag Enter the date as mm dd yy and the time as hh mm Stop At Date Displays entries in chronological order ending at this date and time The number of lines shown in the table depends on the Entries Per Diag Enter the date as mm dd yy and the time as hh mm Entries Per Diag Determines the maximum number of entries to load into the buffer for the CPU and COM diagnostics For example if you enable short term and long term diagnostics for CPU and COM and you set Entries Per Diag 10 the diagnostic window contains a maximum of 40 entries 10 entries per diagnostic type RSLogix Guard PLUS software can buffer as many as 5000 entries per type of diagnostic Sort If Sort is disabled the diagnostic window displays entries in the order they were saved in the controller If Sort is enabled the diagnostic window automatically displays entries according to date CPU Short Term Diagnostic CPU Long Term Diagnostic COM Short Term Diagnostic COM Long Term Diagnostic Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Enables or disables whether to display the diagnostic data for each type 141 Chapter 15 E GuardPLC 1200 Controller Diagnostics i Status Indicators The GuardPLC 1200 controller has these stat
193. e drops out and is lost at the addressee there is a gap in the received messages and the next message comes early Receive Tmo Receive Timeout as entered by the user see Define Peer to peer Parameters on page 186 ResendTMO Resend Timeout as set by the profile AckTmo Acknowledge Timeout as set by the profile CurKeVer CRC for the peer to peer configuration Identical to the Peer to Peer system signal version see page 181 NewKeVer Reserved for future use 194 Publication 1753 UMO001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Chapter 17 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Control Panel RobotA E Reconfigure ResponseTime The ResponseTime initially configured in Define Peer to peer Parameters on page 186 was derived from theoretical considerations and was chosen conservatively to start the network running The ResponseTime actually needed is usually much smaller than the theoretical value and can be optimized to improve network performance To optimize the ResponseTime follow these steps 1 Open the Control Panels for all controllers in the project and choose P2P State 2 Position the horizontal slider so that you can read the ResponseTime PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help SZ mg Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distributed 170 HH State Environment Data os IP Settings Sven acl State Poot les ns Pages rs Rte Pp me
194. e is recommended for networks with slow hubs to avoid message collisions RAW In RAW mode software token passing is OFF No token is created Ethernet access is coordinated by hardware only The affiliated Link Mode is TCS direct 154 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Peer to peer Communication Overview Chapter 16 Data transfer is faster than in Normal Mode and message collisions are prevented by the switching and full duplex mode ports This mode is recommended for networks where full duplex recommended LAN switches are used exclusively or the switches integrated into the GuardPLC 1600 and 1800 controllers can be used Link Mode Choose either TCS Direct or TCS TOKCYC TCS Direct In TCS Direct mode safety related data are sent as soon as they are prepared for transmission Network media access is coordinated by hardware TCS TOKCYC This link mode corresponds to Normal protocol mode Safety related data is sent when the controller receives the token Network media access is coordinated by software Response Time Response Time is the controllers maximum permissible Response Time for a network message PES Programmable Electronic System sends a message to PES and expects the answer within the Response Timeout The actual values of the ResponseTime can be read in the HH Status of the Control Panel EEN GPLC1200_2 DEDE EN CN a a mera 2 ewes pesetas e
195. e is resistance when you push the device into the backplane do not force the device because the pins will bend b Remove the device and start again at step 3 5 Continue pushing the device into the chassis until the front of the device is flush with the other modules in the chassis Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Installation Chapter 2 6 Secure the device with the screws on the top and bottom of the device see the figure below T Controller Screw 44 1 0 Module Screw Power Supply Screws Slot 0 as H LZ 5 yy j lille gt I J y 7777 AL PAA UDUD VE fy A CAA A Lyle yy D se 2777 iy f 77 P YOOX hho jy LP ES KKR oo cA iN gt S Slot 4 ION 3 i Guar Le 2000 0 I 0 e el A Power Supply Screws p guides 1 0 Module Screw TIP If you are installing other GuardPLC 2000 modules follow their installation instructions up to this point before you complete the next 3 steps 7 Reconnect the fans 8 Replace the lower panel of the chassis sliding it over the tabs on the sides of the chassis and under the tabs on the back of the chassis 9 Use the grounding grill screws to attach the grounding grill Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 37 Chapter2 Installation Communication Connections for safety and non safety related communication for
196. e the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Notes 264 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 2 1 Introduction Communicate with ASCII Devices Topic Page Connect the Controller to an ASCII Device 265 Configure the ASCII Serial Port 268 Connect Signals 269 ASCII Protocol 270 Connectthe Controllerto an For the sole purpose of sending the status of the signals from the ASCII Device Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 GuardPLC controller to an external device you can connect an intelligent ASCII device to the GuardPLC controller s serial port This ASCII connection is one way from the GuardPLC controller slave to the master device You cannot program the GuardPLC controller or change the values in the GuardPLC controller by using this port To use the ASCII function signals that you wish to send out the serial port must be connected to placeholders in the ASCII protocol Connect Signals dialog box These signals are then capable of being sent out the serial port if a command string is properly received from the master The command string includes a starting address and number of signals to be sent The GuardPLC controller replies to this command string by sending the values of these signals out the serial port in an ASCII string Connect to a GuardPLC 1200 Controller RS 232 ZNO ASCII Q E serial port Ss SISK Use a
197. e time in milliseconds for a Token cycle The value is 0 if Token Passing is off any Cleanroom profile Resource The name of the controller LinkID The controller network ID State The status of communication RspT e f Link Mode is TCS direct Token Passing OFF RspT is the ResponseTime of the HH profile for a message from PES PES gt PES based on the network hardware and topology This parameter cannot be changed by the user elt Link Mode is TCS TOKCYC Token Passing ON RspT is part of the Bus Cycle Time Link Mode e TCS direct when Token Passing is OFF e TCS TOKCYC when Token Passing is ON Token Group ID The ID of the Token Group Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Chapter 14 Environment Data Tab GER PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help SZ ws o Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distributed 1 0 HH State Environment Data os IPSe Ferpertire State Te Power Supply State 16 00 E E F uo Online Administrator This tab displays status messages in hexadecimal form for Temperature State Power Supply State Fan State and Relay State See Programming Controller Data on page 305 for an explanation of the error bits OS Tab Control Panel GPLC1600_1 lolx PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help f gt ow a Resource State Safety Parameters Statist
198. e to overcurrent 0x04 Error in reading back the supply Di Error Code Head Error mask for all digital inputs 0x0001 Error in digital input range 0x0002 FTZ test of test pattern failed Dilxx Error Code Read Error mask of all digital input channels 0x01 Error in digital input module 0x10 Short circuit of the channel 0x80 Line interrupt between pulse output DO and pulse input DI Di xx Value Write Input value of digital input channels 0 Input not set 1 Input set 316 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 System Signal Variables Appendix B 1 0 Data Read Write Description DI Number of Pulse Write Number of pulse outputs feed outputs chang 0 No output channel provided for line monitoring 1 Output channel 1 provided for line monitoring 2 Output channels 1 and 2 provided for line monitoring 3 Output channels 1 2 and 3 provided for line monitoring 4 Output channels 1 4 provided for line monitoring 5 Output channels 1 5 provided for line monitoring 6 Output channels 1 6 provided for line monitoring 7 Output channels 1 7 provided for line monitoring 8 Output channels 1 8 provided for line monitoring DI Supply xx Write Activation of the single DI supply WSO ADEE OI 0 Transmitter supply 1 A is switched off default supply current 40 mA 1 Transmitter supply 1 A is switched on DI Pulse Slot Write Pulse module slot
199. e up to 70V DC Q 35 W e up to 127V DC 30 W Turn on time approx 30 ms Turn off time approx 10 ms Bounce time approx 15 ms Service life 2108 switching cycles mechanical Service life electrical 22 5x 10 switching cycles with resisitive full load and L switching cycles per second Environmental Conditions Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Vibration 1g 10 150 Hz Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Specifications Appendix A Shock operating 15g Relative humidity 10 95 noncondensing Emissions Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 MHz 2000 MHz EFT B immunity 2 kV 5 kHz on power ports 1 kV Q 5 kHz on signal ports 1 kV 5 kHz on communication ports Surge transient 500V line line DM and 500V line earth CM on DC power immunity ports 1 kV line earth CM on signal ports 1 kV line earth CM on communication ports Conducted RF 10Vrms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz immunity Enclosure type rating meets IP20 Mechanical Dimensions Width 207 mm 8 14 in including housing screws Height 114 mm 4 49 in including latch Depth 86 mm 3 3
200. ectable 26V 8 2V 200 mA short circuit proof Accuracy 0 5 Safety accuracy 2 Calibration error zero point 1 Calibration error terminal 0 4 point Channel error 0 5 Temperature error zero 0 5 10 K point Temperature error terminal 0 5 10 K point Linearity error 0 5 Long term drift 0 5 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Analog Outputs Number of outputs Specifications Appendix A 4 not electrically isolated non safety with common safety switch off Output signal range 4 20 mA nominal 0 20 mA full range resolution of software 12 bits Impedance current output 600 Q max Calibration error zero point 1 Calibration error terminal 1 point Channel error 1 Temperature error zero 1 10K point Temperature error terminal 1 10K point Linearity error 1 Environmental Conditions Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage Mechanical Dimensions 40 85 C 40 185 F without back up battery Width 207 mm 8 16 in including housing screws Height 114 mm 4 49 in including latch Depth 97 mm 3 82 in including grounding bolt Weight 0 95 kg 2 09 Ib Certifications when product is marked c UL us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61
201. ed Flashing Interface activity Non safety related Communication Active communication via the serial ports COMM1 and COMM3 is indicated by a status indicator located above the port Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 GuardPLC 2000 Controller Status Indicators RUN STOP PROG FAULT FORCE 10 100BaseT Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Diagnostics Chapter 15 The GuardPLC 2000 controller has status indicators for e module both the program and the communication e controller and the system hardware e routine e Ethernet communication to the programming terminal Controller Indicators Indicator Status Description RUN On This is the normal status of the controller Run or Stop mode The controller carries out communication and performs software tests Flashing Downloading an Operating System Off The controller is in Failure_Stop see ERR below or there is no power supply ERR On The controller is in the Failure_Stop state and the execution of the routine is halted All system outputs will be reset and the controller ceases all hardware and software tests The operating system loader has found a flash error FAULT is blinking Flashing The boot loader has found an error in the operating system in the flash if all other indicators are ON the download of a new operating system is awaited Off No errors are detected 145 Chapter 15 Diagnostics R
202. eer to peer 175 Set Peer to Peer Controller Properties v v POR S 176 Create a Peer to peer Network us 2a eto e Re 178 Create Token Groups x ae RR Des 178 Add Controllers to Token Group s 179 Configure Token Group i ouv eee ose 179 Design the T4916 atari gag REES S UD es 180 Create Peer to peer Signals n coe oo OE oe CR eta 180 Use Peer to peer System Signal 181 Design the Logic for all Controllers ene 182 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Table of Contents Configure Peer to peer Communication 184 Define Controller Connections llli 184 Assign Ee C 4 a cte ete or eee Rae 185 Choose a Peer to peer Profile 55 5 voL bo POF eS ks 186 Define Peer to peer Parameters 005 186 Define The Signals to Exchange Between Each Controller Connection 35 voxd 4 RN PERL ONE ES 187 Compile and Download EEN 189 Compile LOSIE q qu iude ios date gs Se ERR aie Sk Gece wet 189 Start Downlodd o eain See Enter Kardon 189 Betreier E Kee 190 Check Routine EE x oy adr Ee epa d bed 191 Reconfigure Watchdog Time 192 Check HH Statu Ssa eoa Ee e oed ACTEURS ACH 193 Check Peer to peer Status 0 0 ua 194 Reconfigure Response unge ois wa hien ate Ok 195 Reconfigure Receive Timeout i asec ed eae lt 197 Chapter 18 ugeet up 5 0 8 Ian eb ef ete soe ee 199 Ether
203. em Rack Network ID of the controller State Status of the communication RspT last avg Measured ResponseTime for a message from PES PES PES based on the network hardware CPU cycle time min max and Peer to Peer profile This parameter will be optimized later MsgNr Counter 32 bit resolution for all messages sent to a controller In the illustration above Robot A has sent message no 54980 to Robot B AckMsgNr The number of the received message that the controller has to acknowledge In the illustration above Robot A has acknowledged message no 54979 from Robot B DataSeq Counter 16 bit resolution for sent messages which contain process data In the illustration above Robot A has sent data message no 54980 to Robot B Opens Number of successful connects to a controller A figure higher than 1 indicates that a controller dropped out and has been reconnected Resends Counter 32 bit resolution for messages that have been resent due to an elapsed ResendTMO BadMsgs Counter 32 bit resolution for received messages that are corrupted or are not expected at that instant A corrupt message for example is a message with a wrong sender or with a faulty CRC An unexpected message for example is an Open command when the controllers are already connected EarlyMsgs Counter 32 bit resolution for received messages that are not in the correct sequence If a messag
204. emain open With listen only connections input assemblies are sent to one or more consumers For a listen only Listen Onl connection to be established an exclusive owner or input only connection with multicast must already Y exist All the subsequent Listen Only connections depend upon the owner connection When an owner connection is closed all subsequent Listen Only connections are also closed Requested Enter the Requested Packet Interval RPI in ms The RPI specifies the period at which data updates over a connection Packet Interval RPI The RPI is entered in 1 ms increments The RPI specified for the GuardPLC controller can be as little as 1 ms However the GuardPLC controller will not produce or consume data with a rate less than 2 ms because this is the tick of the GuardPLC communication module This limits the minimum RPI to 2 ms Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 257 Chapter 20 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Property Description Input Size Input size is the length of the data sent from the I O module target to the GuardPLC controller scanner The value in this field is predetermined by the module type and cannot be changed Output Size Output size is the length of the data sent from the GuardPLC controller scanner to the 1 0 module target The value in this field is predetermined by the module type and cannot be changed Configuration Size Configuration Size is the size of the configuratio
205. equested Packet Interval us CRPI Consumed Requested Packet Interval us MinPlTime Minimum Packet Interval Time us MaxPlTime Maximum Packet Interval Time us LastPITime Last Packet Interval Time ys AvrPITime Average Packet Interval Time us Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 131 Chapter 14 Use the Multi Control Panel Pham TETH Guard PLUS Hardware Management HI TR CAT4Estop E BE 3 Robot HH Network_1 XE Token Group 1 03 21 2004 10 46 0 46 54 01 132 RSLogix Guard PLUS Project Management C Program Files RSLogix Guard PLUS PROJECT CAT4Estop Programming Terminal Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status The Multi Control Panel lets you connect the programming terminal to more than one controller in the project in one window and to perform actions such as downloads controller starts invoking the force editor and so forth simultaneously 1 Open the Multi Control Panel by choosing Online gt Multi Control Panel When the Multi Control Panel is opened for the first time it does not contain any controllers 2 Add a controller to the Multi Control Panel by dragging and dropping the Resource from the project tree into the Multi Control Panel Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help Es Multi Control Panel PADT Resource Online Table Help sH R Be Nae L gen Fiack CPU State CPU Configuration CAC x
206. er When one of them times out the others remain active Module Properties ENBT_1 ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 Type ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Parent ENBT_1 C tion P ti Name GPLC_Input _Only_Connection OMENO eege Assembly E Description Instance Size Input 120 6 4 8 bit Output 183 Comm Format Input Data SINT X 3 3 Configuration 1 0 4 8 bit Address Host Name 2 eti IPAddress 192 168 1 180 C Host Name Cancel s ms Next gt Finish gt gt Help Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 To open an input only connection follow these steps 1 2 3 5 6 Choose Input Data SINT in the Comm Format field Type the GuardPLC controller s Input Assembly instance number in the Input Assembly Instance field Type the size of the input assembly in bytes in the Input Size field ptn Ins entry must exactly match the size of the input assembly or the GuardPLC adapter controller will return an error The size of the input assembly is determined during the signal connection process Type the Output Assembly instance number as 199 This is the heartbeat instance number a virtual number that is not associated with any real assembly It indicates to the GuardPLC controller that there will be no data coming from the scanner
207. er over a heating device DIN Rail 1 Hook the two top latches on the back of the GuardPLC 1200 controller over the top of the DIN rail 2 If the lower latches are extended see figure below push them up until they lock into place If the lower latches are not extended press the GuardPLC 1200 controller into the DIN rail until they lock into place Lower Latch Not Extended Lower Latch Extended TIP If you need to remove the controller from the DIN rail use a screwdriver to pull down the lower latches then lift the controller toward you Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Installation Chapter 2 Back Panel not bend the controller Bending the controller will damage it A Use the four brackets on the GuardPLC 1200 controller to mount it onto a back panel Top Brackets o UR O Use the following to mount the P controller Top Brackets Bottom Brackets M4 screws 2 M5 screws 2 lock washer lock washer washers washers UU NC YES t nut nut Bottom Brackets If the mounting brackets are not flat before the nuts are tightened use additional washers as shims so the controller does not bend when you tighten the nuts GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 Controllers and Distributed 1 0 TTTTTTUTE Tor effective cooling Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 e mount the device horizontally e provide a gap of at least 100 mm
208. es in Logix 5000 Control Systems User Manual publication ENET UM001 To enable communication between a GuardPLC 1600 or GuardPLC 1800 controller and PanelView PLUS terminal you need the following software e RSLinx Enterprise version 5 0 CPR9 e FactoryTalk View Studio Machine Edition version 5 00 00 CPR9 e RSLogix Guard PLUS version 4 1 Build 6111 This section guides you through e setting up FactoryTalkView Studio Machine Edition software e adding Ethernet IP protocol to your RSLogix Guard PLUS project e creating a graphic display that can read and write INT and BOOL data to and from the GuardPLC controller 205 Chapter 18 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication 206 Set Up FactoryTalk View Studio Machine Edition Software Follow these steps to setup FactoryTalk View Studio Machine Edition software 1 Open FactoryTalk View Studio software 2 Add the RSLinx Enterprise server to your application FactoryTalk View Studio Machine Edition DER File View Application Tools Window Help mesne skle Explorer GuardPLC_CPR9test 3 Local USMAYWEWALTZ3 fy GuardPLC_CPRStest 84 RSLins Enterprise m Communication Setup fl GuardPLC CPRStest 2 System SY HMI Tags a Tags Graphics SY Alarms I Alarm Setup Infomation Information Setup Information Messages BY Logic and Control 8 Macros CH Data Log ER Data Log Models SY RecipePlus RecipePlus Setup
209. es line control 1 set for LSLB line control 0 no LSLB line control DO xx LS monitoring with reduced voltage Configures line control with reduced voltage 1 reduced signal voltage level 0 normal signal voltage level DO xx xx in pairs Pulse Test Sources Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configures line control with channel pairs Pair 1 channel 1 01 and channel 2 02 Pair 2 channel 3 03 and channel 4 04 Pair 3 channel 5 05 and channel 6 06 Pair 4 channel 7 07 and channel 8 08 See Appendix B for a complete list of 1753 IB16XOB8 module variables The two digital pulse test sources PO can be used for short circuit or line break monitoring of digital inputs For information on configuring pulse test sources for line control see Chapter 11 A ATTENTION Pulse test sources must not be used as safety related outputs Each output has four terminals for wiring connections 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 14211712227 93 Chapter8 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16XOB8 Module Pulse test sources are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function 25 1 Pulse test source 1 26 1 Pulse test source 1 27 1 Pulse test source 1 28 1 Pulse test source 1 29 2 Pulse test source 2 30 2 Pulse test source 2 31 2 Pulse test source 2 32 2 Pulse test source 2 All PO1 terminals are internally connected and all PO2
210. esponds to the second INT tag in the GuardPLC assembly 120 Numeric Display Properties General Common Connections s Read BOOLs from the GuardPLC Controller and Display Them on the PanelView Plus Terminal This example uses input assembly 122 Two BOOL tags fromGuard BOOLI and fromGuard BOOL2 were used in the controller as shown Tal RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help E Signal Connections Configuration 60 fo x New Signal Delete Signal New Offsets Help Output Info Type Size Ofset Signal tagd5 op hm fromGuard_BOOL 2 tee bon p p IromGuard BOOL2 Total size 2 bytes E Signal Editor BO GuardPLC 1800 do i Programming Terminal New Signal Delete Signal Help MCP Configuration Le pe p p EEN p em Box ffi Sd 3 fromGuard_ BOOLI m fromGuard BOOL2 bot 5 fromGuard INT1 2 EA BOOLI BOOL ice 10 toGuard INT2 11 20 2007 1040 01 047 ne Resource Ofine 11 20 2007 10 57 56 744 Info Configuration 60000 Resource Protocols Ethemet IP 124 IN 124 deleted 210 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Chapter 18 The multistate indicator objects shown below read the two BOOLs from the GuardPLC controller Tags B122 0 and B122 1 were used to match the input assembly used in the GuardPLC controller The GuardPLC controller
211. etwork is detected 146 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Diagnostics Serial Communication Indicators Chapter 15 Indicator Status Description FB1 On Field bus no 1 is active FB2 On Field bus no 2 is active serial interface module IMPORTANT Only the bottom serial port on the GuardPLC 2000 controller is active as indicated by the FB2 status indicator 1755 IB24X0B16 Module Status Indicators The 1755 IB24XOB16 digital combination input and output module AB DIO has status indicators for RUN ERR e power supply n e module status e O status 1 2 3 oe jg 1755 5 aie IB24XOB16 7 8 9 RUN ERR Power Supply and Module Status Indicator Status Description RUN On green The module has the correct operating voltage 24V DC off The module has no power ERR On red If the system is in Stop mode one or more of the inputs or outputs is faulty or the module is faulty Use the RSLogix Guard PLUS software to verify the location of the fault If the module is faulty replace the module immediately or the safety related operation of the GuardPLC 2000 controller is not maintained Off The module is operational Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 147 Chapter 15 Diagnostics E 1755 IF8 Analog Input Module Status Indicators 148 1 0 Status Status Explanation On yellow e Input is high e Output is energized Off e
212. ety time will need to increase to compensate If you are only transferring status data over the network then a lower Communication Time Slice is permissible because it leaves more time in the cycle for your program to run It s likely to be acceptable even if it takes more than one cycle to read the status Check the CPU short term diagnostics for any Time Slice expired entries and increase the Communication Time Slice if necessary before the application goes into regular operation In the Statistics of the Control Panel Number of Time Slices higher than 1 also indicate a Communication Time Slice that is too short Number of Time Slices indicates the number of cycles it took for communication to complete The maximum Communication Time Slice depends on the application and is calculated as follows WDZ 2 Communication Time Slice max Application Execution Time In other words the Communication Time Slice plus Application Execution Time must not exceed the Watchdog Time EXAMPLE If the controller on page 176 has 10 connections the minimum Communication Time Slice is CTS 10x1ms 4ms 14 ms min CTS nin is increased by 6 milliseconds to provide a safety margin CTS min 20 ms With a Watchdog Time of 500 ms this leaves 480 ms for the application to be executed Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 177 Chapter 17 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Create a Peer to peer Network 178 Code Generat
213. every transition of the rung condition from false to true In this example a message is sent when the timer times out at 100 ms and every time it has a new data sequence count So if the write data changes this change is communicated to the GuardPLC controller no later than 100 ms past the data change tick The connection is closed when the controller transitions to Program mode Download and Go to Run 1 Download to the Logix controller and switch the controller to Run 2 Set Enable to true Both messages should show the Done flag set If an Error flag is set double click the message instruction to see the error description Verify the Data Exchange Follow these steps to verify the data exchange 1 In RSLogix 5000 software switch to the Controller Tags tab 233 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 2 Set the WriteBuffer display type to Hex Enter 16412 16434 16 ab 16 cd in the WriteBuffer 3 Set the ReadBuffer type to Decimal The ReadBuffer is set to Decimal because RSLogix Guard PLUS software displays DINT types in decimal format only 4 Configure the Force Editor menu in RSLogix Guard PLUS software to display all signals for assemblies IN_120 and OUT_121 5 Set signals for the IN_120 assembly to values 12345678 13572468 98765432 6 Start forcing to send the new signal values 7 Verify that RSLogix 5000 software displays the same values in the ReadBuffer 8 Verify
214. ference Manual publication 1753 RM002 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 19 Chapter 1 Overview of Safety Controllers Type of UO Error Permanent Response to Faults Controller Behavior If an error occurs at an I O point only this 1 0 point is considered faulty and not the entire module In case of faulty input points 0 is assumed to be the safe value Faulty output channels are de energized If it is not possible to de energize a single point the entire module is considered to be faulty the entire module is de energized and the corresponding error status is set The controller reports the error to the user program If the entire module cannot be de energized the controller goes to Failure_Stop Transient A transient error is an error that occurs in an I O module and then disappears by itself If a transient error occurs the module performs a self test If the test is successful the status of the I O module is set to good and the module s normal function continues In the process the GuardPLC controller performs a statistical evaluation of the frequency of errors The 1 0 module is permanently set to faulty if the pre set error frequency is exceeded In this case the module does not resume its normal function after the error has disappeared To resume normal function you must cycle power or change the controller to Stop and then Run If an error persists for a period of time exceeding that of t
215. ferl55 EN De Float REAL 3 E Stop on Timeout WriteB uffer1 SE 0 0 Float REAL WiiteBufferl55 1 0 0 Float REAL Signals L Channel WiiteBuffer155 2 0 0 Float REAL Signal TOUS DEL Exclusive Qwnerl TE T ABETE 1 v DEL Exclusive Ownerl Data MESSE Hex SINT 5 2 Signal 120 0002 16 34 v BYTE 15800 16834 v GPLC Exclusive Dwnerl Data Q 16 12 Hex SINT 3 Signal_120_0003 16t56 v v GPLC Exclusive Ownerl Data 1 16434 Hex SINT 4 Signal 120 0004 16878 v S GPLC_Exclusive_Owner Data 2 16856 Hex SINT 5 Signal 120 0005 5 GPLC Exclusive Ownerl Data 3 16 78 Hex SINT 6 Signal 120 0006 V GPLC Exclusive Ownerl Data 4 16 9a Hex SINT 7 Signal_121_0001 16800 z a p etme Comer Dat m c3 Hex um Exclusive Owner TE hoo i B SE 16800 TGPLE Exclusive Dwner O Data emen com eum a BEES Lun GPLC Exclusive Owner0 Data 0 16 59 Hex SINT 10_ EE Jone ELE Exclusive DwnerO Data T l6faf Hex SINT 11 Signal_121_0005 16800 gt GPLC Exclusive Qwner C Fees Set ABETE 12 Signal 121 0006 16H00 gt A Monitor Tags Edit Tags A Forcing Online Administrator For more information on forcing refer to the Using RSLogix Guard PLUS Software with GuardPLC Controllers Programming Manual publication 1753 PM001 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 227 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Remove or Inhibit a Connection You can remove a connection in RSLogix 5000 software by go
216. fety related Digital Outputs Safety Related Analog Inputs 1755 IF8 62 The status of digital outputs is indicated via status indicators when the controller or module is in Run mode GuardPLC 2000 controller outputs are rated at 2 A per point but the total load of all 16 outputs on a single module must not exceed 8 A If an overload occurs the affected outputs are turned off When the overload is eliminated the outputs are under the control of the controller and are energized based on the user program code An output is in the safe state when it is de energized Therefore outputs are switched off when a fault that affects the safe control of those outputs occurs For connection of a load the reference pole L of the corresponding channel group must be used Although L poles are connected internally to L on the power supply input it is strictly recommended to connect the L reference poles only to their corresponding output group EMC testing was performed in this manner TIP Inductive loads can be connected without a protection diode on the load because there is a protection diode located within the GuardPLC device However Rockwell Automation strongly recommends that a protection diode be fitted directly to the load to suppress any interference voltage A 1N4004 diode is recommended GuardPLC analog inputs provide for the unipolar measurement of voltages from 0 10V referenced to L A 10 kQ shunt is used for single e
217. fied for US and Canada CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity e EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A B amp C C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Attribute Controller User memory max Certified by T V 1753 L28BBBM and 1753 L28BBBP 250 KB user program memory 250 KB application data memory Watchdog time min 10 ms Safety time min 20 ms Current consumption 8 A max with max load 0 5 A idle current just running the controller Operating voltage 24V DC 15 20 Ws lt 15 from a power supply with protective separation conforming to IEC 61131 2 requirements GuardPLC Ethernet 4 x RJ 45 10 100BaseT with 100 Mbps with integrated switch interfaces Protection IP20 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Attribute Digital Inputs Number of inputs Specifications Appendix A 1753 L28BBBM and 1753 L28BBBP 20 not electrically isolated Voltage on state 15V 30V DC Current consumption 2 2 mA 15V on state 7 5 mA Q 30V Voltage off state 5V DC max Current consumption off state max 1 5 mA 1 mA Q 5V Switching point 7 5V
218. for all digital outputs 0x0001 Error in digital output range 0x0002 MEZ test of safety shutdown failed 0x0004 MEZ test auxiliary supply failed 0x0008 FTZ test of test pattern failed 0x0010 MEZ test of test pattern of the output switch failed 0x0020 MEZ test of test pattern of the output switch disconnection test of outputs failed 0x0040 MEZ test active disconnection via watchdog failed 0x0080 FTZ test of the period monitoring causes an error 0x0100 FTZ read back of the period monitoring causes an error 0x0200 All outputs switched off total current exceeded 0x0400 FTZ test 1 Temperature threshold exceeded 0x0800 FTZ test 2 Temperature threshold exceeded 0x1000 FTZ test Monitoring of auxiliary supply 1 Undervoltage 0x2000 FTZ test Monitoring of auxiliary supply 2 Undervoltage 0x4000 Flip flop of the supply monitoring 18V causes undervoltage 0x8000 MEZ test of the period monitoring causes an error Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 System Signal Variables Appendix B VOData Read Write Description 8 DOlxx Error Code Read Error code of digital outputs D0 ss DO xx Error Code Error code of digital outputs DO 0x0001 Error in the digital output module 0x0002 Output switched off due to overload 0x0004 Error reading back the activation of digital
219. forth e Is it necessary for each controller to communicate with all other controllers e Can some functions of the application be grouped and executed separately by an isolated group of controllers token group 175 Chapter 17 E Set Peer to Peer Controller Properties 176 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Right click Resource and choose Properties to set the timing parameters and switches according to the requirements of your application E RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help examplel 5 A Configuration a4 2 Resource 8 Programming Terminal E ES HH Network_1 E Token Group ii Token Group_1 Peer to Peer Editor About configuration Ibi Configuration Resource Type J ng Name Resource OOtC CS S System ID SRS 2 Oo Safety Time ms pon Watchdog Time ms 500 Main Enable Autostart Start Restart allowed Loading allowed Test Mode allowed Online Test allowed Forcing allowed Iv iv iv iv iv iv iv Vv Stop on Force Timeout max Com Time Slice ms 2o Code Generation Version s EI OK Cancel Apply Help The Communication Time Slice and Code Generation Version settings are needed for peer to peer network parameterization Communication Time Slice The Communication Time Slice is the time in milliseconds reserved for a controller to carry out and complete all communicat
220. ges with eyelets Refer to the illustration below Use bolts to mount the system to a back panel To mount the chassis flanges you will need four M8 size bolts with lock washer washer and nut with 13 mm 0 51 in max head diameter The bolts must be long enough to accept the chassis at its mounting place e Do not bend the chassis Bending will damage the chassis and or the backplane inside the GuardPLC 2000 controller e f the rear side of the chassis does not lie flat before the nuts are tightened use additional washers as shims so that the chassis does not bend when you tighten the nuts Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Installation Chapter 2 MPORTANT The chassis must be installed without any modules inserted Modules are sh e Disconnect the supply voltage before mounting the chassis e The chassis must be vertically mounted with the cooling fans on the lower side e Do not obstruct ventilation openings e Provide a gap of at least 100 mm 3 94 in above and below the device and at least 20 mm 0 79 in horizontally between devices own for illustration on ly The chassis mus be installed without any modules inserted
221. gital inputs on the GuardPLC 1800 controller are actually analog inputs with these configurable parameters 1 0 Data Read Write Description Module SRS Read Slot number System Rack Slot Module Type Read Module type 0x00D2 Digital input module MI24 8 FS 1000 for GuardPLC 1800 controllers 0x0096 Digital input module MI24 8 FS 2000 for GuardPLC 1800 controllers Module Error Code Read Error mask for the module 0x0000 1 0 processing may be running with errors 0x0001 No 1 0 processing CPU not in RUN 0x0002 No 1 0 processing during start up tests 0x0004 Manufacturing interface running 0x0010 No 1 0 processing due to incorrect configuration 0x0020 No 1 0 processing due to exceeded fault rate 0x0040 No 0 processing because configured module is not plugged in Al Error Code Read Error mask for all digital analog inputs 328 0x0001 Error in input range 0x0008 FTZ test walking bit of data bus faulty 0x0010 FTZ test error checking coefficients 0x0020 FTZ test operating voltages faulty 0x0040 A D conversion faulty DRDY_LOW 0x0080 MEZ test cross links of MUX faulty 0x0100 MEZ test walking bit of data bus faulty 0x0200 MEZ test multiplexer addresses faulty 0x0400 MEZ test operating voltages faulty 0x0800 MEZ test measuring system characteristic faulty unipolar 0x1000 MEZ test measuring system final values zero point faulty unipolar 0x8000 A D conversion faulty DRDY
222. gnal is 0 Configure the Profibus Master For both the Profibus output and input signals the Profibus ID of the first signal to communicate the number of signals and the number of bytes must be configured in the Profibus Master Configuration is accomplished via parameter data read from a GSD file The parameter data consists of 32 bytes in hexadecimal format which may be displayed in different ways depending upon the Profibus DP master software The GSD file for GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers is available on the RSLogix Guard PLUS software CD For more information on using Profibus protocol consult the online Help Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Appendix A GuardPLC 1200 Controller Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Specifications Attribute Controller User Memory Digital Inputs Number of inputs 1754 L28BBB 500 KB application code memory 500 KB application data memory 20 not electrically isolated from each other isolated from the backplane Nominal input voltage 24V DC On state voltage 10V DC 30V DC On state current 2 mA Q 10V DC 13 mA Q 30V DC Off state voltage max 5V DC max Off state current max Digital Outputs Number of outputs 1 5 mA max 1 mA 5V 8 not electrically isolated from each other isolated from the backplane Output voltage range 18 4V 26 8V e utput current 0 5 A per channel chan
223. gnostic C Start At Date or 7 01 2000 13 00 IV CPU Long Term Diagnostic C Stop At Date o 18 20381514 J COM Short Term Diagnostic Entries Per Diag 40 COM Long Term Diagnostic ka me Tuis cr A REG INFO 03 09 2004 11 54 55 227 CPU TRANSITION gt gt gt INITIALIZING to STOP CPU LT Ox2aa 682 INFO 03 09 2004 11 54 55 221 CPU State gt gt gt INITIALIZING CPU LT 0x171 383 0 INFO 03 03 2004 16 16 49 859 IOT gt gt gt State of current changed New state current 0x0000000D CPU LT Ox49e 1182 INFO 03 03 2004 16 16 49 842 IOT gt gt gt State of current changed New state current 0400000005 CPU LT 0 49e 1182 INFO 03 03 2004 16 16 49 670 IDT gt gt gt State of current changed New state current 00000001 CPU LT 0 49e 1182 Parameters INFO 03 03 2004 16 08 12 000 Received command gt gt Set system time lt lt done CPU 0x844 2116 01 31 2000 03 55 11 946 CFG Received command gt gt set Date Time 1078351632 secl 0 msll lt lt men a online This field Displays Level whether the entry is Info Warning or Error Date the date and time the entry was recorded Text a description of the cause leading to the entry Origin whether the cause of entry originated from the CPU or COM Type whether the entry is short term ST or long term LT Parameter information direct from the CPU or COM This data is only for error analysis by Rockwell Automatio
224. hannel is defined as a current output software configuration set to current output the output channel has to be short circuited Place jumpers into these outputs and tighten the screws If an unused channel is defined as a voltage output software configuration set to voltage output the unused outputs must be left open Short circuiting a unused voltage output may cause damage to the output Terminal Number Designation Function 1 01 Analog output 1 2 01 Group 1 reference pole 3 02 Analog output 2 4 02 Group 1 reference pole 5 03 Analog output 3 6 03 Group 2 reference pole 7 04 Analog output 4 8 04 Group 2 reference pole 9 shield connection signal ground 10 05 Analog output 5 11 05 Group 3 reference pole 12 06 Analog output 6 13 06 Group 3 reference pole 14 07 Analog output 7 15 07 Group 4 reference pole 16 08 Analog output 8 17 08 Group 4 reference pole 18 shield connection signal ground 67 Chapter 5 Wire the 1755 HSC Counter Modules 68 Wire the GuardPLC 2000 Controller and 0 This module contains 2 high speed counters and 4 digital outputs Although the 4 digital outputs are located on the 1755 HSC module they cannot be driven by counter presets The 4 digital outputs are driven by software just as on the 1755 IB24XOB16 module The nominal current per output is limited to lt 0 5 A Currents gt 0 5 A are
225. hapter 20 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner 4 Assign the signal to the Disable scanner signal in the signal connections dialog box by dragging and dropping it in the Signal field E Signal Connections Dutput Disable scanner BOOL True DisableScanner E Signal Editor New Signal Delete Signal Help fo ae Retain Constant Descrip True DisableScanner BOOL wi 2 False EnableScanner BOOL v If this signal is TRUE scanner functionality on the controller is disabled If this signal is FALSE scanner functionality is enabled Start RSLinx software Configure the EtherNet IP Driver 2 Click the Configure Driver button 3 From the list of Available Driver Types pull down menu choose the Ethernet IP Driver and click Add New A Enter a name for the new driver and click OK RSLinx Gateway File Edit View Communications Station DDE OPC Security Window Help SS Sg eil ei Configure Drivers m Available Driver Types Ethemet IP Driver E r Configured Drivers Choose a name for the new driver 15 characters maximum AB_ETHIP 4 Running AB_ETHIP 3 A B Ethemet RUNNING Running 252 Publication 1753 UMO001C EN P March 2010 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Chapter 20 5 In the Configure Drivers dialog box leave Browse Local Subnet checked and click OK RSLinx Gateway RSWho 1 d Fie Edit View Communications Station DDE OPC Security
226. have an extensive knowledge of the network in use and the operation of the parameters The following sections summarize the most important HH and peer to peer protocol parameters The HH protocol parameters are displayed in the HH Network Token Group dialog box They can be preset by choosing one of two profiles e Fast e Medium The profiles are explained in HH Network Profiles on page 161 TIP While manual changes to the parameters are possible by choosing the None profile keep in mind that ill considered changes can disable communication completely 153 Chapter 16 Peer to peer Communication Overview HH Network 1 Token Group Type ffokenGroup sst S S Name Token Group SS Profile Medum zl Token Group ID fi Protocol Mode Nomad 1 Link Mode isrocvc Response Time ms fe Bus Cycle Time ms ho Token Alive Timeout ms fo Primary Timeout ms bm o Secondary Interval ms bm Link Mode Extem estoke Response Time external ms fc DK Cancel Apply Help Token Group ID The Token Group ID is the numerical identifier for a token group Each token group must have its unique Token Group ID Protocol Mode Choose either Normal or RAW protocol mode Normal In Normal mode software token passing is ON meaning that access to the Ethernet network is controlled via token passing Only the controller that holds the token is allowed to access the network This mod
227. he multiple error occurrence time 24 hours the 1 0 module is permanently set to faulty and does not continue normal function after the disappearance of the error The I O module can only resume normal function after you cycle power or Stop Start the controller For faulty modules the controller uses safe values 0 LOW Controller 20 Upon the detection of an error the controller goes to Failure Stop and all output channels are set to the safe state value 0 In some cases in which a Failure Stop occurs a power cycle will not enable normal operation A manual reset from Stop to Run using RSLogix Guard PLUS software is required Cat 4 faults typically require manual resets An error in the user program is not considered an error of the controller The controller also monitors the timing and consistency of the e hardware self tests and software self tests of the controller e cycle of the user program e processing of the I O signals including I O tests e run cycle of the controller e transition from Run to Stop Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Safe States GuardPLC System Hardware Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Overview of Safety Controllers Chapter 1 Inputs The safe state of an input is indicated by a 0 signal being passed to the user program logic When a fault occurs the inputs are switched off 0 Outputs An output is in the safe state when it is de energized In
228. he same physical controller or I O module The certified function block has a pulse test fault output that can be used for status inside the user program The OS configured pulse test has an error code that can be monitored for pulse test status The OS configured pulse test occurs each cycle The pulse test certified function blocks allow you to configure the pulse test interval The duration of the pulse test is configurable when using the certified function blocks The pulse test can be disabled if necessary when using the certified function blocks The response to RPTO SPTO pulse test faults is user configurable See the Certified Function Block Safety Reference Manual publication 1753 RMO001 for more information on the Single Pulse Test Output SPTO and Redundant Pulse Test Output RPTO certified function blocks When the following occurs the faulted inputs are set to 0 a fault code is generated and the FAULT status indicator is on Short circuit occurs between two parallel connections Two connections are reversed Earth fault occurs on one of the lines only with earthed reference pole Line break or opening of the contacts for example when one of the E stop off switches is pressed in the example above the FAULT status indicator is on and the fault code is generated If multiple errors exist at the same time the error code is the TIP anes sum of the individual error codes See Appendix B for error code
229. ication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 291 Appendix A 292 Specifications 1753 IF8XOF4 Analog Combination Module Attribute GuardPLC Ethernet interfaces 1753 IF8XOF4 2 x RJ 45 10 100BaseT with 100 Mbps with integrated switch Operating voltage 24V DC 1596 42096 Wa 15 from a power supply with protective separation conforming to IEC 61131 2 requirements Response time gt 20 ms Battery backup none Current consumption 0 8 A max with max load idle current 0 4 A 24V Wiring category category 2 on communication ports signal ports and power ports Wire size 1 0 1 5 mm 16 AWG 0 14 mm 26 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 75 C 167 F or greater with 3 64 inch 1 2 mm insulation max Power 2 5 mm 14 AWG 0 34 mm 22 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 75 C 167 F or greater with 3 64 inch 1 2 mm insulation max Terminal block torque Analog Inputs Number of inputs 0 51 Nm 4 5 in Ib 8 not electrically isolated Input signal range nom Voltage 0 10V DC Current 0 20 mA Input signal range service Voltage 0 1 11V DC Current 0 4 23 mA Shunt resistor external 500 O for current input Impedance analog input gt 2 MQ Analog input signal source 500 Q impedance Input resolution 12 bits Effective resolution 9 bits 10V Sensor supply sel
230. ics P2PState Distibuted O HH State EnvironmentData OS IP Settings Serial No 98220061500059426011 CRC 16 7d1c90fe 16Hee351338 188370fd051 16 4d1d8029 16 fc1fe758 16 eb90c867 F fo BS beste This field Displays Serial Number The serial number of the communication module of the controller CPU OS The version of the operating system and the cyclic redundancy check of the operating system in hexadecimal Version 2 4 or later is required for Peer to Peer communication CPU Loader The version of the operating system loader and the cyclic redundancy check of the operating system loader in hexadecimal CPU BootLoader The version of the boot loader and the cyclic redundancy check of the boot loader in hexadecimal COM OS The version of the communication operating system and the cyclic redundancy check of the communication operating system in hexadecimal Version 2 4 or later is required for Peer to Peer communication COM OS Loader The version of the communication operating system loader and the cyclic redundancy check of the communication operating system loader in hexadecimal COM BootLoader The version of the communication boot loader and the cyclic redundancy check of the communication boot loader in hexadecimal Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 129 Chapter 14 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status HSP Protoco
231. ied in the Data Table Address The number of items to read or write 1 1000 The actual number of bytes transmitted is based on the data type of the file specified in the Data Table Address Port Number for PLC 5 controllers Channel for SLC 5 05 controllers Enter the Ethernet port number e The onboard PLC 5E port number is 2 e The EtherNet IP sidecar Ethernet port number 3 A TIP Enter 1 for the EtherNet IP port You cannot send a write message to an input assembly for example IN_120 Input versus output assemblies are from the perspective of the PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controller which sends the request to the GuardPLC controller TIP The GuardPLC controller supports only PLC 5 Typed Read and Typed Write commands No other PCCC commands work with the GuardPLC controller on the EtherNet IP network Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 211 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 6 Configure the Target Device the GuardPLC controller parameters Parameter PLC 5 Controller Settings SLC 5 05 Controller Settings Data Table Address This is the GuardPLC assembly object Enterthe This is the GuardPLC assembly object Enter the text name of the GuardPLC assembly proceeded text name of the GuardPLC assembly proceeded by a and enclosed in double quotes For by a and enclosed in double quotes For example BLK_120 8 W example BLK_121 6 W MultiHop Choose Yes to co
232. ignals by using the Signal Editor refer to the Using RSLogix Guard PLUS Software with GuardPLC Controllers Programming Manual publication 1756 PM001 Software Required to Configure EtherNet IP Communication This table lists the software required to make EtherNet IP connections Function Software communication RSLinx EtherNet IP Configuration RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP RSLogix Guard PLUS Program Management version 4 1 or later Programming Application Logic RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management version 7 56 10 or later 1 Expand the Resource folder in the project tree 2 Right click the Protocols folder under your Resource and choose New gt EtherNet IP Jz JRSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help Eg SDProject Configuration k 60000 Resource Distributed 1 0 otocols m i F Typelnstance Be Bin GuardPLC 160 AZ ASCII Protocol i B Programming Terminal Copy ED i MCP Configuration Paste Pl HSP Protocol Delete Interbus Master Print Hi Modbus Master pronerties Mg Modbus Slave 203 Chapter 18 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication View the Controller IP Settings 204 RSLogix Guard PLUS software creates an EtherNet IP branch under the Protocols folder where it adds the scanner and the adapter assemblies Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help Fg SDProject ze 44 Configuration Bi 60000 Resource few
233. ing offline right clicking the connection icon and choosing Delete Download to apply the changes You can also Inhibit a connection in Run mode by double clicking the connection icon and checking the Inhibit box on the Connection tab j In a Class 3 connection data is exchanged by using an explicit pen a Uiass onnection i Ce H message instruction MSG Every time the MSG is executed in the from a Logix Controller Logix controller data is exchanged with the GuardPLC controller Configure the GuardPLC Controller Assemblies In RSLogix Guard PLUS software set up the appropriate assemblies and connect the signals In this example we connected signals to the input and output assemblies as shown below Make sure the Run Idle header box is unchecked as Class 3 connections do not use a Run Idle header Tal RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help B Ta Demo Config 44 Configuration E Signal Connections Configuration 50000 Resource Protocols Ethernet IP 120 IN 120 New Signal Delete Signal New Offsets Help Dutput Info Size Offset Signal Signal_120_0001 Signal_120_0002 Signal_120_0003 Protocols H Signal_120_0001 Signal_120_0002 Signal_120_0003 fig I121 QUT 121 AdlliETypelnstance New Offsets Help Delete Signal New Signal Inputs Info Signal 121 0001 ES ee E Siena 2
234. input Z is used for a reset The counter inputs must be connected by using shielded twisted pair cables for each measurement input The shields must be connected at both ends The input lines should be no more than 500 m 1640 ft in length All reference L C or I depending on the controller connections are interconnected on the module in the form of common reference pole Cables are clipped to the shield contact plate when connecting counter inputs See the instructions for connecting shielded cabling to the shield contact plate on page 48 IMPORTANT Do not terminate unused high speed counter inputs Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire the GuardPLC 1600 Controller Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers Chapter 4 Input and output terminal connections for the GuardPLC 1600 controller are described below Safety related Digital Input Terminals DI LG 12 3 4 L 0000 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 14 15 16 17 18 DI DI LS 5 6 7 BL LS 91011 12 L OOOO OOOO 192021222324 25 26 27 28 29 30 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 DI DI LS 13 14 15 16 L LS 17 18 19 20 L 0000 0000 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Digital inputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function 13 LS Sensor supply
235. ion tasks in one CPU cycle The minimum Communication Time Slice depends on the number of communication connections n a controller has The minimum Communication Time Slice CTS min is calculated as follows For n lt 13 CTS nin n 13 2 nx 1 ms 4 ms For n gt 13 CTS in n gt 13 2 n x 1 3 ms Do not set the Communication Time Slice below the calculated value If the Communication Time Slice is too small it takes more than one CPU cycle to carry out the pending communication tasks Therefore more time is needed to complete the communication tasks which degrades performance and could result in a communication shutdown due to a communication timeout Receive TMO Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Chapter 17 The time actually needed for communication adds to the CPU cycle time A short Communication Time Slice limits the communication time to a low value This prevents the CPU cycle time from being noticeably influenced by network occurrences Although a Communication Time Slice well above the minimum value may result in cycle time on the local machine slowing down a bit if network traffic is heavy it is not necessarily negative If you are transferring safety I O over the network you need a Communication Time Slice high enough to guarantee that the communication are completed every cycle If it takes more than one cycle to read write safety I O your saf
236. iption PROGress On The upload of a new controller configuration is in progress Flashing The upload of a new operating system into the Flash ROM is in progress Off No upload of controller configuration or operating system in progress FORCE On The controller is executing a routine Run and Force mode is activated by the user Flashing The controller is in Stop but Forcing has been initiated and will be activated when the controller is started Off Forcing is OFF FAULT On The routine logic has caused an error The controller configuration is faulty The upload of a new operating system was not successful and the operating system is corrupted Flashing An error has occurred during a Flash ROM write cycle One or more 1 0 errors have occurred Off None of the above errors has occurred OSL Flashing Emergency Operating System Loader is active BL Flashing Boot Loader unable to load operating system or unable to start COMM operating system loader 144 Communication Status Indicators Status indicators on the controllers and I O modules display communication status information Safety related GuardPLC Ethernet Communication Communication via the GuardPLC Ethernet network is indicated via two small status indicators integrated into each RJ 45 connector socket Indicator State Description Green On Full duplex operation Flashing Collision Off Half duplex operation no collision Yellow On Connection establish
237. ith GuardPLC Controllers Programming Manual publication 1753 PMO001 for more information on defining signals Signal Connections Configuration 4 GPLC2000 0 x DERE IM New Connected Signal Delete Connected Sianal New Offsets Help Inputs Outputs The signal name is used only in printouts Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 269 Chapter 21 Communicate with ASCII Devices The offset in the ASCII output section is numbered based on bytes In the example the first signal uses bytes 0 1 2 and 3 The second signal uses bytes 4 and 5 However when you request these signals in the command string see ASCII Master Request below the first signal is always 0 the second signal The output section automatically sorts the name field based on alphanumerical order This does not automatically change the offsets but if you renumber after sorting the offsets will change and there is no undo feature This changes the order in which the signals are sent out the serial port Because names are used only in printouts you may want to enter these names in alphanumeric order to begin with For example signal 101 signal 102 signal 103 signal 104 and so forth The controller is a slave ASCII device and expects this protocol from If the ASCII master sends a request the slave can send a response The master request has this format each character is one byte
238. itoring on page 89 Inductive loads must be connected with a protection diode on the load in 2 pole operation 2 pole Configuration 1753 IB16X0B8 Actuator 4 2 88 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16X0B8 Module Chapter 8 3 pole Connection With Line Monitoring Two 2 pole channels can support dual channel devices with only a single reference connection If line monitoring is required the channels must be configured in pairs using the system parameter DOlxxlI xx in pairs There are four pairs allowed channels 1 and 2 channels 3 and 4 channels 5 and 6 and channels 7 and 8 Line monitoring is accomplished by switching off one channel while the second channel is tested for wiring faults A detected line fault is reported by the module s error codes See Appendix B for error code information 3 pole Configuration 1753 IB16X0B8 Load 1 4 drive valve IMPORTANT Inductive loads must be connected with a protection diode on the load for 3 pole connections 89 Chapter8 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16XOB8 Module Terminal Connections See the wire size and terminal torques specifications on page 290 Digital outputs are connected to these terminals 123 45 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1718 19 20 21 22 23 24 S S S S S S S S 1 14 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8
239. ix C Wiring Examples Introduction Topic Page GuardPLC 1600 Controller 332 GuardPLC 1800 Controller 333 1753 IB16 Modules 334 1753 0B16 Modules 335 1753 IB20X0B8 Module 336 1753 IB8XOB8 Modules 337 1753 IB16X0B8 Modules 338 1753 OW8 Modules 339 1753 IF8XOF4 Modules 340 GuardPLC 1200 Controller 341 1755 IB24X016 Digital Input Output Modules 342 1755 IF8 Analog Input Modules 343 1755 OF8 Analog Output Modules 343 1755 HSC High Speed Counter Module 344 IMPORTANT The wiring diagrams in this appendix detail only the wiring necessary to sense control the I O devices They do not show all of the wiring necessary to achieve Cat 3 or Cat 4 safety circuits For example monitoring feedback signals is not illustrated Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 331 Appendix C Wiring Examples GuardPLC 1600 Controller 332 24V DC Power a Supply COM Al A2 Safety Relay CH1 Op N 24VDC Power Supply COM 7 AM A Safety Relay DI CH2 ASCII HSP o COMM3 ji Hi 1 123455 0000 D0L 12 3 4L ea 7393012 0000 DO L 5 67 8L ea Pulse Tested Safety Input O mvoc O RUN ERROR PROG O FORCE O FAULT O osL O BL Q O Allen Bradle Guard PLC i pnis 1000 1753 L28BBBM 20 DC Inputs 8 DC Outputs Di Di
240. ix controller and read the data over this connection The data must be stored in the producing data tag in the Logix controller The data exchange is one sided from the Logix controller to the GuardPLC controller For exchanging data in both directions see Open a Class 1 Connection from a Logix Controller to the GuardPLC Controller on page 219 Create a Producing Data Tag 1 2 3 Type 1756 L61 ControlLagix556 Description Slot D Major Fault Minor Fault 260 Open your RSLogix 5000 project Click the Edit Tags tab Right click an empty line and choose Edit Tag Properties Scope Demo Config contrc v Show Show All v Sot TagName v Data Type INT 3 El Demo Config controller M Decimal P Tag Name V Alias For Base Tag Type Style MSp READ 7 MESSAGE MSG MSG H MSG DemoStatusBuffer a FMSG MSG Cancel HMSG HMSG ReadBul Tag Type C Base 1 ReadBul C Alias 3 ReadBul Produced consumers 3 ReadBu C Consumed Tu Beau Scope TIMER x Style c WiiteBul WriteBul Programmatically IOT Instruction Send Event Trigger to Consumers WriteBul WriteBufferl 49 INT 5 Decimal I H writeButfert51 DINT 3 Decimal E WriteBuffer153 DINT 3 Decimal IC WriteButfert 55 REAL 3 Float EH 1 j 5 gt A Monitor Tags Edit Tags 4 Enter the tag name Set the tag type as Produced The Number of Consumers parameter
241. l 3 03 and channel 4 04 Pair 3 channel 5 05 and channel 6 06 Pair 4 channel 7 07 and channel 8 08 1 xx affected output channel of the controller or module 2 LSLB Line Short Line Break Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 321 AppendixB System Signal Variables Digital Relay Output Parameters for 1753 OW8 Modules The 1753 OW8 module supports these digital output parameters 1 0 Data Read Write Description DO Error Code Read Error mask for all digital outputs 0x0001 Module error 0x0002 MEZ test safety switch 1 failed 0x0004 MEZ test safety switch 2 failed 0x0008 FTZ test of test pattern failed 0x0010 MEZ test of test of readback channels failed 0x0020 MEZ test active disconnection failed 0x0040 Error with initialization relays 0x0080 FTZ test error of relay voltage 0x0100 FTZ test of chip select cs signals failed 0x0400 FTZ test 1 Temperature threshold exceeded 0x0800 FTZ test 2 Temperature threshold exceeded 0x1000 MEZ test status of safety switch 1 0x2000 MEZ test status of safety switches 0x4000 MEZ test active disconnection by watchdog failed DO xx Error Code Read Error code of digital output channels 0x01 Error in the digital output module 0x04 Error reading back the digital outputs 0x10 Error reading back relay x 1 The channel is permanently deactivated 0x20 Error reading back relay x 2 The channel is per
242. l Tab PADT le 7 E Distributed 1 0 HH State Environment Data os IP Settings ProfibusMs ModbusMs License HSP Protocol Controller Scanner Name Scanner Id 0000_0000_0000_0000_0000 Controller Id HSP Signature Receive Timeout ms Receive Timeout ms Resend Timeout ms Status Connection State Bad Messages Frame No Resends Reconnections Last Avg Min Max Response Time ms ms ms ms Reset statistics This field Displays Name The Name of the controller Controller Id The SRS of the controller Controller Receive Timeout The time limit within which a message from the scanner must be answered Controller Resend Timeout The length of time the controller waits for an acknowledgement of a message before it resend the message Scanner Id HSP Signature A unique number that ensures that the controller s configuration data matches the scanner s configuration data Scanner Receive Timeout The time limit within which the scanner must receive a message from the controller Connection State The state of the connection e 0 closed e try open The active endpoint is attempting to open the connection e 2 connected The connection is established Normal data transfer time monitoring and other functions are occurring Frame No The number of the last frame sent Reconnections The number of connections since the last
243. l in which the Modbus master can communicate with a maximum of 255 slave devices The Modbus master initiates and controls all communication on the network Modbus RTU Slave protocol is available via the RS 485 Comm 1 port on GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers with catalog numbers ending in Mi Modbus RTU Slave protocol allows both the reading and writing of data For more information on the Modbus RTU Slave protocol see the Modbus Protocol Specifications available from www modbus org specs PROFIBUS DP Slave PROFIBUS DP protocol is a non safety related serial protocol designed for high speed data transmission between automation systems and distributed peripherals PROFIBUS DP slave protocol is available via the RS 485 Comm 1 port on GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers with catalog numbers ending in P PROFIBUS DP Slave protocol allows both the reading and writing of data 29 Chapter 1 Overview of Safety Controllers OPC Server The GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 series C GuardPLC 1200 and series C GuardPLC 2000 controllers are OPC clients An OPC server catalog number 1753 OPC is available from Rockwell Automation and lets personal computer applications read and write data to and from the GuardPLC controller non safety related communication only 30 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 2 Installation Introduction Topic Page General Safety 31 Mount the E
244. l input 1 3 2 Digital input 2 4 3 Digital input 3 5 4 Digital input 4 6 L Reference pole 7 LS Sensor supply for inputs 5 8 8 5 Digital input 5 9 6 Digital input 6 10 7 Digital input 7 11 8 Digital input 8 12 L Reference pole 13 LS Sensor supply for inputs 9 12 14 9 Digital input 9 15 10 Digital input 10 16 11 Digital input 11 17 12 Digital input 12 18 L Reference pole 19 LS Sensor supply for inputs 13 16 20 13 Digital input 13 21 14 Digital input 14 22 15 Digital input 15 23 16 Digital input 16 24 L Reference pole n Chapter 6 72 Wire 1753 1B16 1753 0B16 and 1753 IB20XOB8 Modules PO PULSE TEST L 12 3 4L OOOO 25 26 27 28 29 30 25 26 27 28 29 30 Pulse Test Sources The 1753 IB16 input module is equipped with four pulse test sources that can be software configured for pulse testing of safety inputs if required Due to minimal current capacity these pulse test sources cannot be used as outputs if they are not configured as pulse test sources Pulse test sources must not be used as safety related outputs A For information on configuring pulse test sources for line control see Chapter 11 See Appendix C for example wiring diagrams Pulse test sources are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function 25 L Reference pole 26 1 Pulse test source 1 27 2 Pulse test source 2 28 3 Pulse test source 3 29 4 Pulse test source 4
245. l input 6 30 02 Digital output 2 8 p Digital input 7 31 03 Digital output 3 9 18 Digital input 8 32 04 Digital output 4 10 LS Digital input supply 33 05 Digital output 5 for inputs 9 16 11 19 Digital input 9 34 06 Digital output 6 12 110 Digital input 10 35 07 Digital output 7 13 111 Digital input 11 36 08 Digital output 8 14 112 Digital input 12 37 L Reference pole for outputs 9 16 15 113 Digital input 13 38 09 Digital output 9 16 114 Digital input 14 39 010 Digital output 10 17 115 Digital input 15 40 011 Digital output 11 18 116 Digital input 16 41 012 Digital output 12 19 LS Digital input supply 42 013 Digital output 13 for inputs 17 24 20 117 Digital input 17 43 014 Digital output 14 21 118 Digital input 18 44 015 Digital output 15 22 119 Digital input 19 45 016 Digital output 16 23 120 Digital input 20 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 65 Chapter5 Wire the GuardPLC 2000 Controller and 1 0 This module features 8 single ended analog inputs or 4 differential analog inputs Two wire or four wire transmitters can be used The devices cannot be powered from the GuardPLC module An external power supply is required for all analog transmitters Single ended transmitters connect between the Ix and I terminals For example pins 1 and 2 3 and 4 5 and 6 Differential transmitters connect between Ix and x terminals For example pins 1 and 10 3 and 12 5 and 14 Wire the 1755 IF8 Analog Input Module I
246. lable Driver Types Ethemet IP Driver Add New r Configured Drivers Name and Description Status AB ETHIP 1 A B Ethernet RUNNING Running Configure ul WW Help Startup Start Stop Delete Create an EtherNet IP Project in RSLogix Programming Software Use RSLogix 5 programming software for PLC 5 controllers and RSLogix 500 programming software for SLC 5 05 controllers Follow these steps to create an EtherNet IP project in RSLogix software 1 Open the appropriate programming software 2 From the File menu choose New 237 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 238 3 Enter a name for the processor and choose the EtherNet IP driver as shown below PLC 5 Controller Select Processor Type 1747 L5S2B C 5 05 1747 L5S1B C 5 05 1747 1553 1747 1552 ns SLC 5 05 Controller 1747 L552 1747 L551 1747 L543C 1747 L542C 1747 L541C 1747 L543 1747 L542B 5705 5705 5 705 5705 5705 5705 5704 5704 5704 5704 5704 OS501 If your controller is a PLC 5 controller configure the controller a Expand the Project in the project tree right click Controller and choose Properties Controller Properties xi Poss Senger E Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 b On the Controller Communications tab choose the EtherNet IP communicatio
247. le is switched off all input channels transmit the value 0 to the logic Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Diagnostics Chapter 15 1755 OF8 Analog Output The 1755 OF8 analog output module AB AO has status indicators for Module Status Indicators S power supply e module status errs Indicator Status Description oe RUN ON green The module has the correct operating voltage 24V DC RUN ERR OFF The module has no power ERR ON red If the system is in Stop mode one or more of the inputs or outputs is faulty or the module is faulty Use the RSLogix Guard PLUS software to verify the location of the fault If the module is faulty replace the module immediately or the safety related operation of the GuardPLC 2000 controller is not maintained OFF The module is operational While the system is in RUN mode ERR is indicated continuously for both a module and an output channel error Depending on the type of error the module may switch only one pair of output channels 122 7 8 to the de energized state that is the value OV or 0 mA but the module continues operation with the remaining channels If the entire module is switched off all output channels are switched to the de energized state inati The 1755 HSC combination high speed counter and output module ombination High speed Counter and AB CO has status indicators for Output Module Status e power supply Indi
248. lexity of the logic and because of the Schedule Time Slice on the network load Rem Force Time the remaining force time in seconds time until forcing is deactivated Value is 0 when forcing is not active or disabled Faulty 1 0 Modules the number of faulty IO modules A fault can result from a hardware malfunction or from incorrect configuration Action the display of a Multi Control Panel command and command status for example Start Start OK The field is cleared after five seconds You can perform a Multi Control Panel command on one or more controllers To select a single controller follow these steps 1 Click the line number left of the controller name The boundaries of this line become thicker 2 Select more controllers by using one of the following methods e Hold down the CTRL key and click another line number to add that controller to your selection e Use the SHIFT key to select controllers from line x to line y e To select all the controllers click Select All B on the tool bar Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 133 Chapter 14 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status These commands can be carried out by using the Multi Control Panel buttons in the button bar Multi Control Panel Buttons Button Command Connect Connects the programming software to the selected controller s after loss of communication or manual disconnect After manual disconnect a new login
249. lication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Reset Pushbutton Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Installation Chapter 2 GuardPLC 1600 and 1800 controllers and distributed I O are equipped with a reset pushbutton Reset via the pushbutton is necessary if you forget the password to go online via the programming software e are unable to determine the IP address and SRS of the controller The pushbutton is accessible through a small round hole at the top of the housing approximately 4 5 cm 1 6 2 0 in from the left rim and recessed approximately 9 5 mm 0 375 in IMPORTANT Activate the reset pushbutton by using an insulated pin to prevent short circuits To reset press and hold the pushbutton while restarting the controller by cycling power Hold the reset pushbutton until the PROG status indicator stops flashing Pressing the Reset pushbutton during operation has no affect After a reset the IP address SRS and login accounts are temporarily reset to their default settings e IP 192 168 0 99 e SRS 60000 1 e Login Username Administrator Login Password none At the next power cycle these settings will be reset to the last values stored into Flash This means that either e the settings prior to the reset will be restored e if any settings were changed after the reset these new settings will still be in effect 43 Chapter2 Installation Notes 44 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 20
250. live Timeout ms Primary Timeout ms Secondary Interval ms Link Mode Extem Ir deg d Response Time extemal ms be n ok Geo A Be You must choose identical profiles for token groups that you want to interconnect If Link Mode External does not match communication between token groups is impossible Design the Logic Create Peer to peer Signals Signals are transferred among controllers over the peer to peer network Consider the following when creating signals e You can create as many signals as you need in the logic for all controllers e You can add signals anytime e Signals with the same name can be used on more than one controller without influencing each other LOCAL variable as long as they are not exchanged via network e Signals that are intended for network exchange must have the same name on the participating controllers Whether a signal is written to or read from the network is defined in the Peer to Peer Editor as explained in Configure Peer to peer Communication on page 184 180 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Chapter 17 Use Peer to peer System Signals The status of the peer to peer communication as well as some timing parameters can be evaluated in the user program by means of system signals Furthermore the user program can control how a peer to peer connection is setup Input System Signals Ki P2P System Signals GPLC_1200_1 P2P GPL
251. load harsh Cleanroom f Es environmental conditions or network defects Characteristics of the communication path Minimum delays ResponseTime xReceiveTMO 2 otherwise ERROR Responselime manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor ReceiveTMO manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor Variables WDZ manually set in the controller properties Watchdog Time Suitable HH network Fast profile Peer to Peer parameter presets e QueueLen 2 e Communication Time Slice large enough to process and send all data defined for transmission in one CPU cycle e ResendTMO if ReceiveTMO gt 2 x WDZ then ResendTMO ReceiveTMO 2 or ResendTMO ResponseTime whichever is greater if ReceiveTMO lt 2 x WDZ then ResendTMO ReceiveTMO e AckTMO 0 e ProdRate 0 1 The network can be shared with other applications if sufficient bandwidth is provided Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 169 Chapter 16 Peer to peer Communication Overview Peer to Peer Profile Il Fast amp Noisy This profile provides fast data throughput for applications that require fast data update rates It is good for applications that require the shortest feasible Worst Case Reaction Time where minor loss of messages can be corrected Fast amp Noisy Characteristics Minimum Ethernet network requirements 100 Mbit technology 100 Base TX if HH network profile Fast amp Cleanroom is selected 10 Mbit te
252. m2 comm3 Choose comm for GuardPLC 1600 or 1800 controllers Baud Rate the data transfer speed in bits s Choose from a pull down menu of predefined values between 300 and 115 200 bps The default baud rate is 9600 bps Connect Signals The Profibus DP Slave protocol lets you read data from the GuardPLC controller and write data to the GuardPLC controller but none of this data can be used for safety functions 280 Publication 1753 UMO001C EN P March 2010 Communicate with Modbus and Profibus Devices Chapter 22 Inputs are signals sent from the Profibus master to the controller slave Outputs are signals sent from the controller slave to the master 1 Expand Protocols right click the Profibus dp Slave icon and choose Connect Signals j RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help S Fg examplet es Current baud rate UDINT bh Size Otisa Data valid POOL Profibus dp Slave Error code DWORD 4 4 BT ypalnstance Master ID usmr h ho BIO GuardPLC 1600 New E B Programming Terminal GC ES HH Network 1 iXX Token Group D LZ Token Group_1 olocolState BYTE USINT If you want to Click this tab create a new signal New Connected Signal renumber offsets sequentially for all signals New Offsets delete the selected signal Delete Connected Signal 2 Edit the signals you want to receive or send e Use the Inpu
253. makethe best use of these tools Foranadditionalleveloftechnical phone supportfor installation configuration and troubleshooting we offerTechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support Installation Assistance If you experience an anomoly within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that s contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone en html Canada or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have an
254. manently deactivated 0x80 Channel cannot be activated after deactivation by e user program e forcing e channel module failure DO xx Value Write Output value for DO channels 0 Output not powered 1 Output activated 1 xx affected output channel of the controller or module 322 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 System Signal Variables Appendix B Analog Input Signals for 1753 IF8XOF4 Modules The 1753 IF8XOF4 module supports these analog input signals 1 0 Data Read Write Description Module SRS Read Slot number System Rack Slot Module Type Read Module type 0x001E Module Error Code Read Error mask for the module 0x0000 IO processing may be running with errors 0x0001 No 1 0 processing CPU not in RUN 0x0002 No I O processing during start up tests 0x0004 Manufacturing interface running 0x0010 No 0 processing due to incorrect configuration 0x0020 No I O processing due to exceeded fault rate 0x0040 80 No I O processing because configured module is not plugged in Al Error Code Read Error mask for all analog inputs 0x0001 Module error Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 0x0004 MEZ test time monitoring of conversion 0x0008 FTZ test walking bit of data bus faulty 0x0010 FTZ test Operating voltages faulty 0x0020 MEZ test active disconnection failed 0x0040 A D conversion faulty 0x0080 MEZ test cross links of
255. mended setting If Start Restart allowed is disabled you cannot start a routine manually You can only start a routine by restarting the controller or applying power to the controller On Enabled Loading allowed whether you can load new configuration information to the controller If Loading allowed is disabled no new configuration can be loaded into the controller This prevents a user from overwriting the current routine On Enabled Test Mode allowed whether you can freeze the routine If Test Mode allowed is enabled the routine currently running on the controller can be frozen This allows the Test Mode with Single Cycle function You are not allowed to freeze a routine in standard operation this would be non safe operation Off Disabled Online Test allowed whether you can monitor the Function Block code online Off Disabled Forcing allowed whether you can force signals If Forcing allowed is enabled you can force the signals in the controller If Forcing allowed is disabled you can still display the force editor but the forcing functions are locked Off Disabled Stop on Force Timeout whether to stop forcing when the force time expires If Stop on Force Timeout is enabled the controller terminates execution of the routine after the user set force time expires All outputs go to LOW If Stop on Force Timeout is disabled the controller continues executing the routine with the p
256. messages that may be transmitted without having to wait for an acknowledgement It corresponds to the network bandwidth and delay QueueLen cannot be entered manually but is set along with a profile in the Peer to Peer Editor 159 Chapter 16 160 Peer to peer Communication Overview Production Rate ProdRate ProdRate is the minimum time interval between two data messages The purpose of ProdRate is to limit the amount of data to a magnitude that can be transported to the recipient without overloading a slow communication channel This results in an even load on the communication channel and avoids the reception of outdated data TIP A production rate of 0 means that a data message can be transmitted with each cycle of the user program Watchdog Time WDZ Watchdog Time is the maximum permissible duration of a Run cycle on a PES The Run cycle depends upon the complexity of the user program and the number of peer to peer connections Worst case Reaction Time Tg Worst case Reaction Time is a safety relevant application parameter It is the time between the occurrence of a physical input signal change at PES and the corresponding physical output signal change at PES Worst case Reaction Time Tp lt t4 t2 tz ty Worst case Reaction Time Variables Variable Definition t The worst case time for the user program on PES to process the input signal and prepare the data for transmission 2 x WDZ PES
257. mprised of at least two controllers to carry out token passing otherwise the controller configuration is erroneous Stop Invalid Configuration Minimum Ethernet Network Requirements for Medium amp Cleanroom Requirement Definition Medium 10 Mbps technology 10 Base T Hubs are used within the token groups and LAN switches connect one token group to another Clean No loss of data due to traffic overload harsh environmental conditions or network defects IMPORTANT The network must not be shared with other applications Do not use more than one programming terminal recommended programming terminals increase network traffic but do not participate in token passing Using LAN Switches and Hubs When using a hub instead of a LAN switch to interconnect two or more controllers of the same token group network access within the token group is no longer conducted by the hardware but must be managed by token passing Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Peer to peer Communication Overview Chapter 16 Each token group handles its token passing individually depending on user settings CPU cycle times network topology and so forth This means that for two or more token groups which are exchanging data Token passing is not synchronized resulting in a loss of messages between the Token Groups IMPORTANT To minimize loss of messages only one controller in a token group is allowed to exchange data with exactly
258. n I Open Ctrleo Elz ave e Device Usages Address Current Addre Generate Report Connection Print Setup Consume Produce Print Preview E print Ctrl P 1 EtherNet enet 2 ControlNet xc 3 E ControlNet xc 4 DeviceNet dnt Exit zx KI Programmable Logic Controller A Deckel fuitamation miccellaneei ic 3 To go online click the online button or from the Network menu choose Online Your EtherNet IP devices appear in the graphic view EtherNet IP RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP File Edit View Network Device Diagnostics Tools Help SS V i Park ES GE amp m al r t Worst Case Device Usages Edits Enabled Address Current Minimum CPU Maximum CPU Device Usage IX Hardware xi EI EtherNetIP Category VT Communication Adapter Cl DSI to EtherNet IP CT Human Machine Interface VT Modular DPI Devices C Programmable Logic Controller CT Rockwell Automation miscellaneous Cl SCANport Drives on EtherNet IP Address Current Current Connection Devices not included 0 Consume Produce 1755 A10 A PointlO 4 Slot Chassis GuardPLC 1600 1755 A1D A 100 100 93 10 100 100 93 99 100 100 93 137 Vendor Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation Reliance Electric Cl Rockwell Automation Entek Ird Intl VT Rockwell Sottware Inc 254 TIP You may see icons overlaying the devices when you first go online This is normal and only indi
259. n 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Attribute Digital Inputs Number of inputs 1753 IB16 16 not electrically isolated Specifications Appendix A 1 Signal Voltage 15V 30V DC Current consumption 2 2 mA Q 15V 0 Signal Voltage max 5V DC Current consumption max 1 5 mA 1 mA 5V Switching point typically 7 5V Switching time typically 250 us Sensor supply Pulse Test Sources Number of pulse test sources 4 x 19 2V 40 mA 24V short circuit proof 4 not electrically isolated Output voltage range approximately 24V Output current 60 mA Current load min none Response to overload Environmental Conditi Temperature operating 4x 2 19 2V short circuit current 60 mA 24V ons 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Mechanical Dimensions Width 152 mm 5 99 in including housing screws Height 114 mm 4 49 in including latch Depth 66 mm 2 60 in including grounding bolt Weight 0 7 kg 1 54 Ib Certifications when product is marked c UL us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity e EN61131 2 Programm
260. n data sent with the connection establishment request Input Address The Input Address is the offset in words of the GuardPLC input scanner assembly where the GuardPLC controller will store the input data from the target device Enter the Input Address Output The Output Address is the offset in words of the GuardPLC controller s scanner output assembly buffer where the Address GuardPLC controller will store its data before sending it to the target device in this case the FLEX 1 0 module 258 7 Once you have set these properties click the OK button to apply the changes RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software displays these changes in blue under the I O module entry Y Address 100 100 93 99 GuardPLC 1600 Scanlist Configuration DEI File Edit View Network Device Connection Help LEM llo this s aa he I Edits Enabled Current Pending Current Pending Entries Used Oof 32 2 of 32 Data Input File Usage 0 00 0 07 Data Output File Usage 0 00 0 01 Resource U GR Hi 4 gt Ntode Memory Usage Address Slot Parameters Device Name Connection Name RPI ms Input Address Input Size words O O Direct Input Only Direct Exclusive 8 Repeat steps 5 7 for all target I O modules and press the Save button to download the connection configuration to the GuardPLC controller If you get a Type error and the save procedure is aborted it is most likel
261. n driver you configured in RSLinx software and click OK Controller Properties x General Password Controller Communications Driver Route Processor Node Decimal 1 a8 rop X fliocal fi Octal Last Configured System AB ETHIP 1 Node 1d local Reply Timeout fo Sec Who Active D EE for Comms Path Cancel Apply Help Add a Message Instruction to Your Application Program Logic 1 To allocate a MSG instruction control block right click Data Files and choose New gt Message SLC 5 05 Controller Create Data File x PLC 5 Controller Create Data File x Fie a File 10 Type Message z Type Integer b2 Name MSG Name usa 1 Description Elements fro ast Attributes Debug ControlNet Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global C Local Tio Fite E E Privileges Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 MRM Ww VR MY Ww MRM WwW VR MW Desc Elements rod ast Attributes Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope ZS Global Local Tio File E Protection C Constant C Static None T Memory Module Web View Disable OK Cancel Help OK Cancel Help For the SLC 5 05 controller the number of elements must be at least 93 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 239 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter The MSG control block appears in the project tree under Data Files
262. n representatives TIP You can export diagnostic data to a text file for storage by choosing Export from the Diagnostic menu 140 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Diagnostics Chapter 15 Choose Online or Offline Diagnostics When you start the diagnostics window Diag Online is automatically activated This signals that you want all diagnostics data transferred from the controller to the diagnostics buffer in RSLogix Guard PLUS software As long as Diag Online is active new diagnostic data is transferred to this buffer as it becomes available and if the filter you selected applies Diag Offline disconnects communication with the controller This ends the transmission of diagnostic data from the controller to the diagnostics buffer in RSLogix Guard PLUS software Filtering Diagnostic Data Choose from these filters to determine what diagnostic data to display Filter Description Start At Oldest Entry Displays all the data from the RSLogix Guard PLUS software buffer starting with the oldest entry The number of lines shown in the table depends on the Entries Per Diag Enable Sorting defaults to disabled so that the data appears in chronological order from oldest to newest Start At Newest Entry Displays all the data from the RSLogix Guard PLUS software buffer starting with the newest entry The number of lines shown in the table depends on the Entries Per Diag Enable Sorting defaults to disabled so that th
263. n save depends on the controller Diagnostics as shown below Type of Data GuardPLC 1200 GuardPLC 1600 and 1800 GuardPLC 2000 CPU COM CPU COM CPU COM number of short 300 700 300 700 300 700 term entries number of long 1000 200 1000 200 1000 200 term entries If the memory for short term entries is full and the controller needs to log another entry the controller deletes the oldest entry If the memory for the long term entries is full and the controller needs to add a new entry the controller deletes the oldest entry only if that entry is more than 7 days old Otherwise the new entry is rejected and a message is displayed in the diagnostics window Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 139 Chapter 15 Diagnostics To display the diagnostics window follow these steps 1 Select the Resource and from the Online menu choose Diagnostics If the Control Panel is already open you do not have to login Otherwise the software asks you to log in Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help B Ta Projectl El Configuratic Force Editor Bk 60000 Control Panel Access Management Communication Settings Multi Control Panel 2 After you successfully log in the software displays the controller diagnostics Kibiagnostic GPLC1600 1 AEE Diagnostic Help je g C Start At Oldest Entry Sort Start At Newest Entry CPU Short Term Dia
264. n the multiple error occurrence time error in multiplexer crosslink 0x0100 Within the multiple error occurrence time data bus walking bit error 0x0200 Within the multiple error occurrence time multiplexer address error 0x0400 Within the multiple error occurrence time supply voltages error 0x0800 Within the multiple error occurrence time error in characteristic curve Unipolar mode 0x1000 Within the multiple error occurrence time limit values zero point error Unipolar mode 0x2000 Within the multiple error occurrence time error in characteristic curve Differential mode 0x4000 Within the multiple error occurrence time limit values zero point error Differential mode 0x8000 Error in A D conversion DRDY LOW Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 309 AppendixB System Signal Variables 1 0 Data Read Write Description Al Ox State Read Error mask for analog input channels 0x00 No error detected 0x01 Error in analog input channel 0x02 Invalid measurement values 0x04 A D converters faulty 0x08 Measurement values are not within the safety accuracy 0x10 Measurement value overflow 0x20 Channel not in use 0x40 Addressing error of the two A D converters Al 0x Used Write Configuration of analog input channel 0 not used 1 used AllOx Value Read Analog value of input channel WORD 10V 10V 1000 1000 Board SRS Read System Rack Slot Board Typ
265. n the same token group as the Primary The Secondary supervises the Primary Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Peer to peer Protocol Parameters Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Peer to peer Communication Overview Chapter 16 All peer to peer protocol parameters are displayed in the Peer to Peer Editor With the exception of the ResponseTime and the ReceiveTMO which have to be configured by the user all other peer to peer protocol parameters are automatically preset with the selection of a peer to peer profile See Configure Peer to peer Communication on page 184 for detailed instructions on how to configure the peer to peer protocol Message Response Time ReponseTime ResponseTime is the user configurable time it takes to receive an acknowledgement of a sent message from the recipient The ResponseTime is not a freely configurable parameter but results from the physical conditions of the communication path and the configuration of the network protocol Because the ResponseTime influences the speed of message exchange a test run is recommended to investigate network timing Use the P2P Status tab in the Control Panel to display the minimum maximum and average ResponseTime Statistics P2P Status HH Status Environment Op Rise last ms AspT ava ms FispT min ms Gest max ms a a RI NNI 23 EST Ek Send Feet E ees nti 157 Chapter 16 158 Peer to peer Communication Overvie
266. n use these standard assemblies or create your own by using RSLogix Guard PLUS software Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 199 Chapter 18 200 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication The GuardPLC controller can be used as a Class 1 adapter a Class 3 adapter or as an unconnected adapter to communicate to Logix controllers PLC 5 or SLC 5 05 controllers or PanelView Standard terminals See Chapter 19 for information on using the GuardPLC controller as an adapter Class 1 Connections GuardPLC assemblies may have various sizes and have signals of different types associated with them An EtherNet IP scanner can establish Class 1 connections to the GuardPLC controller to read from the input assemblies and write to the output assemblies When establishing a Class 1 connection the data is addressed by using the unique instance number of the assembly object This is similar to establishing a Class 1 connection to an I O module but different than establishing a Class 1 connection to Logix controllers where data is addressed by a name Class 3 Connections An EtherNet IP scanner may be used to establish Class 3 connections to the GuardPLC controller The Class 3 connection can be used to send explicit requests to any of the implemented objects including Identity Assembly PCCC Connection Configuration Port TCP IP and Ethernet Link Connected explicit requests may be used to read assembly data from an input adapter assembly
267. name and password on the login dialog box x com feo sl IP Address iE no GO du ou Ex System Rack E COo wj User name fAdministratol Password Access type admmsuao vr Cancel Help TIP You can use the Ctrl A shortcut to enter the default username Administrator and password 2 Once online from the Control Panel Extra menu choose Reboot Resource as shown below J Extra Help Set Date Time Change System ID Device Settings Update OS Load Resource Configuration from Flash Clear Resource Configuration Set Backplane Type TIP A Reboot Resource can be initiated only when the controller is in Failure Stop mode If you attempt a restart while the controller is in any other mode an error message appears Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Controller Configuration and Modes of Operation Chapter 13 If a routine has already been loaded in the controller when Failure_Stop occurs the controller goes to Stop Valid_Configuration after booting If Autostart Enable is activated the routine starts up automatically If a routine has not been loaded in the controller when Failure_Stop occurs the controller goes to Stop Invalid_Configuration after booting TIP If the GuardPLC controller is in Stop Invalid Configuration after booting you need to update the SRS From the Extra menu choose Change System ID SRS Enter the SRS and click OK A brand new GuardPLC 1
268. nd drag and drop it in the Node Editor I RsLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help E E CATAE stop A Configuration E BR 4 Robot KI RobotB 1 B 3 RobotC Programming Terminal ES HH Network_1 Token Group 1 Node Editor HH Network_1 Token Group_1 Configure Token Group s 1 Right click the token group and choose Properties 2 In the HH Network Token Group dialog box choose a profile For a description of the HH Network profiles see page 161 In general Fast works with most network topologies 3 Enter a Token Group ID The Token Group ID must be greater than 0 If you create more than one token group each token group must have a unique ID 4 Do not make changes to the other settings in this dialog box See page 153 for the description of the HH protocol parameters Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 179 Chapter 17 Configure Peer to Peer Communication TET Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help FE CAT4Estop Node Editor HH Network 1 Token Group 1 4 Configuration Delete Node bi 2 RobotB fr oken Group_1 b 3 RobotC f dB Programming Terminal Fas zi 5 ES HH Network_1 Token Group ID Boo oP Token Group 1 Protocol Mode Flaw Link Mode TCS direct EET Response Time ms Bus Cycle Time ms Token A
269. nde bsp deemed Token Cycle Time This is the maximum permissible time for one token cycle In other words the time within which a controller expects the token 155 Chapter 16 156 Peer to peer Communication Overview The Token Cycle Time depends on the number of controllers in a token group and can be read on the HH Status tab of the Control Panel las avg mars min Token Cycle Time 11 8 36 5 Token Alive Timeout The current holder of the token must send a token alive message to the Primary controller within this time period or the Primary assumes the token is bad If the token alive message is missing a new token is created by the Primary Primary Timeout Time within which the Primary expects a check for liveliness from the Secondary controller If the liveliness check fails to appear the Primary assumes that the present Secondary is disconnected In this case the Primary selects a new Secondary Secondary Interval Time after which the Secondary checks the Primary for liveliness The Secondary Interval is less than the Primary Timeout Link Mode Extern Same as Link Mode above except for the connection is to a controller in another Token Group Response Time Extern Same as Response Timeout above except for the connection is to a controller in another token group 1 The Primary is the controller that generates and supervises the token 2 The Secondary is a controller i
270. nded voltage signals With a 500 Q shunt resistor currents from 0 20 mA can also be measured The feeder lines should be no more than 300 m 984 ft in length Use shielded twisted pair cables with the shields connected at one end for each measurement input See the instructions for connecting shielded cabling to the shield contact plate on page 48 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire the GuardPLC 2000 Controller and UU Chapter 5 Unused analog inputs must be short circuited Place wire jumpers to ground on any inputs that are not used 1755 IF8 High speed Counter The 1755 HSC module features inputs for high speed counting up to 1 Module 1755 HSC MHz These counters are 24 bit and are configurable for either 5V or 24V DC The counters can be used as a counter or as a decoder for 3 bit Gray Code inputs As a counter input A is the counter input input B is the counter direction input and input Z is used for a reset The counter inputs must be connected by using shielded twisted pair cables for each measurement input The shields must be connected at both ends The input lines should be no more than 500 m 1640 ft in length All reference L C or I depending on the controller connections are interconnected on the module in the form of common reference pole Cables are clipped to the shield contact plate when connecting counter inputs See the instructions for connecting shielded cabling to the shield conta
271. necting sensors To create a safety state in the event of a fault the input signals revert to the de energized state 0 The external line is not monitored but a wire break is interpreted as a safe 0 signal Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 71 Chapter 7 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB8X0B8 Module Safety related Digital I Outputs 78 Terminal Connections 195412 34L LS 5 6 7 8L p OOOO D OOOO 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 See the wire size and terminal torques specifications on page 290 Digital inputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function 19 LS Sensor supply for inputs 1 4 20 1 Digital input 1 21 2 Digital input 2 22 3 Digital input 3 23 4 Digital input 4 24 L Reference pole 25 LS Sensor supply for inputs 5 8 26 5 Digital input 5 27 6 Digital input 6 28 7 Digital input 7 29 8 Digital input 8 30 L Reference pole Surge on Digital Inputs An EN 61000 4 5 surge impulse can be read as a short duration HI signal in some modules To avoid an error either e install shielded input lines to prevent effects of surges in the system e implement software filtering in the user program A signal must be present for at least two cycles before it is evaluated The module has 8 positive switching digital outputs that switch 24V DC and two negative switching digital outputs that switch
272. nel 1 6 2 A per channel channel 7 8 Surge current per channel 1 A for 10 ms Q 1 Hz channel 1 6 4 A for 10 ms 1 Hz channel 7 8 Minimum current load 2 5 mA per channel On state voltage drop max 2 0V DC 500 mA Off state leakage current max 1 mA per channel Temporary overload Output switches off until overload is eliminated Counters Number of counters 2 Inputs per counter 3 Input A Input B Z Gate Reset Counter resolution 24 bit Input frequency max 100 kHz in counter modes input A Trigger Negative edge Edge steepness 1 V us Duty cycle 50 100 kHz Input voltages 4 5V 5 5V for 5V input 13V 26 4V for 24V input Input current Typ 15 mA x3 mA 283 AppendixA Specifications GuardPLC 1600 Controller 284 Attribute Power Supply Supply Voltage L 1754 L28BBB 24V DC Supply voltage range 20 4V DC 28 8V DC 10 ms buffer ripple 1596 Power rating max Environmental Conditions Temperature operating 8 A 1 A to run the controller 7 A for inputs and outputs 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage Mechanical Dimensions Width x height x depth 40 85 C 40 185 F without back up battery 160 mm x 112 mm x 90 mm 6 3 in x 4 41 in x 3 54 in Weight 680 g 1 5 Ib Certifications when product is marked c UL us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certi
273. nfigure MultiHop operation The Choose Yes to configure MultiHop operation The Local Remote parameter disappears and the EtherNet IP Address field disappears and the MultiHop tab becomes available MultiHop tab becomes available PLC 5 Controller SLC 5 05 Controller 4 MSG Rung 2 0 MG9 0 F MSG Rung 2 0 N10 0 General MuttiHop General MultiHop gt This Controller r Control Bits This PLC 5 p Control Bits Communication Command PLCS Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Communication Command PLC 5 Typed Read Ignore if timed out T0 0 Data Table Address Tobe retied NF 0 Data Table Address N7 22 To be retried NR o Size in Elements 4 Awaiting Execution Ew 0 Size in Elements Awaiting Execution Ew 0 Channel 1 Continuous Run CO o Port Number Continuous Run CO o Target Device M S E lessage done SE Error ER o Message Timeout 10 Message Ti itting ST 0 get Device Mes je done DN 0 sBLK Prem anl sag Data Table Address 8LK 12 6 Ww Message Enabled EN D Data Table Address BLK 120 8 w itti 1 S Message Transmitting ST p Waiting for Queue Space o MultiHop BS Message Enabled EN 0 Local Remote MuliHop Yes r Error z Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Code Hex 0 In the example a
274. ng Voltage 24V DC 15 20 ripple lt 15 Current consumption 0 1 A 24V DC without load 0 8 A 3 3V DC 0 1 A 5V DC Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 85 F Weight 260 g 0 57 Ib Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A B amp C C Tick Australian Radiocommunication Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Certified by T V Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 GuardPLC 2000 Power Supply Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Attribute Supply voltage Specifications Appendix A 1755 PB720 24V DC Supply voltage range 20 4V DC 28 8V DC 10 ms buffer ripple 1596 External fusing 30 A IEC This module has no overcurrent protection Outputs 3 3V DC 10 A 5V DC 2 A Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage 40 60 C 40 140 F with battery 40 85 C 40 185 F without battery Weight 820 g 1 80 Ib Certifications when product is marked U
275. ng with reduced voltage signal to 0 FALSE See Required Signals for Line Monitoring on page 93 91 Chapter 8 92 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16X0B8 Module Line Monitoring with Reduced Voltage for Resistive Capacitive Loads For line monitoring a 10V signal is switched on in the output circuit for the duration of the monitoring time This kind of line monitoring is designed for resistive or resistive capacitive loads There is no short circuit detection for these types of loads To configure this type of line monitoring e set a DO LSLB period and DO LSLB time e set the output DO xx 2 pole signal to 1 TRUE e set the output DO xx LSLB monitoring signal to 1 TRUE e set the output DO xx LS monitoring with reduced voltage signal to 1 TRUE See Required Signals for Line Monitoring on page 93 During the 10V test to detect a line break DO is at 24V and DO is at 14V If DO is shorted to OV DC then there is 24V at the output for the duration of the monitoring time which could turn on the actuator During line monitoring time a 10V signal is impressed at the load relay actuator This reduced voltage level 10V of line monitoring is normally not enough to switch the load Period and Monitoring Times You must set a period and monitoring time for line control These configured times affect all channels that are set for line monitoring During monitoring time readbacks occur at intervals of 1
276. nntanan 215 Chapter 19 216 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 3 Type the name for the input assembly in the Name field The Assembly ID can be any number from 120 183 All Assembly IDs under the same EtherNet IP folder must be unique If the Run Idle header box is checked the assembly uses a Run Idle header This four byte header contains Run Idle information about the GuardPLC controller that can be used in the scanner s application logic The GuardPLC controller sends this Run Idle header along with the data in the assembly when it is read Usually this box should be unchecked Normally the Run Idle header will always be used for output assemblies and sometimes used for input assemblies However this may not hold true for connections to non Rockwell Automation scanners If the Run Idle header is checked the input data size specified by the scanner should be four bytes larger than the actual GuardPLC controller input assembly size This is necessary because the input Run Idle header unlike the output one is not stored in the GuardPLC assembly it is automatically added by the GuardPLC controller when it sends the packet So if both input and output assembly Run Idle flags are checked the input size specified by the scanner should be four bytes larger than the target assembly size and the output size specified by the scanner should be four bytes smaller than the target assembly size Configure the Adap
277. nto the EEPROM You must have Administrator access to be able to set the backplane type To set the backplane type follow these steps 1 Load a project that is consistent with the connected controller type ATTENTION If you try to write the backplane type of a controller such as a GuardPLC 1200 controller with the backplane type of another controller such as a GuardPLC 2000 controller the overwritten controller can no longer be used and must be repaired by the manufacturer 2 Choose Set Backplane Type The backplane type is automatically entered into the dialog box 3 Change the Backplane Version to 0 4 Click OK to confirm the change Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 137 Chapter 14 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Notes 138 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 15 Diagnostics Introduction Topic Page View Controller Diagnostics 139 GuardPLC 1200 Controller Status Indicators 142 GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 Controllers and GuardPLC 143 Distributed 1 0 GuardPLC 2000 Controller Status Indicators 145 1755 IB24X0B16 Module Status Indicators 147 1755 IF8 Analog Input Module Status Indicators 148 1755 OF8 Analog Output Module Status Indicators 149 1755 HSC Combination High speed Counter and Output Module Status 149 Indicators View Controller The controller stores short term and long term diagnostics data The number of entries the controller ca
278. ntrollers Chapter 4 Terminal Number Designation Function 1 Not Used None 2 n Digital input 1 3 12 Digital input 2 4 I3 Digital input 3 5 14 Digital input 4 6 15 Digital input 5 7 le Digital input 6 8 H Digital input 7 9 18 Digital input 8 10 19 Digital input 9 11 110 Digital input 10 12 AN Digital input 11 13 112 Digital input 12 14 113 Digital input 13 15 114 Digital input 14 16 115 Digital input 15 17 116 Digital input 16 18 117 Digital input 17 19 118 Digital input 18 20 119 Digital input 19 21 120 Digital input 20 22 Reference pole 23 Reference pole 24 Reference pole 25 Reference pole Upper Terminal Block All eight of the digital output zero voltage reference terminals are common Unlike the GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers or distributed I O which have an earth ground screw the GuardPLC 1200 controller s earth ground should be wired to the PA terminal marked 4 59 Chapter 4 60 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers Gun E 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 A1 B1 Z1 I i il ii ual sl al T al od ai IR E S GEES Gu Ly PA 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 A2 B2 Z2 l Terminal Number Designation Function 1 L 24V DC return path 2 L 24V DC
279. o erre E Sonal 20s erre KI Sonal 2 o erre E Offset Signal Sra 12100 M Total size 4 bytes 228 Publication 1753 UMO001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 Create a Project for the Logix Controller 1 In RSLogix 5000 software create a new project for the Logix controller 2 Add the Ethernet adapter module to the I O Configuration a Right click I O Configuration and choose New Module b In the Select Module Type dialog box choose the 1756 ENBT or 1756 ENET module type and click OK c In the Module Properties dialog box enter the IP address and the slot number of the module Module Properties Local 1756 ENBT A 1 1 Type Vendor Parent Name Description Slot Revision 1756 ENBT A 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley Local ENBT Address Host Name 192 168 1 160 C Host Name e IP Address 1 A SS Electronic Keying Compatible Module v nea C zm Cancel d Click Finish RSLogix 5000 software displays the new 1756 ENBT module under the I O Configuration Create Tags to Read and Write Assembly Data 1 Double click Controller Tags and choose the Edit Tags tab 2 Add an Enable BOOL tag which will start the connected messaging example 3 Add a TIMER_CONN timer tag to set the packet rate for the Class 3 connection 4 Create MSG_READ and MSG_WRITE message t
280. o the Using RSLogix Guard PLUS Software with GuardPLC Controllers Programming Manual publication 1753 PMO001 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Introduction Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 14 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status The Control Panel is your window into the online functionality of the controller Use the tabs to modify or monitor controller status Topic Page Resource State Tab 124 Safety Parameters Tab 125 Statistics Tab 126 P2P Peer to Peer State Tab 127 Distributed 1 0 Tab 128 HH High level High speed State Tab 128 Environment Data Tab 129 OS Tab 129 HSP Protocol Tab 130 EIP Protocol Tab 131 Use the Multi Control Panel 132 Control Panel Resource Menu 135 Control Panel Extra Menu 136 123 Chapter 14 Resource State Tab 124 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Control Panel GPLC1600_1 e IS PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help EE Y wa Resource Slate Safely Parmeter Statistics P2P State Distributed 1 0 HH State Environment Data 05 IPSc sw WW Pogana oare Fal Modi 0 Forcing disabled Remaining Force Time s Im F hio Prine Administrator A This field Displays CPU State The current state of the controller Possible states are Init Run Stop Valid_Configuration Stop Invalid_Configuration and Failure_Stop See Controller M
281. o true 112 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 13 Introduction Controller Modes Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Controller Configuration and Modes of Operation Topic Page Controller Modes 113 Controller Configuration 117 Routine Modes 120 Load a Configuration and Routine in Stop Mode only 121 Test Mode of the Routine 122 The GuardPLC operating system is stored permanently in the memory of the controller The operating system is designed to make sure that all tasks of the controller are performed in a safety related way You have access to the controller via the RSLogix Guard PLUS software so that you can define the functionality of the controller The controller can operate in various modes These modes depend on the results of the tests of the hardware software and the system configuration After you apply power to the controller or restart the controller the controller first performs a system test of the data and address lines and the flash and RAM memories Then the controller checks the operating system in the flash memory During this time the controller is in the Init mode If all these initialization checks are OK the operating system is started and the controller changes to the Stop mode If any hardware or software errors are detected the controller goes to the Failure_Stop mode If the check of the operating system detected errors the emergency l
282. oader starts The emergency loader loads an operating system from the programming terminal If the controller has a valid configuration and a routine downloaded to the controller the controller goes to the Stop mode 113 Chapter 13 Controller Configuration and Modes of Operation To put the controller in Run mode e set the Autostart switch of the both controller and the routine e manually choose Run mode from the programming software If you stop the controller it transitions from Run to Stop and interrupts the execution of the routine The outputs of the routine and the I O modules are reset to safe values You can use the Emergency Stop system variable to put the controller in Stop mode by programming this variable in your logic or forcing it when necessary The following table and flowchart summarize the controller modes Mode Description INIT Safe state of the controller during initialization and the hardware tests after booting e The controller is performing hardware and software tests STOP Safe state of the controller without execution of a routine e A loaded routine is in the Stop mode e he outputs of the controller have been reset LOW e The controller is performing hardware and software tests RUN The CPU is active e The routine is being executed e UU signals are being processed e The controller performs non safety related communication e he controller performs software tests hardware tests
283. odes on page 113 COM State State of the communication portion of the controller Possible states are Run Stop and OS_Loading Program Name The routine name The name assigned by the user to the routine The default name is Routine Program State The current state of the routine Possible states are Run Stop Freeze and Failure_Stop SeeRoutine Modes on page 12 Faulty 1 0 Modules The number of faulty I O modules when the controller is in Run Force State The force status 0 forcing is disabled 1 ready for forcing the controller is in stop but is set for forcing 2 forcing is active Remaining Force Time s The remaining force time in seconds Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Safety Parameters Tab This field CPU configuration CRC Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Chapter 14 Control Panel GPLC1600_1 l DI xl PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help f gt mgB gt Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distibuted 0 HH State Environment Data OS IP Settings p Allowed Actions Main Enable Iw CPU Configuration CRC 16 00000000 Autostart v System Rack 50000 0 Start Restart allowed Iw Safety Time ms 100 Leading allowed I Watchdog Time ms 50 Test Mode allowed K Online Test allowed iv Forcing allowed E iv Stop on Force Timeout F 1 0 e A
284. ogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help Fg examplet F Typelnstance EO GuardPLc 1600 Programming Terminal E ES HH Network_1 De Delete If you want to Click this tab create a new signal New Connected Signal renumber offsets sequentially for all signals New Offsets delete the selected signal Delete Connected Signal 2 Edit the signals you want to receive or send Use the Inputs tab to determine which values to read into the controller e Use the Outputs tab to define output values to send to the Modbus master Signals in the output tab must match the order of signal types requested by the Modbus master e Associate each input or output with a signal from the signal editor You can drag and drop signals from the signal editor to the signal connections dialog box The Modbus function calls must match the order in which the signal offsets appear For example if you want to read 3 Boolean signals followed by 4 Registers the first 3 signals must be BOOL and the next 4 must be INT signals TIP The output section automatically sorts the name field based on alphanumerical order This does not automatically change the offsets but if you renumber after sorting the offsets will change and there is no undo feature This changes the order in which the signals are sent out the serial port Because names are used only in printouts you may want to enter these
285. onfigure Profibus DP communication Once the software opens a project it automatically displays the Hardware Management window from which you configure the Profibus port 1 Right click Protocols and choose New gt Profibus dp Slave Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help ES PCS add Configuration ER 2 Resource 1 ibuled 1 0 ocol i WE Typelnstance Ag asa RO GuardPLC 1600 Copy PEN f Programming Terminal Paste H Modbus Slave S FB HH Network_1 Ee Teh Token Group oP Token Group 1 Properties 2 Expand Protocols right click the Profibus dp Slave icon and choose Properties Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help E Ta examplet ad Configuration EB Resource Distibuted 1 0 Configuration Resource Protocols Profibus E B Type Profibus dp Slave Station address O EI Protocols fo E Profibus dp Slave Boron fete malo SE Typelnstance Interface z fO GuardPLC 1600 Baud rate IESSE id Programming Terminal co FE nn emo 1 Dk Cancel Apo Bee iXX Token Group oP Token Group_1 For this field Specify Station Address the address that uniquely identifies the Profibus dp slave on the network The station address must be less than or equal to 126 Refresh Rate Refresh rate in ms for non safe communication The default is 0 the fastest refresh rate Interface the field bus interface to be used by the Profibus dp Slave protocol comm1 com
286. onfigure the 1753 IB8XOB8 Module Chapter 7 1 pole Connection Examples DO 1 D02 D03 D04 1 Q Inductive loads can be connected without a protection diode on TIP the load However Rockwell Automation strongly recommends that a protection diode be fitted directly to the load to suppress any interference voltage 2 pole Connection Example 8 S 8 ca ta a am D a There are two digital pulse test sources PO used for line control monitoring of digital inputs For information on configuring pulse test sources for line control see Chapter 11 Pulse test sources are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function 1 L Reference pole 2 1 Pulsed output 1 3 2 Pulsed output 2 ATTENTION Pulse test sources must not be used as safety related outputs A 81 Chapter 7 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB8X0B8 Module Notes 82 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Introduction Safety related Digital Inputs Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 8 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16X0B8 Module Topic Page Safety related Digital Inputs 83 Safety related Digital Outputs 86 Monitor for Line Short Line Break 91 Pulse Test Sources 93 The module features 16 digital inputs 8 two pole 8 positive switching and 8 negative switching digital outputs and 2 pulsed outputs The
287. ontrol how the peer to peer connection is setup E P2P System Signals GPLC_1200_1 P2P GPLC nix Help Inputs Dutputs Connection Control WORD P2PControl Connection Control Values Value Setting Description 0x0000 Autoconnect After loss of peer to peer communication the controller tries to re establish communication in the next CPU cycle This is the standard mode of operation 0x0100 Toggle_Mode 0 These modes allow automatic connect with Disable after 0x0101 Toggle Mode 1 loss of communication If Toggle Mode is 0 and communication is lost Connection State CLOSED a connect is performed only after Toggle Mode is set to 1 by the user program If Toggle Mode is 1 and communication is lost a connect is performed only after Toggle Mode is set to 0 by the user program 0x8000 Disabled Peer to peer communication is disabled No attempt to connect IMPORTANT If the P2PControl signal in the illustration above is set to l 32768 peer to peer communication is disabled If Connection Control is not set by the application the default is 0 and Autoconnect is enabled Design the Logic for all Controllers Design the logic for the controllers considering the variables intended for network exchange The following examples show part of the routines for controllers Robot A and Robot B respectively To evaluate the state of the OutRange signal in Robot B use the same signal name Out
288. ontroller as an Adapter 3 Double click the object to open the Properties dialog box Enter the desired Field Width and Decimal Point display information 5 Enter a name for the Read Tag 6 Click the Edit Tag button to open the Tag Form dialog box 7 Configure the tag as shown below Tag Form 2 x Tag Name Data Type Tank 3 Level Unsigned Integer Cancel Help mM ing T pened Node Name C Controller Address GuardPLC c Service Code Value Hex d Get Attribute Single 0 C Assembly Object 5 Hex LL Instance Byte Offset ba Bo Attribute Hex 3 Description This item is read from GPLC Input Assembly 121 offset 4 bytes a Tag Initial Value o Scaling Data Entry Limits Scale Offset Min Max fi fo o 12000 Parameter Setting Messaging Type CIP Node Name Enter the name of the GuardPLC controller that will receive the command Service Code Choose Get Attribute Single to indicate that this is a read operation Class Code Enter 4 for an assembly object Instance Number Enter 121 to indicate the GuardPLC target input assembly that was created for the PanelView Standard terminal to read from Attribute Enter 3 to provide access to the assembly object instance data Byte Offset Index into the GuardPLC output assembly x number of bytes then read the data 248 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 2
289. or Version To compile the logic correctly for your type of controller set Code Generator Version to three 3 for RSLogix Guard PLUS software Set to version two 2 for RSLogix Guard software To create a peer to peer network right click the project in the Hardware Management window and choose New gt HH Network Ta RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Edit Signals Online Windows Help i Copy IBI Programming Terminal Paste Properties You can right click HH Network and Rename the entry if desired Create Token Group s A single token group is automatically created with the HH network If you need more create token groups by right clicking HH Network and choosing New gt Token Group I RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help ME examplet B Configuration BR 2 Resource Ja Programming Terminal Node Editor Properties Expand the HH Network right click Token Group s and rename the Token Group s if desired Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Chapter 17 Add Controllers to Token Group s A controller must be a member of only one token group To add a controller to a token group follow these steps 1 Expand the HH Network right click a token group and choose Node Editor The Node Editor is empty when you open it for the first time 2 Click a controller in the tree view a
290. or in digital output module 0x02 Output switched off due to overload 0x04 Error when reading back the activation of the digital outputs 0x08 Error when reading back the status of the digital outputs 0x40 external short circuit or short circuit of EMC protection yield to an error 0x80 channel is switched off due to an error in the corresponding DO channel DO1 xx Value DO2 xx Value Write Output value of the digital output channels 0 The output is not set no current 1 The output is set Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 319 AppendixB System Signal Variables 1 0 Data L Switching Outputs L Switching Outputs Read Description Write DO2 xx 2 Pole used Write Configures the channel for 2 pole operation 0 channel DO2 xx is not used for 2 pole operation 1 channel DO2 01 is used for 2 pole operation with channel DO1 04 or channel DO2 02 is used for 2 pole operation with channel DO1 08 Switch on delay Write Sets switch on delay for 2 pole tests due to lamp load inductive and capacitive load 1 xx affected output channel of the controller or module 1 0 Data DO Error Code 320 Read Write Read Digital Output Parameters for 1753 IB16X0B8 Modules In addition to the output parameters in the table on page 318 the GuardPLC 1753 IB16XOB8 module features these digital output parameters Description Error mask
291. ossible You must not connect the positive switching output directly to an external L load or connect the negative switching output directly to an external L load You must use the S and S terminals For 1 pole connections inductive loads can be connected without a protection diode on the load because there is a protection diode located within the GuardPLC module However Rockwell Automation strongly recommends that a protection diode be fitted directly to the load to suppress any interference voltage A 1N4004 diode is recommended 1 pole Configuration Actuator 1753 IB16X0B8 87 Chapter8 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16XOB8 Module 2 Pole Connection If the outputs are configured for 2 pole operation 8 outputs are available Each of the 8 outputs switch both L and L 2 pole outputs without line monitoring are wired to both the positive switch and negative switch of a single channel 2 and 2 for example 2 A IMPORTANT The corresponding channels for 2 pole connections must be configured for 2 pole operation by using the system variable DO xx 2 pole See Appendix B for more information on system variables The positive switching output must be wired to an output along with the corresponding negative switching output of the same channel Negative or positive switching outputs must not span different channels unless they are connected in pairs see 3 pole Connection With Line Mon
292. outine Indicators Indicator Status Description id RUN On The routine is in Run or Freeze P Off The routine is in Failure Stop RUN ERR STOP On The routine is in Stop or Failure Stop R N STOP PROG On The download of a new controller configuration is in progress PROG FAULT Flashing The download of a new operating system into the flash ROM is in progress FORCE l F e E Off No download of controller configuration or operating system is in progress FAULT On The routine user program has caused an error The controller configuration is faulty The download of a new operating system was not successful and the operating system is corrupted Flashing An error has occurred during a flash ROM write cycle of the EE operating system At least one 1 0 module error is present Off No errors have been detected FORCE On The controller is executing a routine RUN and one or more inputs and or outputs may be forced by the user Flashing The controller is in Stop mode but one or more inputs and or outputs have been prepared for forcing and will be activated as soon as the controller is started Off No inputs and or outputs are forced or are prepared to be forced Ethernet Communication Indicators 10 100 Base T Indicator Status Description Tx On Data is transmitting via the Ethernet network by the communication processor COL On A collision on the Ethernet n
293. outputs 0x0008 Error reading back status of the digital outputs 0x0010 Short circuit 0x0020 Channel is switched off due to an error in the corresponding DO channel 0x0040 Zener diode at the output is not alloyed 0x0080 Line break 0x0100 MEZ test of the output switches in the DO line caused an error 0x0200 MEZ test of the output switches in the DO line caused an error 0x0400 MEZ test of the L test switch caused an error 0x0800 External L supply at DO DO LSLB period Write Period during which line monitoring is carried out Values in one second increments from 1 100 s DO LSLB time Write Time for Line Short Line Break LSLB monitoring Values in one millisecond increments from 0 50 ms The default is 0 ms DO xx 2 pole Write Configures the module for 2 pole operation 0 1 pole operation 1 2 pole operation DO xx Value Write Output value for DO channels DO 1 pole Value 0 or 1 2 pole identical to DO Value 0 or 1 DO xx Value Write Output value for DO channels DO 1 pole Value 0 or 1 2 pole identical to DO Value 0 or 1 DO xx LSLB monitoring Write Configures line control 0 no LSLB line control 1 set for LSLB line control DO xx LS monitoring with Write Configures line control with reduced voltage reduced voltage 0 normal signal voltage level 1 reduced signal voltage level DO xx xx in pairs Write Configures line control with channel pairs Pair 1 channel 1 01 and channel 2 02 Pair 2 channe
294. p is not generated Data packets must only be able to reach a node via a single path 39 Chapter2 Installation See Chapter 16 for information on peer to peer communication or Chapter 18 for information on EtherNet IP communication Connections for Non Safety Related communication Three 9 pin Min D connectors are located on the front of the controller providing these communication options Designation COMM RS 485 Function Modbus RTU Slave 1753 L28BBBM or 1753 L32BBBM 8A Profibus DP Slave 1753 L28BBBP or 1753 L32BBBP 8A COMM2 not used COMM3 ASCII HSP Port COMM 3 IMPORTANT 40 GuardPLC ASCII Protocol HSP Modbus or Profibus Port COMM 1 GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT a H4 The three Min D connectors are RS 485 You must use an electrical interface device to connect the controller to an RS 232 device To use COMMS for HSP you must use a 1753 CBLDN cable which ships with the 1753 DNSI DeviceNet Safety Scanner for GuardPLC Controllers Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Installation Chapter 2 The pin assignment of the Min D connectors is shown in the table below Connection Signal Function 1 EN LI 2 RP 5V decoupled with diodes 3 RxD TxD A Receive Transmit data A 4 CNTR A Control Signal A 5 DGND Data reference potential 6 VP 5V positive pole of supply voltage 7 E 8 RxD TxD B Receive Tr
295. power input 3 L 24V DC return path 4 L 24V DC power input 5 PA Functional ground 6 01 Digital output 1 7 01 Voltage reference for digital output 1 8 02 Digital output 2 9 02 Voltage reference for digital output 2 10 03 Digital output 3 11 03 Voltage reference for digital output 3 12 04 Digital output 4 13 04 Voltage reference for digital output 4 14 05 Digital output 5 15 05 Voltage reference for digital output 5 16 06 Digital output 6 17 06 Voltage reference for digital output 6 18 07 Digital output 7 19 07 Voltage reference for digital output 7 20 08 Digital output 8 21 08 Voltage reference for digital output 8 22 A1 Universal signal input for counter 1 23 A2 Universal signal input for counter 2 24 B1 Signal input for counting direction for counter 1 25 B2 Signal input for counting direction for counter 2 26 Z1 Reset for counter 1 27 Z2 Reset for counter 2 28 L Signal ground for counters 1 and 2 29 L Signal ground for counters 1 and 2 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 5 Introduction Safety related Digital Inputs Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire the GuardPLC 2000 Controller and 1 0 Topic Page Safety related Digital Inputs 61 Safety related Digital Outputs 62 Safety Related Analog Inputs 1755 IF8 62 High speed Counter Module 1755 HSC 63 Safety related Analog Output Module 1755 OF8 64 Current Draw 64 Wire th
296. put 8 Standard Analog Outputs The module has 4 analog outputs which are not safety rated outputs However in the event of an internal error they can be shut down safely through configuration via the user program ATTENTION To achieve SIL 3 the output values must be read back via safety analog inputs and evaluated in the RSLogix Guard PLUS user program Appropriate reactions to incorrect output values must be applied Otherwise they may not be used as safety outputs When you are not using the analog outputs use RSLogix Guard PLUS programming software to set the 4 analog output USED system signals to FALSE When set to FALSE no output signals are transmitted when the safety switches are opened Alternatively you can set the analog outputs to zero by using the Emergency Off system variable These are the analog output resolution options Value Range in the Application 0 Output Current 0 mA 2000 20 mA Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 97 Chapter 9 98 Wire the 1753 IF8XOF4 Analog 1 0 Module Terminal Connections AO 01 02 03 04 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 See the wire size and terminal torques specifications on page 292 Analog outputs AO are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function 25 01 Analog output 1 26 Reference pole output 1 2 02 Analog output 2 28 Reference pole output 2 29 03 Analog output 3 30 Reference pole ou
297. put 8 for increased load 20A 12 L Reference pole The controller has 24 digital inputs whose status is indicated via status indicators when in Run mode The digital inputs are actually analog inputs that provide the program with UINT values of 0 30V 0 3000 which are used to create limit values to calculate signals for the digital inputs Default settings are e lt 7V 0 signal e gt 13V 1 signal The limit values are set by using system variables See page 328 for more information on configuring these inputs TIP Because digital inputs are actually analog values the USED variable must be set HI in the output signal connections dialog box to activate the digital input The 24 digital inputs of the GuardPLC 18000 controller can be used as analog inputs by reading the DI xx Value Analog input signal However because these inputs are intended to be used as digital inputs the accuracy of their analog values is not guaranteed to the be same as the published accuracy of the 8 actual analog inputs in the GuardPLC 1800 controller Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers Safety related Digital Input Terminals 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920 O0000 DI Ls 12345 67 8L ooo 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 OO0000000 DI LS 9 10111213 14
298. put module DI8 for 1753 IB8XOB8 Ox00E2 Digital input module D116 for 1753 IB16X0B8 0x002D Digital input module D116 for 1753 IB16 0x005A Digital output module D016 for 1753 0B16 0x003C Digital relay output module D08 1753 0W8 Ox00B4 Digital output module DO8 for GuardPLC 1600 1800 controllers and 1753 IB20X0B8 0x005B Digital output module D08 for 1753 IB8XOB8 0x00C4 Digital output module DO8 for 1753 IB16X0B8 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 315 Appendix B System Signal Variables 1 0 Data Read Write Description Module Error Code Read Error mask for the module 0x0000 1 0 processing may be running with errors 0x0001 No 1 0 processing CPU not in RUN 0x0002 No I O processing during start up tests 0x0004 Manufacturing interface running 0x0010 No 1 0 processing due to incorrect configuration 0x0020 No I O processing due to exceeded fault rate 0x0040 80 No I O processing because configured module is not plugged in Digital Input Module Variables for GuardPLC 1600 Controllers and Distributed 1 0 The GuardPLC 1600 controllers and distributed I O support these digital input parameters 1 0 Data Read Write Description Di Error Code Supply Read 0x0001 Error in the total module DI supply 1753 IB16X0B8 only Di xx Error Code Supply Read Error mask of all digital inputs HEEN 0x01 Error in DI supply of the module 0x02 Supply is switched off du
299. put power supply Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 343 Appendix C Wiring Examples 1755 HSC High Speed Counter Module Same power supply used by GuardPLC CPU Safety Relay CH1 CH2 344 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Appendix D Replacing the Back up Battery The following procedures apply only to GuardPLC 1200 controllers and GuardPLC 2000 power supplies Other GuardPLC controllers and I O modules are not equipped with back up batteries A risk of fire or chemical burn exists if the battery is not handled properly Do not crush puncture disassemble or short external contacts or expose the battery to temperatures higher than 60 C 140 F For safety information on the handling and disposal of lithium batteries refer to Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 Preventing Electrostatic Only qualified personnel with knowledge of ESD protective measures Discharge may replace the back up battery Electrostatic discharge can damage integrated circuits or semiconductors Follow these guidelines when you handle the module e Touch a grounded object to discharge static potential e Wear an approved wrist strap grounding device e Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards e Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment e Use a static safe workstation if available e Store equipment in appropriate static safe packaging when not in us
300. puts They are electrically isolated from the processor system The status of the four output signals is displayed with status indicators located at the right side of the front plate output connector Communication GuardPLC Ethernet Network Capabilities The GuardPLC Ethernet network provides safe communication via Ethernet protocol for distributed I O and peer to peer communication Jj for all GuardPLC controllers It also provides non safety related communication with the OPC server Programming and configuration of controllers is accomplished via the GuardPLC Ethernet network Various GuardPLC systems can be networked together on the GuardPLC Ethernet network using star or daisy chain configurations A programming device running RSLogix Guard PLUS software can also be connected wherever required IMPORTANT Make sure that a network loop is not generated Data packets must only be able to reach a node via a single path Publication 1753 UMO001C EN P March 2010 27 Chapter 1 Overview of Safety Controllers Star Configuration To Programming Terminal GuardPLC Ethernet Networking Example c vm we Daisy chain Line Configuration To Programming Terminal 28 EtherNet IP GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers support
301. que master address requester 01 99 Source unique slave address GuardPLC controller 01 99 Function Code r character identifies data sent by slave E identifies error with master request Start Address data start address for characters to read offset 00000 65535 Number of Variables number of variables to read and send back to master 000 999 Number of Characters number of characters in the data string This includes the delimiter but not the amp termination character 0000 9999 Data data characters End Sign needed to recognize the end of a message amp character Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 271 Chapter 21 272 Communicate with ASCII Devices For example this string replies to the master request for the first two variables from the slave Destination Function Start Number of Number of End Sign Code Address Variables Characters 00000 0005 amp Every data field in the message is separated with a slash The slash also counts as a character when counting the total number of characters in the data string TIP The reply string will have a variable number of characters if non BOOL are used For example 99 is 2 characters 100 is 3 characters There is no leading zero If the master request was not received properly at the GuardPLC controller the slave response is the following Destination Function Start Number of Number of End Sign Code Address Variables
302. quipment 32 Communication Connections 38 Reset Pushbutton 43 General Safety Open style devices must be provided with environmental and safety protection by proper mounting in enclosures designed for specific application conditions See NEMA Standards 250 and IEC 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by different types of enclosure Consider the following before installing your GuardPLC 1200 1600 1800 controller or distributed 1 0 IN These products are grounded through the DIN rail Use zinc plated yellow chromate steel DIN rails to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials for example aluminum and plastic that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 31 Chapter2 Installation Mount the Equipment 32 GuardPLC 1200 Controller The GuardPLC 1200 controller can be either snapped onto a DIN rail or mounted to a back panel by using bolts DIN rail mounting is the easiest way to attach the controller and should be used wherever possible Teta Tor cooling reasons e the GuardPLC 1200 controller must be mounted horizontally with the Ethernet socket facing down e alocation where air flows freely or use an additional cooling fan e the minimum clearance around the GuardPLC 1200 controller must be at least 100 mm 3 94 in e do not mount the GuardPLC 1200 controll
303. r to peer Communication Overview Topic JPage Networking Limitations 152 Network Configuration 153 HH Protocol Parameters 153 Peer to peer Protocol Parameters 157 HH Network Profiles 161 Peer to Peer Network Profiles 168 Peer to peer communication is used for data exchange between two or more controllers and distributed I O on a GuardPLC Ethernet network The GuardPLC Ethernet network is certified for use in SIL 3 and Cat 4 applications and is designed to carry safety related data The controllers are usually connected via the Ethernet network but other means of communication such as telephone lines or two way radios are also possible using gateways from the Ethernet network to the respective technology The Peer to peer protocol is primarily responsible for e the communication between controller CPUs including automatic connection setup e extended diagnostics e all safety relevant features for correct data transfer Each controller is equipped with one or more 10 100 Base T Ethernet ports The High level High speed HH protocol is implemented in the operating system of the GuardPLC 1200 1600 1800 controllers and of the GuardPLC 2000 communication module COM and interacts with the Ethernet port The HH protocol is based on UDP IP and IEEE 802 3 standards and is responsible for the collision free data exchange via standard Ethernet networks in various network topologies 151 Chapter 16 Peer
304. rallel to allow the maximum current of 8 A Each terminal maximum is 4 A so both are required for 8 A If the power supply has only one lead a short bridge jumper must be installed between Lion and L TIP The GuardPLC 1200 controller requires approximately 0 5 A to operate The remaining 7 5 A is used to source power for inputs and outputs The status of digital inputs is indicated via status indicators when the controller or module is in Run mode Follow the closed circuit principle for external wiring when connecting sensors To create a safe state in the event of a fault the input signals revert to the de energized state 0 The external line is not monitored but a wire break is interpreted as a safe 0 signal The GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers provide power to input devices through their LS terminals However input devices with their own dedicated power supply can also be connected instead of contacts The reference pole L of the power supply must then be connected to the reference pole L of the appropriate GuardPLC input group See the wiring diagrams in Appendix C for examples In general the LS terminals not L on the power supply connection should be used to supply voltage for safety inputs Each LS features individual short circuit and EMC protection Due to current limitations use LS for only the safety inputs on the same terminal plug An EN 61000 4 5 surge impulse can be read as a sho
305. rch 2010 Peer to peer Communication Overview Chapter 16 Peer to Peer Profile V Slow amp Cleanroom This profile provides low data throughput for applications where only a low data update rate is required from remote controllers via communication paths whose conditions cannot be predicted by the user TIP Normally use the profile Slow amp Noisy see page 174 Slow amp Cleanroom Characteristics Minimum Ethernet network requirements Primarily for data exchange via ISDN leased Slow on line or slow line of sight radio link No loss of data due to traffic overload harsh Clean environmental conditions or network defects Time for 2 0 repetitions Characteristics of the communication path Moderate to long delays ResponseTime ReceiveTMO otherwise ERROR Responselime manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor ReceiveTMO manually set in the Peer to Peer Editor Variables WDZ manually set in the controller properties N number of link partners a controller can talk to defined in the Peer to Peer Editor Suitable HH network Medium or profile Fast Peer to Peer parameter presets e QueueLen 4 e Communication Time Slice large enough to process and send all data defined for transmission in one CPU cycle e ResendTMO if ReceiveTMO gt 2 x WDZ then ResendTMO ResponseTime 2 0 Resends possible if ReceiveTMO lt 2 x WDZ then ResendTMO ReceiveTMO e AckTMO
306. re processed IMPORTANT Test Mode is not permitted for safe operation 120 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Controller Configuration and Modes of Operation Chapter 13 Routine Modes Load Routine Yes Restart No STOP Error in Yes Routine FAILURE_STOP No No Routine start Yes Bl MV Freeze enabled No VV RUN FREEZE RUN RUN Error in Yes Routine No No Routine stop Yes Load a Configuration and You can load a controller configuration and routine when Routine in Stop Mode only e the controller is in Stop mode e the controller Loading Allowed switch is set The controller Stop mode is subdivided into these categories STOP Mode Category Description Stop Valid Config The configuration is correctly loaded The controller can be set to Run via a command from the programming software This initiates a loaded user routine Stop Invalid Config No configuration loaded or the loaded configuration is faulty The controller cannot go to Run mode Stop Load Config loading configuration in process Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 121 Chapter 13 Controller Configuration and Modes of Operation Test Mode of the Routine 122 The configuration and the routine are loaded together into the controller Loading a new configuration and a new routine automatically deletes all previously loaded objects even if the new objects are faulty IMPORTANT
307. re threshold exceeded 0x0800 FTZ test 2 temperature threshold exceeded Transmitter 01 Error Code Read Error codes of each transmitter group 0x01 Module error of transmitter supply 0x02 Overcurrent of transmitter supply 0x04 Undervoltage of transmitter supply 0x08 Overvoltage of transmitter supply Allxx Underflow Read Underflow Al xx Value according to Al xx Limit LOW The validity depends upon the Al xx Error Code Al xx Overflow Read Overflow Al xx Value according to Al xx Limit HIGH The validity depends upon the Al xx Error Code Al xx Limit LOW Write Upper limit of voltage range 0 signal Al xx Underflow Allxx Limit HIGH Write Lower limit of voltage range 0 signal Al xx Overflow 1 xx affected output channel of t 324 he controller or module Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 System Signal Variables Appendix B Analog Output Signals for 1753 IFSXOF4 Modules The 1753 IF8XOF4 module supports these analog output signals 1 0 Data Read Write Description Module SRS Read Slot number System Rack Slot Module Type Read Module type Ox Module Error Code0069 Read Error mask for the module 0x0000 I O processing may be running with errors 0x0001 No 1 0 processing CPU not in RUN 0x0002 No I O processing during start up tests 0x0004 Manufacturing interface running 0x0010 No I O processing due to incorrect configuration
308. recovered 347 Appendix D Replacing the Back up Battery Notes 348 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Numerics 1753 CBLDN 40 1753 DNSI 40 1754 BAT replacement 346 1755 BAT replacement 347 1755 HSC status indicators 149 1755 IF8 status indicators 148 1755 OF8 status indicators 149 1 pole connection 1753 IB16X0B8 87 1753 IB8XOB8 example 81 1753 IB8XOB8 operation 78 2 pole connection 1753 IB16XOB8 88 1753 IB8XOB8 configuration 79 1753 IB8X0B8 example 81 1753 IB8XOB8 operation 79 3 pole connection 1753 IB16X0B8 89 A acknowledge timeout 159 adapter input assembly 215 output assembly 216 adapter assemblies connect signals 217 analog data 309 311 ASCII connecting 265 data type formats 273 master request 270 overview 28 protocol 270 serial port 268 signals 269 slave response 271 assembly ID adapter input assembly 216 adapter output assembly 217 battery replacement 345 347 Bus Cycle Time 155 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Index C check consistency 135 CIP messaging PanelView Standard terminals 243 248 code generator version 178 communication ASCII 28 265 control panel 123 EtherNet IP 28 High speed safety protocol 29 Modbus 29 275 Peer to Peer 151 PROFIBUS 29 communication time slice 176 configuring controllers 117 counters 109 EtherNet IP driver 252 serial port 268 connecting ASCII device 265 ASCII signals 269 Modbus device 276 Modbus signals 277
309. rocess values when the force time expires On Enabled Max Communication Time Slice the time in milliseconds reserved for a controller to carry out and complete all communication tasks in one CPU cycle This setting is required for Peer to Peer networking 10 ms Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 119 Chapter 13 Controller Configuration and Modes of Operation Routine Modes The controller runs only one routine The following table and flowchart summarize the routine modes Mode Description Run_Run The controller is in the Run mode e The routine is executed cyclically by the controller e Input data are processed in the routine e Output data of the routine are operated Run Freeze The controller is in the Run mode e he routine is not executed e No input data are processed e Nooutput data of the routine are operated Stop The controller is in the Stop mode e he routine is no longer being executed e All outputs have been reset Failure Stop The controller is in the Stop mode e The routine was stopped due an error e All outputs are reset e he hardware watchdog is not triggered e To recover from Failure Stop a restart of the controller is necessary A restart can be initiated only via RSLogix Guard PLUS software See Recover From a Failure Stop on page 116 Test Mode single step The controller is in Run mode e he routine is triggered manually e O data a
310. roller OxFFFF missing module in GuardPLC 2000 chassis Board State Read Error mask for the module 0x000 I O processing may be running with errors 0x001 No 1 0 processing CPU not in RUN 0x002 No 0 processing during start up tests 0x004 Manufacturing interface running 0x010 No 1 0 processing due to faulty parameterization 0x020 No 1 0 processing due to exceeded fault rate 0x040 No I O processing because configured module is not plugged in 1 Ox output channels 01 08 High Speed Counter Variables For GuardPLC 1200 and 2000 Controllers The GuardPLC 1200 and GuardPLC 2000 controllers support these variables for counter I O parameters 1 0 Data Read Write Description Board SRS Read System Rack Slot Board Type Read Module type 0x0003 counter module for GuardPLC 1200 controller OxFCO3 counter module for GuardPLC 2000 controller OxFFFF missing module in GuardPLC 2000 chassis 312 Publication 1753 UMO01C EN P March 2010 System Signal Variables Appendix B 1 0 Data Read Write Description Board State Read Error mask for the module 0x000 IO processing may be running with errors 0x001 No 1 0 processing CPU not in RUN 0x002 No I O processing during start up tests 0x004 Manufacturing interface running 0x010 No I O processing due to faulty parameterization 0x020 No I O processing due to exceeded fault rate 0x040 No I O processing because config
311. rotocol Status Connections Status Reset Counters Peer IP Peel ie Ste rea Oupa Sen Ress esseri nr w n warn 192 168 1 160 RUN Target Established 120 121 10794 10775 0 10 10 8 12 You can view the connection s EtherNet IP statistics described in the table below Statistic Peer IP Description Reports the IP address of the scanner in this case the 1756 ENBT Peer Status Indicates whether the scanner in this case the Logix controller is in Run or Idle mode This is displayed only for exclusive owner connections because input only connections ignore any data coming from the scanner including the Run Idle header Type Displays the connection type State Displays the status of the connection Input Reports the assembly instance numbers that this Output connection services Sent Displays the total number of sent or received packets Revd over this connection PRPI Displays the producing packet rate requested when scheduling this connection CRPI Displays the consuming packet rate requested when scheduling this connection MinPRPI MaxPRPI LastPRPI and AvrPRPI Corresponds to the actual minimum maximum last and average producing packet rates observed over this connection Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 Use the Force Editor to Test the Connection You can use the Force Editor in the RS
312. rques specifications on page 290 Digital inputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function 33 LS Sensor supply for inputs 1 4 40 mA buffered 1 A unbuffered 34 LS Sensor supply for inputs 1 4 40 mA buffered 1 A unbuffered 35 1 Digital input 1 36 2 Digital input 2 37 3 Digital input 3 38 4 Digital input 4 39 L Reference pole 40 L Reference pole 41 Ground Shield 42 Ground Shield 43 LS Sensor supply for inputs 5 8 40 mA buffered 1 A unbuffered 44 LS Sensor supply for inputs 5 8 40 mA buffered 1 A unbuffered 45 5 Digital input 5 46 6 Digital input 6 47 7 Digital input 7 48 8 Digital input 8 49 L Reference pole 50 L Reference pole 51 Ground Shield 52 Ground Shield 53 LS Sensor supply for inputs 9 12 40 mA buffered 1 A unbuffered 54 LS Sensor supply for inputs 9 12 40 mA buffered 1 A unbuffered 55 9 Digital input 9 56 10 Digital input 10 57 11 Digital input 11 58 12 Digital input 12 59 L Reference pole 60 L Reference pole 61 Ground Shield 62 Ground Shield 85 Chapter8 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16XOB8 Module Safety related Digital Outputs 86 Terminal Number Designation Function 63 LS Sensor supply for inputs 13 16 40 mA buffered 1 A unbuffered 64 LS Sensor supply for inputs 13 16 40 mA buffered 1 A unbuffered 65 13
313. rror mask for all digital inputs 0x0000 No error detected 0x0001 Error of the DI section of the module 0x0002 Within the safety time test sample test faulty DI xy State Read Error mask of digital input channels 0x00 No error detected 0x01 Error in the digital input module input value set to 0 DI xy Value Read Input values of digital input channels 0 Input not activated 1 Input activated 1 Values are ORed 2 Ox output channel 01 16 for GuardPLC 2000 controller and 01 08 for GuardPL C 1200 1600 and 1800 controllers 3 xy input channel 01 24 for GuardPLC 2000 and GuardPLC 1800 controllers and 01 20 for GuardPLC 1200 and 1600 controllers 308 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 System Signal Variables Appendix B Analog Input Module Variables AB Al for GuardPLC 2000 Controller The GuardPLC 2000 controller supports these analog input parameters 1 0 Data Read Write Description Al Mode Write Mode for all channels of the analog input module 0 unipolar single ended 1 differential Al State Read Error mask for all analog inputs 0x0000 No errors detected 0x0001 Error of the module 0x0008 Within the safety time data bus walking bit error 0x0010 Within the safety time coefficient table check error 0x0020 Within the safety time supply voltages error 0x0040 Error on A D conversion DRDY HIGH 0x0080 Withi
314. rst Output Assembly Instance number and 198 for all subsequent listen only connections Number 198 is the Listen Only instance number a virtual number that is not associate with any real assembly Click Next and type the desired packet rate for this connection in milliseconds Wil Module Properties ENBT_1 ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 General Connection Module Info Requested Packet Interval RPI hoo ms 1 0 3200 0 ms Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Running Cancel Click OK Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 Download and Go Online Download new changes to the Logix controller and go online Double click the new connection icon under I O Configuration If the connection is established successfully RSLogix 5000 software displays the status as Running in the Module Properties dialog box If an error occurred it is displayed in the Module Fault field of the Connection tab of the Module Properties dialog box i5 RSLogix 5000 Demo Config 1 1756 L61 File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help jara 5 lel lo sese Me e Ala ae em ER Path 48 ETH 14192 168 1 160 Backplane 0 RemRun H M Run Mode Kd n Suze ZS No Forces b P Controller OK q No Edits M Battery OK H I I gt I waa mH Favorites KE Timer Counter putioutput empare i
315. rt duration HI signal in some modules To avoid an error either e install shielded input lines to prevent effects of surges in the system e implement software filtering in the user program A signal must be present for at least two cycles before it is evaluated Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers Chapter 4 Safety related Digital The status of digital outputs is indicated via status indicators when the Jj Outputs controller or module is in Run mode GuardPLC outputs are rated to either 0 5 A or 1 0 A at an ambient temperature of 60 C 140 F At an ambient temperature of 50 C 122 F outputs rated at 1 0 A increase to 2 0 A If an overload occurs the affected outputs are turned off When the overload is eliminated the outputs are under the control of the controller and are energized based on the user program code An output is in the safe state when it is de energized Therefore outputs are switched off when a fault that affects the safe control of those outputs occurs For connection of a load the reference pole L of the corresponding channel group must be used Although L poles are connected internally to L on the power supply input it is strictly recommended to connect the L reference poles only to their corresponding output group EMC testing was performed in this manner TIP Inductive loads can be connected without a protection diode on
316. s Read Ring counter with 64 bits incremented in millisecond steps UDINT SAFE Temperature State 0 1 2 3 255 Read 0 normal high 2 faulty 3 very high 255 status does not exist BYTE NON SAFE but for additional switch off 1 Binary values are ORed 306 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 System Signal Variables Appendix B 1 0 Variables Depending upon the type of controller the various GuardPLC controllers support variables for digital and analog I O parameters that you can configure or monitor Digital UO Module Variables AB DIO for GuardPLC 1200 and 2000 Controllers The GuardPLC 1200 and 2000 controllers support these digital I O parameters 1 0 Data Read Write Description Board SRS Read System Rack Slot Board Type Read Module type OxOOE1 digital 1 0 module for GuardPLC 1200 controllers OxFEO1 digital I O module for GuardPLC 2000 controllers OxFFFF missing module in GuardPLC 2000 chassis Board State Read Error mask for the module 0x000 IO processing may be running with errors 0x001 No 1 0 processing CPU not in RUN 0x002 No I O processing during start up tests 0x004 Manufacturing interface running 0x010 No I O processing due to faulty parameterization 0x020 No I O processing due to exceeded fault rate 0x040 No I O processing because configured module is not plugged in Publication 1753 UMO001C EN P March 2010
317. s A maximum of six I O modules may be used in a single system The GuardPLC 2000 controller has one active RS 232 serial port for non safety related communication It also features an Ethernet port for configuration and safety related communication The lower DB9 port supports RS 232 ASCII read only communication the upper port is inactive Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 25 Chapter 1 26 Overview of Safety Controllers GuardPLC 2000 Controller Power Supply and I O Modules GuardPLC 2000 1 0 Modules GuardPLC 2000 Power Supply GuardPLC 2000 Contro id As oo E Ethernet Port DH le CIE LHCE cuarapnc 2000 tL des VL Kl db le EL le I Back up Battery i Compartment es Allen Bradley RS 232 Serial Port ST s ef de Inactive E t ran L e S RS 232 Serial Port 9l Ae He eH n k Active o I hi En E D x ej En IF e e e s sT eege oo i Oba Gel Gel Gel All TUUUTUUU0UU0TS Du POPU RT POP D A0 GuardPLC 2000 Power Supply The 17
318. s for GuardPLC 1800 Controllers The GuardPLC 1800 controllers support these counter parameters 1 0 Data Read Write Description Module SRS Read Slot number System Rack Slot Module Type Read Module type 0x0003 high speed counter module for GuardPLC 1800 controllers Module Error Code Read Error mask for the module 0x0000 0 processing may be running with errors 0x0001 No 1 0 processing CPU not in RUN 0x0002 No 1 0 processing during start up tests 0x0004 Manufacturing interface running 0x0010 No 1 0 processing due to incorrect configuration 0x0020 No I O processing due to exceeded fault rate 0x0040 No I O processing because configured module is not plugged in Cnt Error Code Read Error mask of counter module 0x0001 Error in module 0x0002 Error comparing the time base 0x0004 Address error reading the time base 0x0008 Parameters for the time base are faulty 0x0010 Address error reading the counter content 0x0020 Configuration of counter damaged 0x0040 Address error reading the Gray Code 0x0080 FTZ test of the test pattern failed 0x0100 FTZ test error checking the coefficients CntfOx Error Code Read Error mask of counter channels 1 and 2 0x01 Error in counter module 0x02 Error comparing contents of counters 0x04 Error comparing the timestamps of the counters 0x08 Error setting the parameters reset Cnt 0x Value Read Content of counters 24 bit for p
319. ser ResendTMO Resend Timeout as set by the profile AckTmo Acknowledge Timeout as set by the profile CurKeVer CRC for the Peer to Peer configuration Identical to the Peer to Peer system signal NewKeVer Reserved for future use Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 127 Chapter 14 Distributed 1 0 Tab Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Control Panel GuardPLC 20_8 DC In_Out_1 jo xl PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help ZE gt wo Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distributed 1 0 HH State Environment Data os IPSe Stop Resource System Rack Synchronize This field Displays Resource The name of the module System Rack The System Rack ID of the module State The status of the 1 0 module e Run e Error_Stop e Stop Valid_Configuration e not connected e Stop Invalid Configuration HH High level High speed State Tab Control Panel RobotA iml xl PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help e Y E RL Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distributed 1 0 HH State Environment Data os IPSe gt last avg min max RsGeeTmemd 0 8 0 Resource LinkID State RspT last ms RspT avg ms RspT min bell RspT max ms Link Model Token Group ID mop isum 9 9 95 9 f 4e 4 This field Displays Bus Cycle Time Th
320. settings of the controller choose Safety from the Menu control panel s Resource menu PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra Help f Warstart Reso P Coldstart Em Stop m Download Check Consistency Statistics P2P State Dag E Set Main Enable Reset Main Enable Change Safety Parameters IMPORTANT Any settings you change via the Resource menu are directly updated in the controller and are saved in the project Menu Item Description Check Consistency Compares the program running in the controller with the program you are editing in RSLogix Guard PLUS software If they match your offline project has previously been downloaded to the GuardPLC controller Set Main Enable Lets safety parameters be changed You can only choose Set Main Enable when the controller is in Stop mode For more information see page 119 Reset Main Enable Prevents safety parameters from being changed For more information see page 119 Change Safety Parameters Changes the safety parameters if Set Main Enable is activated You must have Read Write or Administrator access to be able to change safety parameters For more information about these parameters see page 119 TIP Refer to the Using RSLogix Guard PLUS Software with GuardPLC Controllers Programming Manual publication 1753 PM001 for more information on the Warmstart Coldstart Stop and Download menu items Publication 1753 UM001C EN
321. size If an adapter assembly is used for Class 1 PCCC access its size is limited only by the total buffer size for all of the assemblies listed above However if the adapter assembly is used for Class 1 implicit access the size of the assembly should not exceed 502 bytes This is a limitation that EtherNet IP protocol puts on any EtherNet IP adapter These 502 bytes include a Run Idle status header if the output assembly is configured to use the header When the Run Idle header is used the actual maximum size for the data is 498 because the header uses 4 bytes A similar limitation applies for explicit CIP access If the adapter assembly is used only for PCCC access its size can exceed the 502 byte limit Any one PCCC command cannot address more than 244 bytes However an offset can be specified to allow access to any assembly portion up to a maximum of 16K GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner The Scanner GuardPLC controller can connect up to 32 connections which can be configured in different targets Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Add EtherNet IP Protocol to the Resource Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication Chapter 18 Signal Connections It is your responsibility to allocate assemblies to be of the desired connection size You do this by assigning signals created in the Signal Editor to the scanner buffers or adapter assemblies For more information on creating s
322. statistics reset Bad Messages The number of discarded messages since the last statistics reset Resends The number of repeated messages since the last statistics reset Last Scanner Response Time The last scanner response time Average Scanner Response Time The average scanner response time since the last statistics reset Minimum Scanner Response Time The smallest scanner response time since the last statistics reset Maximum Scanner Response Time 130 The greatest scanner response time since the last statistics reset Click Reset Statistics to reset the statistics counters Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Chapter 14 EIP Protocol Tab 1 7 Control Panel Resource e PADT Resource Communication TestMode Extra Help oe ta mt Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics P2P State Distributed 1 0 HH State Environment Data aos IP Settings ModbusMs License HSP Protocol EIP Protocol Status Connections Status Reset Counters Peer IP Peer st Type State Input Output Sent Revd Bad Me PRPI CEP MinPRPI MaxPRPI LastPRPI AwPRPI 1 100 100 9319 Originator _ Established 3 190 2385 2385 0 1 10 3 n 10 3 2 1001003318 Originator Established 43 33 1183 1191 o zz 2 20 20 20 20 This Field Displays Peer IP IP address of communication partner Peer Status S
323. status of digital inputs is indicated via status indicators when the module is in Run mode LS is a voltage source that provides 24V DC for a group of four inputs There are four groups on the module If devices require 24V DC to operate and use the same power source as the GuardPLC module wire the outputs of the device directly to inputs on the GuardPLC module Devices with their own dedicated power supply can also be connected instead of contacts Connect the reference pole of the signal source to the L reference pole of the input See the wiring diagrams in Appendix C for examples The safety state of an input is indicated by a 0 signal being passed to the user program logic If the test routines detect a fault in the digital inputs a O signal is processed in the user program for the defective channel When a fault occurs the inputs are switched off 0 and the fault status indicator is activated The sensor supplies LS supply a default current of 40 mA that is buffered for 20 ms in case of a power failure If a higher current is needed two unbuffered supplies of 1 A can be switched on by using the DI Supply xx system signal in the application program This supply feeds the neighboring input channel group The status of this 83 Chapter8 Wire and Configure the 1753 IB16XOB8 Module supply is read and the supply is switched off if an overcurrent condition occurs This supply is protected by a current limiting device L Not
324. stored in the beginning of the assembly buffer and you can use the associated signal in the GuardPLC controller s application logic that depends on the scanner s Run Idle state Configuration Resource Protocols l Ethernet IP PS D x If the Data initialization box is checked the controller uses the consumed initial values if the corresponding I O connection disconnects If it is not checked the controller does not use initial values and the data stays in its last state The default is checked Connect Signals to the Adapter Assemblies The Signal Connections dialog box is used to assign signals created in the Signal Editor to the appropriate tab either input or output 1 To open the Signal Connections dialog box right click an Assembly and choose Connect Signals 217 Chapter 19 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 218 Edit Signals Online Windows Help DUT 155 N 156 DUT 157 N 158 DUT 159 N 160 DUT 161 N 162 DUT 163 N 164 DUT 165 156 T 167 168 T 168 170 TAM 172 T 173 174 T 175 176 T7 178 T 179 180 C DS OS OS OS OS OS OS c GE Typelnstance BO GuardPLC 1600 E Signal Connections Configuration 50000 Resource 4479 Signal_181_0481 BYTE New Offsets Help New Signal Delete Signal Output Info The example below shows the Signal Connections dialog box for an input assembly Signals created in the Signal Editor
325. t 5 55 L Reference pole 56 T6 Transmitter supply 6 57 le Analog input 6 58 L Reference pole 59 T7 Transmitter supply 7 60 H Analog input 7 61 L Reference pole 62 T8 Transmitter supply 8 63 18 Analog input 8 64 L Reference pole Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 57 Chapter4 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Controllers Safety related High speed Counter Terminals HSC Al B1 Z1 L A2 B2 22 L TIT 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 Counters are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Counter Function Gray Code Function 65 Al Input A1 bit 0 LSB 66 B1 Input B1 bit 1 67 71 Input Z1 bit 2 MSB 68 L Common reference pole 69 A2 Input A2 bit 0 LSB 70 B2 Input B2 bit 1 71 Z2 Input Z2 bit 2 MSB 72 L Common reference pole Wire the GuardPLC 1200 The GuardPLC 1200 controller has no LS terminal for a safety input voltage source Use the L supply terminal as the source for safety input voltage The four reference terminals labeled I should be used for the safety input voltage reference This is a common reference for all 20 inputs Controller Lower Terminal Block Qt p M 16 i8 HO H2 H4 H6 H8 DO b l 1 d 5 nl i i al al 2 x 1 3 5 7 19 11 13 5 mm 19 l 58 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire GuardPLC 1600 GuardPLC 1800 and GuardPLC 1200 Co
326. t The additional transmission delay on PES Equals 0 ms if the ProdRate is 0 Otherwise equals ReceiveTMO WDZ PES t3 ReceiveTMO The maximum age of a message when received at PES ty The maximum time for the received data message to be processed by the user program on PES and the output signal to be set Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Peer to peer Communication Overview Chapter 16 HH Network Profiles Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 The Worst case ReactionTime Tp is process dependent and has to be coordinated with the approving board In the Peer to Peer Editor the Worst case ReactionTime can be read in the Worst Case column Resource WwostCase Profie 1 sPici20n 2 ba Two HH network profiles are used to configure the appropriate set of parameters for the network in use The profiles described below can be chosen in the properties of the HH Network token group e Profile I Fast e Profile II Medium A third profile option None lets you set parameters manually See The None Profile on page 167 for more information Profile I Fast This is the recommended profile It provides the fastest data throughput and covers approximately 9596 of all application cases Use Fast for applications that require fast data update rates within a token group e fast communication between two or more token groups P where the other token groups must run Fast as well
327. ta produced by a single GuardPLC controller e Listen Only the first scanner to establish a connection to the GuardPLC controller becomes the owner of the connection When that scanner closes the owner connection all subsequent Listen Only connections are also closed These connection types are explained in more detail in the following sections 220 Publication 1753 UMO001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter Chapter 19 Exclusive Owner Module Properties ENBT 1 ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 Type ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethernet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Parent ENBT_1 Connection Parameters Name GPLC_Exclusive_Owner Assembly i Instance Size Input 120 B zi 8 bit 121 2 8 bit 1 0 H gei T Description Output Comm Format Data SINT e Address Host Name PAddrss 192 168 1 180 C Host Name Configuration Gem Cancel Next gt Help To establish an exclusive owner connection follow these steps 1 2 Choose Data SINT in the Comm Format Field Type the GuardPLC controller s Input Assembly instance number in the Input Assembly Instance field Type the size of the Input Assembly in the Input Size field This entry must exactly match the size of the input assembly or the GuardPLC adapter controller will return an error IMPORTANT The size of the input assembly is
328. tatus of Peers either Run or Idle If peer does not provide run idle information nothing can be displayed Connection Type Displays the Connection Type Originator or Target that the controller acts as in this connection Connection State The status of connection e 1 Connecting Configuring In the process of opening a new connection e 2 Spare e 3 ConnectionEstablished Connection is active e 4 ConnectionTimedOut Connection has timed out will stay in this state at least for some time if WatchdogTimeoutAction is set to TimeoutManualReset or TimeoutDelayAutoReset e 5 ConnectionDeferredDelete Connection is about to be deleted and waiting for child connections to be closed first e 6 ConnectionClosing In the process of closing the connection Input Associated input assembly Id with the connection or 0 if none For scanner connections of the controller these field shows the assembly id data is read from Output Associated output assembly id with the connection or 0 if none For scanner connections of the controller these field shows the assembly id data is written to Sent Number of sent packets on this connection Counter wraps with 232 packets Received Number of received packets on this connection Counter wraps with 232 packets Bad Messages Number of received or dropped messages for that connection You can reset this value by pressing Counter Reset PRPI Produced R
329. tchdog time of the AB AO onboard microprocessor 0x0000 0020 CPU cannot communicate with the AB AO onboard microprocessor 0x0000 0040 CPU detected that the present operating mode current voltage is different from the initialized operating mode 0x0001 0000 AB AO onboard microprocessor detected read back error 0x0004 0000 AB AO onboard microprocessor detected wrong supply voltage 0x0008 0000 Within the multiple error occurrence time AB AO onboard microprocessor detected faulty safety switch 0x0080 0000 AB AO onboard microprocessor detected both safety switches as faulty 0x0200 0000 AB AO onboard microprocessor INITIALIZE 0x1000 0000 AB AO onboard microprocessor detected error because of module over temperature 0x2000 0000 AB AO onboard microprocessor detected module over temperature 0x8000 0000 CPU detected error on redundant AB AO onboard microprocessor channel AO 0x Used Write Configuration of analog output channel Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 0 not used 1 used 311 AppendixB System Signal Variables 1 0 Data Read Write Description AO 0x Value Write Output value of analog output channels Voltage mode 10V 10V 1000 1000 Current mode 0 mA 20 mA 0 1000 for values between 1000 0 the output current is 0 mA Board SRS Read System Hack Slot Board Type Read Module type OxFB04 analog output module for GuardPLC 2000 cont
330. ter Output Assembly 1 You can use the default output assembly OUT_121 or create a new output assembly by right clicking EtherNet IP in the project tree and choosing New Output Assembly Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use GuardPLC Controller as an Adapter 2 Modify the default output assembly properties if desired by right clicking the output assembly and choosing Properties Jz JRSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help Chapter 19 Eg SDProject dem Configuration GBR 60000 Resource j i E Distributed 1 0 Protocols EP Ethemet IP d Blfscanner tig 120 IN 120 ffir 121 QUT 121 i GE Typelnstance re BIO GuardPLC 1600 Type Name Assembly ID Output assembly J OUT_121 121 Run Idle header V Data initialization wi OK Cancel Apply Help 3 Type the name for the output assembly in the Name field The Assembly ID can be any number from 120 183 All Assembly IDs under the same EtherNet IP folder must be unique If the Run Idle header box is checked the assembly uses a Run Idle header The default is checked Typically output assemblies always use the Run Idle header Checking the Run Idle header box indicates that the first 4 bytes of the data received by the GuardPLC controller contains the Run Idle header produced by the scanner These 4 bytes are
331. ter Supply 24VDC HM cob Power Supply 2 wire Device Supply COM Using Transmitter Supply f current 500 Q Se If voltage 10kQ Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 333 Appendix C Wiring Examples 1753 IB16 Modules 24VDC Power Supply COM 13 14 15 16 17 18 LS 9 1011 12 L 0000 Di zvoc O Bk gt Allen Bradley Guard PLE A Pros Distributed HO FORCE FAULT Oo 1753 IB16 osL O 16 DC Inputs B O 4 Pulse Test Sources PO PULSE TEST LS 13 14 15 16 L L123 4L 0000 Pulse Tested GuardPLC Ethernet TTT Safety Input 10 100 BaseT qute a2 Dry Contact Dry Contact Light Curtain Safety Input 334 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wiring Examples Appendix C 1753 0B16 Modules Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Safety Relay m CH2 123456 10 11 12 PE DO L1234L DO L 5 678 L auvic O me Allen Bradley Gua PLE D pros O Distributed VO FORCE O mur 1753 0B16 os O 16 DC Outputs BLO DO L 9101112 L DO L 13 141516 L 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Far GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT 12 H2 24V DC Power Supply 335 Appendix C Wiring Examples 1753 IB20X0B8 Module 336 24VDC 4 Power Al A2 Supply COM Safety Relay E NN CJ Safety Relay CHI CH2 Lir ZWDC 5 Power ae o Supply COM CH1 CH
332. tes the program memory of the controller and resets the configuration of the CPU and COM modules GuardPLC 1200 and 2000 controllers only Deletes the program memory of the controller and resets the configuration of the CPU and COM modules This does not affect the battery buffered memory for long term diagnostics short term diagnostics date and time settings system ID SRS or IP address To reset a controller to default settings clear the controller and remove the back up battery for at least 20 seconds Removing the back up battery e deletes date and time e deletes long term and short term diagnosis e deletes the configuration saved in the battery buffered memory e deletes all user accounts e does not delete the program memory e does not reset the configuration of the CPU and COM modules Use Online gt Communication Settings and write the SRS back to the battery buffered memory This validates the configuration so you can restart the routine 136 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Menu Item Set Backplane Type Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Chapter 14 Description Restores backplane information The individual modules CPU COM 1 0 are linked to each other over the backplane The controller requires this information to be able to conduct hardware tests If the EEPROM that stores the backplane information loses its contents use this menu option to write the backplane type back i
333. the power supply No protective grounding against hazardous shock is required GuardPLC 1200 Controller Ground the GuardPLC 1200 controller by connecting the PA terminal marked 24 to earth ground See page 58 for GuardPLC 1200 terminal connections 1 The 1 0 and CPU are only isolated from one another on the GuardPLC 2000 controller Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Terminal Connections Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 General Wiring Considerations Chapter 3 GuardPLC 1600 and GuardPLC 1800 Controllers and Distributed 1 0 The I O module is functionally grounded through its DIN rail connection A protective earth ground connection is required and is provided by a separate grounding screw located on the upper left of the housing and marked with the grounding symbol This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use zinc plated yellow chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials for example aluminum and plastic that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding GuardPLC 2000 Chassis Ground the GuardPLC 2000 chassis and cables by using the grounding screw located on the left side of the grounding grill Ground the chassis via the grounding grill Grounding Grill Terminals accommodate wire sizes up to 1 5 mm 16 AWG for input output wiring and up to 2 5 mm 14 AWG
334. time CS signals faulty 0x0200 All outputs switched off total current too high 0x0400 Within the safety time temperature limit 1 exceeded 0x0800 Within the safety time temperature limit 2 exceeded 0x01000 Within the safety time auxiliary voltage monitoring undervoltage 0x02000 Within the multiple error occurrence time status of the safety switches 314 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 System Signal Variables Appendix B 1 0 Data Read Write Description DO 0y State Read Error mask for counter outputs 1 4 0x01 Error in output channel 0x02 Output channel switched off due to overcurrent 0x04 Error during readback of the output channel 0x08 Faulty initialization after counter reset DO Ox Value Write Output value of counter outputs 1 4 These 4 outputs cannot be driven by counter presets They are driven by user software only 0 Output de energized 1 Output activated 1 Ox 2 counter 01 or 02 2 Oy outputs 01 02 03 or 04 Module Variables for GuardPLC 1600 and 1800 Controllers and Distributed 1 0 The GuardPLC 1600 and 1800 controllers and distributed I O support these module parameters 1 0 Data Read Write Description Module SRS Read Slot number System Hack Slot Module Type Read Module type Digital input module DI20 for GuardPLC 1600 controllers 0x00A5 Digital input module DI20 for 1753 IB20XOB8 Digital in
335. tion and reset the state of input B is evaluated in addition to counter input A When the B input has a low signal while the counter recognizes a negative pulse edge at its A input the value of the counter is incremented by 1 When there is a high signal at the B input the counter is decremented by 1 The counter is released or reset via the Z input The counter is released when there is a constant LOW signal at the Z input A constant HIGH signal halts the counter and a short time HIGH signal resets the counter value to 0 To enable the counter to function correctly configure these parameters in the routine Parameter Setting Cnt 0x 5 24V Mode true for 24V or false for 5V The adjusted level also applies to inputs B and Z You must configure this parameter with a constant Cnt 0x Auto Advance Sense true to count up and down simultaneously Cnt Ox Direction true to decrement counts from 16 777 215 downward or false to increment standard setting Cnt Ox Gray Code false Cnt Ox Reset true If this parameter is set to false the counter value is reset to 0 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 High Speed Counters Chapter 12 Decoder Mode Gray Codes The Gray code is a binary code where the code differs by only one bit with two neighboring numbers Gray codes are useful in mechanical encoders because a slight change in location affects only one bit The controller uses a Gray code 4 bits for a G
336. tion input incrementing the counter with low signal decrementing the counter with high signal 71 72 resets inputs Resets can be made with a short high signal A continuous high signal blocks the counter Resets can also be made by the controller program C1 C2 has no function GuardPLC 2000 controller 1755 HSC only C GuardPLC 2000 controller common reference pole all pins have electrical continuity L GuardPLC 1800 controller common reference pole all pins have electrical continuity L GuardPLC 1200 controller common reference pole all pins have electrical continuity Decoder Mode Decoder mode is used for safety supervising the inputs by Gray code but in the application the bit structure is handled as a normal binary code value To use this value it must be converted in the application The counter inputs can be connected to an incremental encoder with 4 bit binary code to recognize rotation and the direction of rotation Decoder Mode Inputs Pins Functions Al A2 bit 1 LSB B1 B2 bit 2 71 72 bit 3 C1 C2 bit 4 GuardPLC 2000 controllers only 108 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 High Speed Counters Chapter 12 Understand Counter The high speed counters can be configured for three counting modes H Counter mode with manual direction Counter mode with direction Module Configuration and reset and Decoder mode Gray codes Counter Mode Manual Direction The simplest mode of operation is p
337. tput 3 31 04 Analog output 4 32 Reference pole output 4 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter 10 Introduction Safety related Relay Outputs Terminal Connections Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire the 1753 OW8 Relay Output Module Topic Page Safety related Relay Outputs 99 Terminal Connections 99 Voltage Supply Considerations 100 The module has 8 isolated relay outputs whose status is indicated via status indicators An output is in a safety state when it is de energized When a fault Occurs all outputs are switched off Errors in one or more channels are indicated by the FAULT status indicator In addition the system status can be evaluated in the user program If the 1753 OW8 module faults all 8 outputs are switched off This is indicated by the FAULT status indicator Each output has 2 safety relays with positively guided contacts and one MSR type relay Internal non replaceable fuses are used to limit the switching current of the output contacts to 6096 3 15 A of the maximum admissible AC switching current For DC switching the relay contact circuits must be additionally equipped with an external fuse rated no higher than the maximum admissible DC switching capacity See the wire size and terminal torques specifications on page 294 Relay outputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Relay Output 1 D01 Cont
338. tputs LS LS 1 2 3 4 Le Lb db LSs1945 6 7 8 L Lb b LS LS 9 10 11 12 Le LED b LS4 1913 14 15 16 L Lb dh 0000 GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT 123 H2 Ethernet Ports on Bottom of Module 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 0000 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 0000 0000 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 Digital Inputs Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Overview of Safety Controllers Chapter 1 1753 Relay Output and Analog UO Modules 1753 IF8XOF4 Module Voltage Supply Safety Analog Inputs Connection 1753 0W8 Module Voltage Supply Relay Outputs Connection m Lx 3 4 5 8 UG L e E DoT 007 003 001 O 24v DC Oo o o o O RUN O ERROR m K O Proc 53 Allen Bradley Guard PEC H O Force Distributed VO 8 Digtal Outputs O FAULT O osL OBL o o Oo o D Di mm 08 GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT T 3 5 ou ou SS Ethernet Ports on Bottom of Module Relay Outputs O FORCE o avoc oan Allen Bradley Guard PLE Q mme ERROR Distributed VO 4 Analog Outputs PROG om GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT Ethernet Ports on Bottom of Module Standard Analog Outputs GuardPLC 2000 System The GuardPLC 2000 controller is a modular system consisting of a controller 1755 L1 which provides central CPU and communication functions and a separate power supply and I O residing in a GuardPLC 1755 A6 chassi
339. tra Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics Par State Distributed 1 0 HH State Environment Data os IP Settings SA m wl o Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics Date Time 03 03 2004 16 08 20 Date 7 Time 03 03 2004 16 08 20 Control Panel RobotC Tm e last avg min max PADT Resource Communication Test Wo Cycle Time ms 8 E 2 S mgl o SSI Com Time Slice ms 2 Resource State Safety Parameters 1 Cycle Time ms 7 E 2 Number of Time Slices HH Com Time sic Imi 2 CEOE Date Time 03 03 2004 16 08 20 F fyo Online Administrator A F fyo Onine Administrator A Cycle Time ms al 7 2 Com Time shee Im 2 eire 1 3 7 Fo Online administrator 3 Write down the maximum Cycle Time for each controller 4 Write down the maximum Com Time Slice for each controller IMPORTANT Before you continue to optimize settings make sure that Number of Time Slices see above is not greater than 1 If Number of Time Slices max is greater than 1 more than one CPU cycle is needed to carry out all communication tasks In this case you need to determine if it is permissible for communication to take multiple cycles to complete This depends on how many cycles can be completed within the safety time If you need to increase the Com Time Slice start the code generator again and download and start the ne
340. troller to the GuardPLC Controller ded ne o te e Ap ree 219 Configure the Logix Controller in RSLogix 5000 SOLUTO afe us puted yeas gy glace ia P3 a dette e Be eee d 219 Configure the Type of Contection qv dare md ge 220 Download and Go Online caine nya ati mes 225 Monitor Connection Status RP ei ee oe hess oS 226 Use the Force Editor to Test the Connection 227 Remove or Inhibit Connection esrb y EA 228 Open a Class 3 Connection from a Logix Controller 228 Configure the GuardPLC Controller Assemblies 228 Create a Project for the Logix Controller 5 iss 229 Create Tags to Read and Write Assembly Data 229 Create Ladder Ee 4 uses oboe be Gea seotesa es Z3 230 Download and Go to Run pies Ree Y mt arcs e 233 Verify the Data Excelidnge a o oo c es 233 Use a GuardPLC Controller as an Unconnected Adapter 235 Use Unconnected PCCC Messaging from a PLC 5 or SG 5 05 Conroe ie Kb euan atico p xo Deoa eei 235 Configure an EtherNet IP Driver 5 25 ex EE 237 Create an EtherNet IP Project in RSLogix Programming Sofware e enlace echten a Rose be o gb ntis ipte oci situ Sed 237 Add a Message Instruction to Your Application Program LO SIC wis opa dete e oq UV PED GERENS ERE 239 Use Unconnected CIP Messaging from a PanelView Standard Terminal u 8 qae ho ay Sole CRAP 243 Create an EtherNet IP Application 244 Configure the PanelView Terminal for EtherNet IP EE ue 6 ded ron eae e e
341. trollers GuardPLC 1753 Digital 1 0 Modules 1753 IB16 Module Digital Inputs Voltage Supply Connection 123456 2 8 9 101112 13 14 15 18 17 18 78 9 0T T2 LS 5 6 7 8L TT 17 T8 LS 9101112 L 0000 D Di avic O RUN ERROR PROG O Force rur O os O BO Allen Bradley Guo PLC Distributed VO 1753 IB16 16 DC Inputs 4 Pulse Test Sources PO PULSETEST LS 13 14 15 16 L L1234L 0000 0000 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2 27 28 29 30 GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT 12 ei V Digital Inputs Ethernet Ports on Bottom of Module Voltage Supply Connection 123456 T2345 6 0000 DO L 1234L 2a Pulse Test Sources Allen Bradley Voltage Supply Connection avic RUN ERROR PROG Force rur O ost O Bo GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT 12 22 Ethernet Ports on Bottom of Modu Digital Outputs 7 8 9 10112 78 9 01 12 0000 DO L 7 8 9 10L 2A 1753 0B16 Module Digital Voltage Supply Digital Outputs Connection Outputs 12 34556 TITTET 0000 DO L 1234L Allen Bradley 2 8 9 1011 12 79301057 0000 DO L 56 78 L GuorciI BEC D DO 1 9 101112 L 13 14 15 16 17 18 3 41 16 17 16 le 1753 IB20X0B8 Module Guard PLC Oo0000000 Di LS 1 2 3 4L 0000 13 M 15 16 17 18 GuardPLC Ethernet 10 100 BaseT 1H Ei 13 14 15 16 23 24 Ethernet Ports on Bottom of Module 1753 IB8XOB8 Module
342. ts tab to determine which values to read into the controller The Inputs tab contains pre defined system variables that can be interrogated via the assignment of signals e Use the Outputs tab to define output values to send to the Profibus master e Associate each input or output with a signal from the signal editor You can drag and drop signals from the signal editor to the signal connections dialog box amp Signal Connections Configuration 250 Resource 2 Protoco s zi New Connected Signal Delete Connected Sianal New Offsets Help Current baud rate UDINT Data valid BOOL Error code DWORD USINT Current baud rate Data valid Euo coda E Signal Connections Configuration 250 Resource sl x New Connected Signal Delete Connected Signal New Offsets Help Ctrl To Prof Master 01 2 Ct To Prot Master 02 UINT Ctrl To Prof Master 02 Ex Ctrl To Prof Master 03 UINT Ctrl To Prof Master 03 Ctrl To Prof Master 04 Ctrl To Prof Master 05 Pressure 1 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 281 Chapter 22 282 Communicate with Modbus and Profibus Devices 3 Click New Offsets to automatically calculate the offsets for the new signals Due to the offsets of the system variables the offset of the first input signal must begin with 12 The offset for the first output signal begins with 0 The Profibus ID for the first input si
343. uardPLC 2000 controller or 3 bits for GuardPLC 1200 and 1800 controllers that has this structure Step Gray Code Gray Code Cnt 0x Value GuardPLC 2000 GuardPLC 1200 1600 and 1800 0 0000 000 0 1 0001 001 1 2 0011 011 3 3 0010 010 2 4 0110 110 6 5 0111 111 7 6 0101 101 5 7 0100 100 4 8 100 12 9 101 13 0 11 15 1 10 14 12 1010 10 13 1011 1 14 001 9 15 1000 8 Each counter input is fed to three internal counters When a count is accomplished the values of the three internal counters are compared and if the three values differ by more than one bit the measuring result is rejected and Cnt 0x State indicates an error If the measuring result is valid the system variable Cnt Ox Value contains the associated value see the above table Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 111 Chapter 12 High Speed Counters To enable the Gray code decoder to work correctly configure these parameters in the routine Parameter Setting Cnt 0x 5 24V Mode true for 24V or false for 5V The adjusted level also applies to inputs B and Z You must configure this parameter with a constant Cnt 0Ox Auto Advance Sense this setting has no function on the gray code set to false Cnt 0x Direction this setting has no function on the gray code set to false Cnt Ox Gray Code true Cnt Ox Reset this setting has no function on the gray code set t
344. uired fusing 45 Chapter3 General Wiring Considerations Ground the Equipment 46 The 24V DC voltage supply must feature galvanic isolation because inputs and outputs are not electrically isolated from the internal processor To comply with CE Low Voltage Directives LVD you must use either an NEC Class 2 a Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV or a Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV power supply to power the GuardPLC controller or I O module A SELV supply cannot exceed 30V rms 42 4V peak or 60V DC under normal conditions and under single fault conditions A PELV supply has the same rating and is connected to protective earth IMPORTANT Protect the controller with a slow blow fuse You must provide an acceptable grounding path for each device in your application For more information on proper grounding guidelines refer to the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Considerations for Grounding All Controllers e To improve EMC conditions ground the controller e Run the ground connection from the ground screw of the controller to a good earth ground Use a minimum of 2 5 mm 14 AWG wire e Keep the connection to earth ground as short as possible to minimize resistance e Grounding is required even if the control system does not have shielded cables e If you use shielded cables to connect the controller to the external 24V DC source connect the shield to the grounding contact of
345. uld be any names unique to the GuardPLC controller The offsets must be renumbered by using the New Offsets tab The order of this offset determines the order in which these tags appear in the buffer i RSLogix Guard PLUS Hardware Management Project Edit Signals Online Windows Help E Signal Connections Config New Signal Delete Signa New Offsets Help Output Info Type Sie Offset Sina ve INT fromGuard_INT1 Blanne ee 2 ep INT L fi 121 QUT 121 122 IN 122 d 23 001123 Total size 4 bytes Al Typelnstance i B00 GuerdPLC 1800 E Signal Editor dB Programming Terminal New Signal Delete Signal MCP Configuration dummy dummy2 fromGuard_BOOL1 fromGuard_BOOL2 BOOL INT fromGuard INT2 le toGuard BOOLI BOOL toGuard_BOOL2 BOOL e 3 toGuad INT1 Ji CS NT toGuard_INT2 11 20 2007 1 11 20 2007 1 The numeric display objects shown below read the two integers from the GuardPLC controller Tags N120 0 and N120 1 were used to match the input assembly used in the GuardPLC controller The GuardPLC controller does not use the N it is required for FactoryTalk View software r Graphic GuardPLC CPR9test Display E If INT1 read N120 0 INT2 read N120 1 NNNNN 209 Chapter 18 Introduction to EtherNet IP Communication N120 0 corresponds to the first INT tag in the GuardPLC assembly 120 N120 1 corr
346. ule Variables for GuardPLC 1800 EE 326 Digital Analog Input Variables for the GuardPLC 1800 Controller aoa ore Ode EE 328 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wiring Examples Replacing the Back up Battery Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Table of Contents Appendix C INE OCMCUOR soon Mose Fa oq Soe o a e 331 GuardPLC 1600 Controller EE 332 GuardPLC 1800 Controller esque dete cese H 333 1753 IB16 Modules oonan auaa 334 1753 OB16 Modules EECHER 335 1753 IB20XOB8 Module 6544 o RES Y RERO 336 1753 IBSXOBS Modul es eege xo ex Sah a eate 337 1753 BIOXOBS Modules ox 229 Seb as Ed exe ek SES 338 175320 WS Modules ars aee hod wee ees AR 339 1753 IF8XOF4 Modules onnan aaa 340 GuardPLC 1200 Controller n a o ded a a 341 1755 IB24X016 Digital Input Output Modules 342 1755 IF8 Analog Input Modules 343 1755 OF8 Analog Output Modules anaana anaana 343 1755 HSC High Speed Counter Module 344 Appendix D Preventing Electrostatic Discharge e 345 GuardPLC 1200 Controllers A de RE E 346 GuardPLC 2000 Power Supply avo ta cae T gc a kare 347 Battery Disp sal s 2 5 obe suai Soa ge MeV P EE 347 Index Table of Contents 16 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Preface Who Should Use This Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing Manual programming or troubleshooting control systems that use GuardPLC controllers
347. ulse counter 3 bit for Gray Code Cnt Ox Timestamp Read Time stamp for Col Value 24 bit time resolution 11s Cnt 0x Value Overflow Read Counter overflow indication 326 True 24 bit overflow since last measurement only if Cnt x Auto Advance Sense False False No overflow since last cycle Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 System Signal Variables Appendix B 1 0 Data Read Write Description Cnt 0x Time Overflow Read Overflow indication for the time stamp of the counters True 24 bit overflow since last measurement False No 24 bit overflow since last measurement Cnt 0x Direction Read Write Counting direction of the counter only if Cnt 0x Auto Advance Sense False True upward increment False downward decrement Cnt 0x Auto Advance Read Write Automatic counter direction recognition Sense True Automatic recognition on False Manual setting of counter direction Cnt 0x Reset Read Write Reset counter True No reset False Reset Cnt 0x 5 24V Mode Read Write Counter input 5V or 24V True 24V False 5V Cnt 0x Gray Code Read Write Decoder or pulse operation True Gray Code decoder False Pulse operation 1 Ox counter 01 or 02 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 327 Appendix B System Signal Variables Digital Analog Input Variables for the GuardPLC 1800 Controller The di
348. ulse counting with manual direction It can be used for example in connection with a light barrier where counting events are to be recorded The direction of counting is determined by the routine The count begins at 0 and is incremented or decremented by 1 at each negative transition of the counting pulse The resolution of the counter is 24 bits This results in a value range from 0 16 777 215 The counting pulse must be bounce free and must not exceed the maximum frequency of 1 MHz for a GuardPLC 2000 controller or 100 kHz for a GuardPLC 1200 or 1800 controller The counter input can be set to a voltage of 5V or 24V via the software To be sure that the counter functions correctly configure these parameters Parameter Setting Cnt 0x 5 24V Mode true for 24V or false for 5V You must configure this parameter with a constant Cnt Ox Auto Advance Sense optional according to routine false to count only up or only down based upon the direction bit Cnt 0x Direction optional according to routine true to decrement counts from 16 777 215 downward or false to increment Cnt 0x Gray Code optional according to routine false Cnt 0x Reset optional according to routine true If this parameter is set to false the counter value is reset to 0 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 109 Chapter 12 110 High Speed Counters Counter Mode Direction and Reset In pulse counting with direc
349. umber 1 L Reference pole 2 1 Digital output 1 0 5 A 3 2 Digital output 2 0 5 A 4 3 Digital output 3 0 5 A 5 4 Digital output 4 for increased load 20A 6 L Reference pole 7 L Reference pole 8 5 Digital output 5 0 5 A 9 6 Digital output 6 0 5 A 10 7 Digital output 7 0 5 A 11 8 Digital output 8 for increased load 20A 12 L Reference pole 76 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Chapter Wire and Configure the 1753 IB8XOB8 Module Introduction Topic Page Safety related Digital Inputs 77 Safety related Digital Outputs 78 Pulse Test Sources 81 The module features 8 digital inputs 8 positive switching digital outputs 2 negative switching digital outputs and 2 pulsed outputs Safety related Digital The status of the module s 8 digital inputs is indicated via status Inputs indicators when the controller or module is in Run mode LS is a voltage source that provides 24V DC for a group of four inputs There are two groups on the module If devices require 24V DC to operate and use the same power source as the GuardPLC module wire the outputs of the device directly to inputs on the GuardPLC module Devices with their own dedicated power supply can also be connected instead of contacts Connect the reference pole of the signal source to the L reference pole of the input See the wiring diagrams in Appendix C for examples Follow the closed circuit principle for external wiring when con
350. up of 8 outputs may not exceed 8 A total For heat dissipation intersperse high current and low current outputs so that all the high current outputs are not next to each other 73 Chapter 6 74 Wire 1753 1B16 1753 0B16 and 1753 IB20XOB8 Modules The digital outputs are connected to these terminals Terminal Number Designation Function Reference pole Digital output 1 Digital output 2 Digital output 3 Digital output 4 Reference pole Reference pole Digital output 5 Digital output 6 CO CO Jl On Ou By wy F i Digital output 7 Digital output 8 Reference pole Reference pole Digital output 9 Digital output 10 Digital output 11 RO c Digital output 12 sf al ll coy o NI Dy On AJ wl rm gt CH Reference pole Reference pole N Digital output 13 N eng Digital output 14 N N N Co Oo Ou S C5 1 Digital output 1 1 oO O1 Digital output N DA L 1 2 3 4 L L 5 6 7 8 L L 9 1 1 1 L L 1 1 1 1 L Reference pole Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Wire 1753 IB16 1753 0B16 and 1753 IB20XO0B8 Modules Chapter 6 Wire the 1753 IB20X0 B8 The remote I O module features 20 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs Combination Mo dule whose status is indicate via status indicators Safety related Digital Inputs DI DI DI DI DI 194 1
351. ured module is not plugged in Cnt State Read Error mask of both counters 0x0000 No errors detected 0x0001 Error of the counter section of the module 0x0002 Error while comparing the time base 0x0004 Addressing error while reading the time base 0x0008 Parameterization of the time base corrupted 0x0010 Addressing error while reading the counts 0x0020 Parameterization of counter corrupted 0x0040 Addressing error while reading the Gray codes 0x0080 Within the multiple error occurrence time test sample test faulty 0x0100 Error of the module Cnt 0x Value Read Counts of counter 1 or 2 cyclic 24 bit 24 bits for pulse counter 4 bits for Gray code for GuardPLC 2000 controllers 3 bits for Gray code for GuardPLC 1200 controllers Cnt 0x 5 24V Model Read Write DN or 24V mode of counter 1 or 2 The write values must have initial values or constants 0 5V 1 24V Cnt 0x Auto Advance Read Write Automatic recognition of direction of counting for counter 1 or 2 Sense 0 Manual setting of direction of counting 1 Automatic recognition of direction of counting Cnt 0x Direction Read Write Direction of counting for counter 1 or 2 only when Automatic Counter Advance Sense false 0 Up 1 Down Cnt Ox Dummy1 Read Write reserved memory space for future use Cnt Ox Dummy2 Read Write reserved memory space for future use Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 313 AppendixB System Signal Variables
352. us indicators Guard PLC 1200 1754 L28BBB Indicator State Description INput On Digital input channels are high 10 30V DC Off Digital input channels are off OUTput On Digital output channels are high Off Digital output channels are off RUN On This is the normal status of the controller A routine which has been loaded into the controller is executed The controller processes input and output signals carries out communication and performs hardware and software tests Flashing The controller is in Stop mode and is not executing a routine All system outputs are reset Stop mode can be triggered by setting the system variable AB CPU Emergency Stop to TRUE in the routine or by direct command from the programming terminal Off The controller is in Failure_Stop see ERROR ERROR On e A hardware error has been detected by the controller In this case the controller goes to Failure_Stop and the execution of the routine is halted Hardware errors are errors in the controller in one or more of the digital input and output modules or in the counters e A software error in the operating system has been detected by the controller e The watchdog has reported an error because of exceeded cycle time All system outputs will be reset and the controller ceases all hardware and software tests The controller can only be restarted by a command from the programming terminal Fl
353. using it as a Class 3 adapter In both cases an explicit message is sent from the client to the GuardPLC controller addressing one of the built in objects including Identity Assembly PCCC Connection Configuration Port TCP IP and Ethernet Link In the case of an unconnected adapter the message is not sent over a connection but is sent as a single independent request The table below illustrates the differences between unconnected and Class 3 connection requests Unconnected Request Class 3 Connection Request The request can be sent immediately over an established TCP session The request requires a connection to be established before it can be sent When the adapter goes offline the client is unaware until the next time a request is sent The client is notified by the connection timeout logic that the adapter is no longer responding The adapter processes every request independently from the previous ones The request is sent over an established transport and therefore requires less adapter processing In the case of a Logix controller a client request is sent every time the controller is in the Run state and the rung condition is true In the case of a Logix controller a client request is not only sent every time the controller is in the Run state and the rung condition is true but is also sent periodically to keep the connection open In general use a Class 3 connection when data should be ex
354. ute User memory Certified by T V 1755 L1 500 KB application code memory 500 KB application data memory Operating voltages 3 3V DC 5V DC Current consumptions 3 3V 1 5A 5V 0 1A 24V DC 1 0A Front connectors Ethernet connector for RSLogix Guard PLUS software 2 ASCII connectors RS 232 Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Weight 280 g 0 62 Ib 297 AppendixA Specifications Attribute 1755 L1 Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity e EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A B amp C C Tick Australian Radiocommunication Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Certified by T V GuardPLC 2000 Distributed 1755 IB24X0B16 Digital 1 0 Module 1 0 Modules Attribute 1755 IB24X0B16 Digital Inputs Quantity of inputs 24 Nominal input voltage 1 24V DC 10 30V signal Off state input voltage 5V DC max 0 signal On state current 2 mA Q 10V 13 mA Q 30V 3 groups of 8 each group limited to 100 mA Off state current 1 5 m
355. w The ResponseTime is the sum of the following variables described in the table below ResponseTime zs Ton Ty Tog det T5 Response Time Variables Variable Definition Tor Message delay between two PES CPU COM network gt COM CPU Ti Time on CPU to process all protocol stacks T4 CycleTime CPU x n2 where n is the number of cycles needed on CPU to process all protocol stacks Set the Communication Time Slice see below large enough to allow all protocol stacks to be processed in one cycle T2 Delay of the acknowledgement on CPU T2 AckTMO ny x 0 CycleTime CPU If AcKTMO 0 or ProdRate 0 then T 0 Tere Message delay between two PES CPU gt COM network gt COM CPU usually identical with Tee Ts Time on CPU to process all protocol stacks T3 CycleTime CPU4 x ny where nj is the number of cycles needed on CPU to process all protocol stacks Set Communication Time Slice see page 176 large enough to allow all protocol stacks to be processed in one cycle Receive Timeout ReceiveTMO ReceiveTMO is the safety related user configurable monitoring time within which PES must receive a correct response from PES TIP ReceiveTMO is also valid for the return path from PES to PES If ReceiveTMO elapses safety related communication closes down and all imported via communication safety related tags reset to their user configurable initial values
356. w routine on the controller Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 191 Chapter 17 Configure Peer to Peer Communication Reconfigure Watchdog Time To optimize the Watchdog Time to the lowest possible value you must know the maximum CPU cycle time Cycle Time max as displayed on the Statistics tab of the Control Panel is the value that occurred so far but is not necessarily the maximum value that can occur depending on network and process conditions If the maximum Cycle Time cannot be estimated run the project for several hours and under as many conditions as possible Follow these steps to reconfigure the Watchdog Time 1 In the project tree right click the first resource and choose Properties 2 Calculate a Margin of Safety MoS MoS 0 1 x Cycle Time max MoS should be at least 6 ms If MoS lt 6 ms then MoS 6 ms 3 Readjust the Watchdog Time Watchdog Time Cycle Time max MoS In the example on the following page the new Watchdog Time is 8 ms 6 ms 14 ms Control Panel RobotA PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extra H 9 m S mt GuardPLC 1800 Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics Ir Robots System ID SRS pn Safety Time ms Watchdog Time ms eee Autostart Start Restart allowed Loading allowed Ree Test Mode allowed Online Test allowed Forcing alowed 1 Stop on Force Timeout max Com Time Slice ms 8 e e Code Generation Version 3
357. with password is required Disconnect Disconnects the programming software from the selected controller s Coldstart Performs a coldstart on the selected controller s Stop Stops the selected controller s Download Loads the routine s into the selected controller s Prior to download the code generator must have successfully generated program code and the selected controller s must be in Stop mode Important You cannot download a routine into a controller other than the one for which the logic was created Control Panel 2j Starts the control panel for the selected controller s This command can be carried out for a single controller by choosing Online Control Panel Diagnostics KL g Starts the diagnostics display for the selected controller s This command can be carried out for a single controller by choosing Online Diagnostics Force Editor Starts the force editor for the selected controller s This command can be carried out for a single controller by choosing Online gt Force Editor Select All Selects all controllers in the list Deselect Deselects marked controllers Remove Controller Removes the selected controller s from the list Removing a controller from the Multi Control Panel also disconnects the communication 134 Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the Control Panel to Monitor Status Chapter 14 Control Panel Resource To modify the safety
358. y a data type error with the signals in the RSLogix Guard PLUS software scanner configuration Make sure that you have not tried to cross a data type boundary or that you have not used a module with an odd number of bytes with INT or WORD data types Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Use the GuardPLC Controller as a Scanner Chapter 20 9 In RSLogix Guard PLUS software put the GuardPLC controller into RUN mode The configuration is now complete and the I O modules should be working under the control of the GuardPLC controller PADT Resource Communication Test Mode Extr oF gt ww Resource State Safety Parameters Statistics CPU Sia 8 Tele Fadyl OModles 0 arcing activate Femenino Foce Time 2 10 To view the status of the connection in RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software click the Connection Status tab Every connection in the GuardPLC controller is listed on this screen Any non working connections are also listed Y Address 100 100 93 99 GuardPLC 1600 Scanlist Configuration Ele Edit View Network Device Connection Help Gl X eli fs d s 2 e Address Slot Parameters Entry N Device name Connection Name f ZUM status Inhibit Direct Input Only Success Direct Cxclusive Success 34 M Connection Configuration Connection Status A 11 You can also verify the connection status in RSLogix Guard PLUS software
359. y relevant accuracy 1 Operating voltage 24V DC 15 20 ripple lt 15 Current consumption 150 mA 3 3V DC 400 mA 24V DC Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 Specifications Appendix A Attribute 1755 OF8 Weight 280 g 0 53 Ib Certifications when product is marked UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment CE European Union 89 336 EEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions e EN 50082 2 Industrial Immunity e EN 61326 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A B amp C C Tick Australian Radiocommunication Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Functional Safety Certified by T V Publication 1753 UM001C EN P March 2010 301 1755 HSC High Speed Counter Module Attribute 1755 HSC Number of counters 2 Input voltage DV or 24V Input current lt 3 mA Input signal frequency 0 1 MHz Trigger with falling edge Edge steepness 1V us Input cables 500 m Q 100 kHz shielded twisted Input resistance 3 7 kQ Resolution 24 bit value range 0 6 777 215 Accuracy of time basis 0 296 Quantity of outputs 4 digital Output load 0 5A voltage drop lt 3V Output load in summary QA gt 18V Operati
360. y suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1753 UMO001C EN P March 2010 Supersedes Publication 1753 UM001B EN P November 2005 Copyright 2010 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A AB Allen Bradle y GuardPLC Controller Systems User Manual

GuardPLC Controller Systems, User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents